Methods for the diagnosis of metabolic disorders using epimetabolic shifters, multidimensional intracellular molecules, or environmental influences

ABSTRACT

Methods and formulations for diagnosing metabolic disorders in humans using epimetabolic shifters, multidimensional intracellular molecules or environmental influencers are described.

RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 15/011,196, filed Jan. 29, 2016, which is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 12/778,010, filed May 11, 2010, which claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 61/177,241, filed May 11, 2009, U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 61/177,243, filed May 11, 2009, U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 61/177,244, filed May 11, 2009, U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 61/177,245, filed May 11, 2009, and U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 61/177,246, filed May 11, 2009. The entire contents of each of the foregoing applications are hereby incorporated herein by reference.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

The invention relates to the diagnosis of metabolic disorders, such as diabetes and obesity.

As the levels of blood glucose rise postprandially, insulin is secreted and stimulates cells of the peripheral tissues (skeletal muscles and fat) to actively take up glucose from the blood as a source of energy. Loss of glucose homeostasis as a result of dysregulated insulin secretion or action typically results in metabolic disorders such as diabetes, which may be co-triggered or further exacerbated by obesity. Because these conditions are often fatal, strategies to restore adequate glucose clearance from the bloodstream are required.

Although diabetes may arise secondary to any condition that causes extensive damage to the pancreas (e.g., pancreatitis, tumors, administration of certain drugs such as corticosteroids or pentamidine, iron overload (e.g., hemochromatosis), acquired or genetic endocrinopathies, and surgical excision), the most common forms of diabetes typically arise from primary disorders of the insulin signaling system. There are two major types of diabetes, namely type 1 diabetes (also known as insulin dependent diabetes (IDDM)) and type 2 diabetes (also known as insulin independent or non-insulin dependent diabetes (NIDDM)), which share common long-term complications in spite of their different pathogenic mechanisms.

Type 1 diabetes, which accounts for approximately 10% of all cases of primary diabetes, is an organ-specific autoimmune disease characterized by the extensive destruction of the insulin-producing beta cells of the pancreas. The consequent reduction in insulin production inevitably leads to the deregulation of glucose metabolism. While the administration of insulin provides significant benefits to patients suffering from this condition, the short serum half-life of insulin is a major impediment to the maintenance of normoglycemia. An alternative treatment is islet transplantation, but this strategy has been associated with limited success.

Type 2 diabetes, which affects a larger proportion of the population, is characterized by a deregulation in the secretion of insulin and/or a decreased response of peripheral tissues to insulin, i.e., insulin resistance. While the pathogenesis of type 2 diabetes remains unclear, epidemiologic studies suggest that this form of diabetes results from a collection of multiple genetic defects or polymorphisms, each contributing its own predisposing risks and modified by environmental factors, including excess weight, diet, inactivity, drugs, and excess alcohol consumption. Although various therapeutic treatments are available for the management of type 2 diabetes, they are associated with various debilitating side effects. Accordingly, patients diagnosed with or at risk of having type 2 diabetes are often advised to adopt a healthier lifestyle, including loss of weight, change in diet, exercise, and moderate alcohol intake. Such lifestyle changes, however, are not sufficient to reverse the vascular and organ damages caused by diabetes.

Coenzyme Q10, also referred to herein as CoQ10, Q10, ubiquinone, or ubidecarenone, is a popular nutritional supplement and can be found in capsule form in nutritional stores, health food stores, pharmacies, and the like, as a vitamin-like supplement to help protect the immune system through the antioxidant properties of ubiquinol, the reduced form of CoQ10. CoQ10 is art-recognized and further described in International Publication No. WO 2005/069916, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated by reference herein.

CoQ10 is found throughout most tissues of the human body and the tissues of other mammals. The tissue distribution and redox state of CoQ10 in humans has been reviewed in a review article by Bhagavan and Chopra (2006 Free Radical Research 40(5):445-453). The authors report that “as a general rule, tissues with high-energy requirements or metabolic activity such as the heart, kidney, liver and muscle contain relatively high concentrations of CoQ10.” The authors further report that “[a] major portion of CoQ10 in tissues is in the reduced form as the hydroquinone or uniquinol, with the exception of brain and lungs,” which “appears to be a reflection of increased oxidative stress in these two tissues.” In particular, Bhagavan report that in heart, kidney, liver, muscle, intestine and blood (plasma), about 61%, 75%, 95%, 65%, 95% and 96%, respectively, of CoQ10 is in the reduced form. Similarly, Ruiz-Jiminez et al. (2007 J. Chroma A, 1175, 242-248) report that when human plasma was evaluated for Q10 and the reduced form of Q10 (Q10H2), the majority (90%) of the molecule was found in the reduced form.

CoQ10 is very lipophilic and, for the most part, insoluble in water. Due to its insolubility in water, limited solubility in lipids, and relatively large molecular weight, the efficiency of absorption of orally administered CoQ10 is poor. Bhagavan and Chopra report that “in one study with rats it was reported that only about 2-3% of orally-administered CoQ10 was absorbed.” Bhagavan and Chopra further report that “[d]ata from rat studies indicate that CoQ10 is reduced to ubiquinol either during or following absorption in the intestine.”

Given that the strategies currently available for the management of diabetes are suboptimal, there is a compelling need for treatments that are more effective and are not associated with such debilitating side-effects.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The present invention is based, at least in part, on the discovery that application of endogenous Coenzyme Q10 (also referred to as CoQ10 or Q10 herein) to cells results in the restoration of apoptotic potential. The apoptotic response is preferentially induced in cancer cells. A time and dose response of mitochondrial Q10 levels was observed, wherein after 48 hours, the level of Q10 in cell mitochondria was increased by six fold. The invention is further based on the surprising and unexpected discovery that the Q10 is maintained in the supplied oxidized form (pro-oxidant) and not converted to the reduced (anti-oxidant) form of Q10H2 in any significant amounts. The invention is based on the further discovery that a significant number of proteins and mRNA levels are modulated in cells treated with Q10. These modulated proteins were found to be clustered into several cellular pathways, including apoptosis, cancer biology and cell growth, glycolysis and metabolism, molecular transport, and cellular signaling.

Applicants' data described herein has provided insight into the mechanism of action of Q10. In particular, while not wishing to be bound by theory, Applicants' discoveries indicate that Q10 induces a metabolic shift to the cell microenvironment. Many diseases are known to be associated with an altered metabolic state. For example, differential metabolism is known to occur in cancer cells (the Warurg effect), whereby most cancer cells predominantly produce energy by glycolysis followed by lactic acid fermentation in the cytosol, rather than by oxidative phosphorylation (oxidation of pyruvate) in the mitochondria. In another example, metabolic disorders, such as diabetes and obesity, are associated with an altered glucose metabolism.

Accordingly, in certain aspects, the present invention is directed to methods of assessing whether a subject is afflicted with a metabolic disorder. Such methods include (1) determining the level of expression of a marker present in a biological sample obtained from the subject, wherein the marker is selected from the group consisting of the markers listed in Tables 2-4 & 6-29 and 64-69; and (2) comparing the level of expression of the marker present in the biological sample obtained from the subject with the level of expression of the marker present in a control sample, wherein a modulation in the level of expression of the marker in the biological sample obtained from the subject relative to the level of expression of the marker in the control sample is an indication that the subject is afflicted with a metabolic disorder, thereby assessing whether the subject is afflicted with a metabolic disorder.

In certain aspects, the present invention is directed to methods of assessing whether a subject is afflicted with a metabolic disorder. Such methods include (1) determining the level of expression of a marker present in a biological sample obtained from the subject, wherein the expression of the marker is modulated in a disease cell of the metabolic disorder induced to undergo a cellular metabolic energy shift towards normal mitochondrial oxidative phosphorylation; and (2) comparing the level of expression of the marker present in the biological sample obtained from the subject with the level of expression of the marker present in a control sample, wherein a modulation in the level of expression of the marker in the biological sample obtained from the subject relative to the level of expression of the marker in the control sample is an indication that the subject is afflicted with a metabolic disorder, thereby assessing whether the subject is afflicted with a metabolic disorder.

In certain aspects, the present invention is directed to methods of prognosing whether a subject is predisposed to developing a metabolic disorder. Such methods include (1) determining the level of expression of a marker present in a biological sample obtained from the subject, wherein the marker is selected from the group consisting of the markers listed in Tables 2-4 & 6-29 and 64-69; and (2) comparing the level of expression of the marker present in the biological sample obtained from the subject with the level of expression of the marker present in a control sample, wherein a modulation in the level of expression of the marker in the biological sample obtained from the subject relative to the level of expression of the marker in the control sample is an indication that the subject is predisposed to developing a metabolic disorder, thereby prognosing whether the subject is predisposed to developing a metabolic disorder.

In certain aspects, the present invention is directed to methods of prognosing whether a subject is predisposed to developing a metabolic disorder. Such methods include (1) determining the level of expression of a marker present in a biological sample obtained from the subject, wherein the expression of the marker is modulated in a disease cell of the metabolic disorder induced to undergo a cellular metabolic energy shift towards normal mitochondrial oxidative phosphorylation; and (2) comparing the level of expression of the marker present in the biological sample obtained from the subject with the level of expression of the marker present in a control sample, wherein a modulation in the level of expression of the marker in the biological sample obtained from the subject relative to the level of expression of the marker in the control sample is an indication that the subject is predisposed to developing a metabolic disorder, thereby prognosing whether the subject is predisposed to developing a metabolic disorder.

In certain aspects, the present invention is directed to methods for assessing the efficacy of a therapy for treating a metabolic disorder in a subject. Such methods include comparing (1) the level of expression of a marker present in a first sample obtained from the subject prior to administering at least a portion of the treatment regimen to the subject, wherein the marker is selected from the group consisting of the markers listed in Tables 2-4 & 6-29 and 64-69; with (2) the level of expression of the marker present in a second sample obtained from the subject following administration of at least a portion of the treatment regimen, wherein a modulation in the level of expression of the marker in the second sample as compared to the first sample is an indication that the therapy is efficacious for treating the metabolic disorder in the subject.

In certain aspects, the present invention is directed to methods for assessing the efficacy of a therapy for treating a metabolic disorder in a subject. Such methods include comparing (1) the level of expression of a marker present in a first sample obtained from the subject prior to administering at least a portion of the treatment regimen to the subject, wherein the expression of the marker is modulated in a disease cell of the metabolic disorder induced to undergo a cellular metabolic energy shift towards normal mitochondrial oxidative phosphorylation; with (2) the level of expression of the marker present in a second sample obtained from the subject following administration of at least a portion of the treatment regimen, wherein a modulation in the level of expression of the marker in the second sample as compared to the first sample is an indication that the therapy is efficacious for treating the metabolic disorder in the subject.

In certain aspects, the present invention is directed to methods of assessing the efficacy of an environmental influencer compound for treating a metabolic disorder to in a subject in need thereof. Such methods include (1) determining the level of expression of one or more markers present in a biological sample obtained from the subject, wherein the biological sample is exposed to the environmental influencer compound, and wherein the marker is selected from the group consisting of the markers listed in Tables 2-4 & 6-29 and 64-69 with a positive fold change and/or with a negative fold change; (2) determining the level of expression of the one or more markers present in a second biological sample obtained from the subject, wherein the sample is not exposed to the environmental influencer compound; and (3) comparing the level of expression of the one of more markers in the biological sample exposed to the environmental influencer compound and the level of expression of the one of more markers in the biological sample not exposed to the environmental influencer compound, wherein a decrease in the level of expression of the one or more markers with a negative fold change present in the biological sample exposed to the environmental influencer compound relative to the level of expression of the one or more markers present in the second sample is an indication that the environmental influencer compound is efficacious for treating the metabolic disorder in the subject in need thereof, and, wherein an increase in the level of expression of the one or more markers with a positive fold change present in the biological sample exposed to the environmental influencer compound relative to the level of expression of the one or more markers present in the second sample is an indication that the environmental influencer compound is efficacious for treating the metabolic disorder in the subject in need thereof, thereby assessing the efficacy of the environmental influencer compound for treating the metabolic disorder.

In certain aspects, the present invention is directed to methods of assessing the efficacy of an environmental influencer compound for treating a metabolic disorder to in a subject in need thereof. Such methods include (1) determining the level of expression of one or more markers present in a biological sample obtained from the subject, wherein the biological sample is exposed to the environmental influencer compound, and wherein the expression of the marker is up- or down-regulated, in a disease cell of the metabolic disorder induced to undergo a cellular metabolic energy shift towards normal mitochondrial oxidative phosphorylation; (2) determining the level of expression of the one or more markers present in a second biological sample obtained from the subject, wherein the sample is not exposed to the environmental influencer compound; and (3) comparing the level of expression of the one of more markers in the biological sample exposed to the environmental influencer compound and the level of expression of the one of more markers in the biological sample not exposed to the environmental influencer compound, wherein a decrease, in the biological sample exposed to the environmental influencer compound, in the level of expression of the one or more down-regulated markers relative to the level of expression of the one or more markers present in the second sample is an indication that the environmental influencer compound is efficacious for treating the metabolic disorder in the subject in need thereof, and, wherein an increase, in the biological sample exposed to the environmental influencer compound, in the level of expression of the one or more up-regulated markers relative to the level of expression of the one or more markers present in the second sample is an indication that the environmental influencer compound is efficacious for treating the metabolic disorder in the subject in need thereof, thereby assessing the efficacy of the environmental influencer compound for treating the metabolic disorder.

In certain aspects, the present invention is directed to methods of identifying a compound for treating a metabolic disorder in a subject. Such methods include (1) obtaining a biological sample from the subject; (2) contacting the biological sample with a test compound; (3) determining the level of expression of one or more markers present in the biological sample obtained from the subject, wherein the marker is selected from the group consisting of the markers listed in Tables 2-4 & 6-29 and 64-69 with a positive fold change and/or with a negative fold change; (4) comparing the level of expression of the one of more markers in the biological sample with a control sample not contacted by the test compound; and (5) selecting a test compound that decreases the level of expression of the one or more markers with a negative fold change present in the biological sample and/or increases the level of expression of the one or more markers with a positive fold change present in the biological sample, thereby identifying a compound for treating a metabolic disorder in a subject.

In certain aspects, the present invention is directed to methods of identifying a compound for treating a metabolic disorder in a subject. Such methods include (1) obtaining a biological sample from the subject; (2) contacting the biological sample with a test compound; (3) determining the level of expression of one or more markers present in the biological sample obtained from the subject, wherein the expression of the marker is up- or down-regulated, in a disease cell of the metabolic disorder induced to undergo a cellular metabolic energy shift towards normal mitochondrial oxidative phosphorylation; (4) comparing the level of expression of the one of more markers in the biological sample with a control sample not contacted by the test compound; and (5) selecting a test compound that decreases the level of expression, in the biological sample, of the one or more down-regulated markers, and/or increases the level of expression, in the biological sample, of the one or more up-regulated markers, thereby identifying a compound for treating a metabolic disorder in a subject.

In some embodiments, the metabolic disorder is a disorder selected from the group consisting of diabetes, obesity, pre-diabetes, hypertension, cardiovascular disease, metabolic syndrome, and any key elements of a metabolic disorder.

In some embodiments, the marker(s) selectively elicits, in a disease cell of the subject, a cellular metabolic energy shift towards normalized mitochondrial oxidative phosphorylation.

In some embodiments, the sample comprises a fluid obtained from the subject, e.g., a fluid selected from blood fluids, vomit, saliva, lymph, cystic fluid, urine, fluids collected by bronchial lavage, fluids collected by peritoneal rinsing, and gynecological fluids. In some embodiments, the sample is a blood sample or a component thereof. In some embodiments, the sample comprises a tissue or component thereof obtained from the subject, e.g., tissue selected from bone, connective tissue, cartilage, lung, liver, kidney, muscle tissue, heart, pancreas, and skin.

In some embodiments, the subject is a human.

In some embodiments, the level of expression of the marker in the biological sample is determined by assaying a transcribed polynucleotide or a portion thereof in the sample. In some embodiments, assaying the transcribed polynucleotide comprises amplifying the transcribed polynucleotide. In some embodiments, the level of expression of the marker in the subject sample is determined by assaying a protein or a portion thereof in the sample. In some embodiments, the marker is assayed using a reagent, e.g., a labeled reagent, which specifically binds with the marker. Reagents may include, for example, an antibody and an antigen-binding antibody fragment.

In some embodiments, the level of expression of the marker in the sample is determined using a technique selected from the group consisting of polymerase chain reaction (PCR) amplification reaction, reverse-transcriptase PCR analysis, single-strand conformation polymorphism analysis (SSCP), mismatch cleavage detection, heteroduplex analysis, Southern blot analysis, Northern blot analysis, Western blot analysis, in situ hybridization, array analysis, deoxyribonucleic acid sequencing, restriction fragment length polymorphism analysis, and combinations or sub-combinations thereof, of said sample. In some embodiments, the level of expression of the marker in the sample is determined using a technique selected from the group consisting of immunohistochemistry, immunocytochemistry, flow cytometry, ELISA and mass spectrometry.

In some embodiments, the marker is a marker selected from the group consisting of HNF4-alpha, Bcl-xl, Bcl-xS, BNIP-2, Bcl-2, Birc6, Bcl-2-L11 (Bim), XIAP, BRAF, Bax, c-Jun, Bmf, PUMA, cMyc, transaldolase 1, COQ1, COQ3, COQ6, prenyltransferase, 4-hydrobenzoate, neutrophil cytosolic factor 2, nitric oxide synthase 2A, superoxide dismutase 2, VDAC, Bax channel, ANT, Cytochrome c, complex 1, complex II, complex Ill, complex IV, Foxo 3a, DJ-1, IDH-1, Cpt1C and Cam Kinase II. In some embodiments, the marker is a marker associated with apoptosis. In some embodiments, the marker is a marker associated with oxidative stress. In some embodiments, the marker is a marker associated with heat shock. In some embodiments, the marker is a marker associated with angiogenesis. In some embodiments, the marker is a marker associated with diabetes. In some embodiments, the marker is a marker associated with hypertension. In some embodiments, the marker is a marker associated with cardiovascular disease.

In some embodiments, the level of expression of a plurality of markers is determined.

In some embodiments, the subject is being treated with a therapy selected from an environmental influencer compound, a sulfonylurea compound, a meglitinide compound, prandin, a nateglinide compound, a biguanide compound, a thiazolidinedione compound, precose, symlin, Byetta, a DPP-IV inhibitor, and insulin. In some embodiments, the therapy comprises an environmental influencer compound. Environmental influencer compounds can be, for example, multidimensional intracellular molecules (MIMs) or epimetabolic shifters (epi-shifters). In some embodiments, the environmental influencer compound is CoQ-10. In some embodiments, the environmental influencer compound is vitamin D3. In some embodiments, the environmental influencer compound is a compound selected from acetyl Co-A, palmityl, L-carnitine, tyrosine, phenylalanine, cysteine and a small molecule. In some embodiments, the environmental influencer compound is a compound selected from fibronectin, TNF-alpha, IL-5, IL-12, IL-23, an angiogenic factor and an apoptotic factor. In some embodiments, the therapy further comprises a treatment regimen selected from treatment with a sulfonylurea compound, treatment with a meglitinide compound, treatment with prandin, treatment with a nateglinide compound, treatment with a biguanide compound, treatment with a thiazolidinedione compound, treatment with precose, treatment with symlin, treatment with Byetta, treatment with a DPP-IV inhibitor, and treatment with insulin.

In certain aspects, the present invention is directed to kits for assessing whether a subject is afflicted with a metabolic disorder. Such kits include reagents for determining the level of expression of at least one marker selected from the group consisting of the markers listed in Tables 2-4 & 6-29 and 64-69, and instructions for use of the kit to assess whether the subject is afflicted with the metabolic disorder.

In certain aspects, the present invention is directed to kits for prognosing whether a subject is predisposed to developing a metabolic disorder. Such kits include reagents for determining the level of expression of at least one marker selected from the group consisting of the markers listed in Tables 2-4 & 6-29 and 64-69, and instructions for use of the kit to prognose whether the subject is predisposed to developing the metabolic disorder.

In certain aspects, the present invention is directed to kits for assessing the efficacy of a therapy for treating a metabolic disorder. Such kits include reagents for determining the level of expression of at least one marker selected from the group consisting of the markers listed in Tables 2-4 & 6-29 and 64-69, and instructions for use of the kit to assess the efficacy of the therapy for treating the metabolic disorder.

In certain aspects, the present invention is directed to kits for assessing the efficacy of an environmental influencer compound for treating a metabolic disorder to in a subject having a metabolic disorder. Such kits include reagents for determining the level of expression of at least one marker selected from the group consisting of the markers listed in Tables 2-4 & 6-29 and 64-69, and instructions for use of the kit to assess the efficacy of the environmental influencer compound for treating the metabolic disorder in the subject having the metabolic disorder.

In some embodiments, the kit further comprises means for obtaining a biological sample from a subject. In some embodiments, the kit further comprises a control sample. In some embodiments, further comprises an environmental influencer compound. In some embodiments, the kit comprises reagents for determining the level of expression of a plurality of markers.

In some embodiments, the means for determining the level of expression of at least one marker comprises means for assaying a transcribed polynucleotide or a portion thereof in the sample. In some embodiments, the means for determining the level of expression of at least one marker comprises means for assaying a protein or a portion thereof in the sample.

In certain aspects, the present invention is directed to methods of assessing whether a subject is afflicted with a CoQ10 responsive state. Such methods include (1) determining the level of expression of a marker present in a biological sample obtained from the subject, wherein the marker is selected from the group consisting of the markers listed in Tables 2-4 & 6-29 and 64-69; and (2) comparing the level of expression of the marker present in the biological sample obtained from the subject with the level of expression of the marker present in a control sample, wherein a modulation in the level of expression of the marker in the biological sample obtained from the subject relative to the level of expression of the marker in the control sample is an indication that the subject is afflicted with the CoQ10 responsive state, thereby assessing whether the subject is afflicted with a CoQ10 responsive state. In some embodiments, the CoQ10 responsive state is a metabolic disorder.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1: Sensitivity of SK-MEL-28 to 24 hours of Q10 treatment measured by the amount of early and late apoptotic cells.

FIG. 2: Sensitivity of SKBR3 to 24 hours of Q10 treatment measured by the amount of early and late apoptotic cells.

FIG. 3: Sensitivity of PaCa2 to 24 hours of Q10 treatment measured by the amount of early and late apoptotic cells.

FIG. 4: Sensitivity of PC-3 to 24 hours of Q10 treatment measured by the amount of early and late apoptotic cells.

FIG. 5: Sensitivity of HepG2 to 24 hours of Q10 treatment measured by the amount of early and late apoptotic cells.

FIG. 6: Sensitivity of MCF-7 to 24 hours of Q10 treatment measured by the amount of early and late apoptotic cells.

FIG. 7: Measurement of apoptotic cells upon 24 hour treatment with Q10, as measured by Apostrand ELISA method.

FIG. 8: Example gel analysis of 2-D gel electrophoresis. Spots excised for identification are marked.

FIG. 9: Network of interaction between proteins identified by 2-D gel electrophoresis as being modulated by Q10 in SK-MEL-28 cells.

FIG. 10: The pentose phosphate pathway adapted from Verhoeven et al. (Am. J. Hum. Genet. 2001 68(5):1086-1092).

FIG. 11: 2-D gel of the mitochondrial enriched material of SK-MEL-28 cells. Spots excised and identified by mass spectrometry characterization are marked.

FIG. 12: Comparative plot of the relative amounts of Q10 present in SK-MEL-28 mitochondria following the exogenous addition of 100 μM Q10 into the culture medium.

FIG. 13A: Apoptosis signaling pathway mapping known processes.

FIG. 13B: PTEN signaling pathway.

FIG. 14: Western blot analysis of Bcl-xl.

FIG. 15: Western blot analysis of SK-MEL-28 sample set proved with a Vimentin antibody.

FIG. 16: Western blot analysis of cell lysis from a number of cell lines, evaluated with five antibodies targeting oxidative phosphorylation complexes (MitoSciences #MS601).

FIG. 17: Western blot comparison of F1-alpha levels.

FIG. 18: Western blot comparison of Q10 response with C-III-Core 2.

FIG. 19: Western blot comparison of Q10 response with C-II-30.

FIG. 20: Western blot comparison of Q10 response with C-IV-COX II.

FIG. 21: Western blot comparison of Q10 response with C-I-20 (ND6).

FIG. 22: Western blot analysis of a variety of cell types against five mitochondrial protein.

FIG. 23: Western blot comparison of Q10 response with Complex V protein C-V-α.

FIG. 24: Western blot comparison of Q10 response with C-III-Core 1.

FIG. 25: Western blot comparison of Q10 response with Porin (VDAC1).

FIG. 26: Western blot comparison of Q10 response with Cyclophilin D.

FIG. 27: Western blot comparison of Q10 response with Cytochrome C.

FIG. 28: Theoretical model of Q10 (spheres) inserted into the lipid binding channel of HNF4alpha (1M7W.pdb) in the Helix 10 open conformation.

FIG. 29: OCR in HDFa cells in various glucose conditions in normoxic and hypoxic conditions.

FIG. 30: OCR in HASMC cells in various glucose conditions in normoxic and hypoxic conditions.

FIG. 31: OCR values in MCF-7 breast cancer cells in the absence and presence of CoQ10 and stressors.

FIG. 32: OCR values in PaCa-2 pancreatic cancer cells in the absence and presence of CoQ10 and stressors.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION Definitions

As used herein, each of the following terms has the meaning associated with it in this section.

The articles “a” and “an” are used herein to refer to one or to more than one (i.e. to at least one) of the grammatical object of the article. By way of example, “an element” means one element or more than one element.

The term “including” is used herein to mean, and is used interchangeably with, the phrase “including but not limited to”.

The term “or” is used herein to mean, and is used interchangeably with, the term “and/or,” unless context clearly indicates otherwise.

The term “such as” is used herein to mean, and is used interchangeably, with the phrase “such as but not limited to”.

A “patient” or “subject” to be treated by the method of the invention can mean either a human or non-human animal, preferably a mammal. As used herein, a “subject” or a “patient” includes, without limitation, any animal (e.g., a human), including horses, dogs, cats, pigs, goats, rabbits, hamsters, monkeys, guinea pigs, rats, mice, lizards, snakes, sheep, cattle, fish, and birds.

As used herein, “survival” refers to the continuation of life of a subject which has been treated for a metabolic disorder. In one embodiment, survival refers to the failure of a metabolic disorder to recur.

“Preventing” or “prevention” refers to a reduction in risk of acquiring a disease or disorder (i.e., causing at least one of the clinical symptoms of the disease not to develop in a patient that may be exposed to or predisposed to the disease but does not yet experience or display symptoms of the disease).

As used herein, the term “amount”, refers to either (a) an absolute amount as measured in molecules, moles or weight per unit volume or cell or (b) a relative amount as designated, for example, by a numerical rating from 0 to 5.

The term “control amount”, as used herein, refers to the amount of marker in a cell or a sample derived from a subject not afflicted with a metabolic disorder. The “control amount” may, for example, be determined by calculating the average amount of marker present in cells or tissues that are known to express the marker, e.g., express these proteins at high levels, intermediate levels and low levels.

“Therapeutically effective amount” means the amount of a compound that, when administered to a patient for treating a disease, is sufficient to effect such treatment for the disease. When administered for preventing a disease, the amount is sufficient to avoid or delay onset of the disease. The “therapeutically effective amount” will vary depending on the compound, the disease and its severity and the age, weight, etc., of the patient to be treated.

“Preventing” or “prevention” refers to a reduction in risk of acquiring a disease or disorder (i.e., causing at least one of the clinical symptoms of the disease not to develop in a patient that may be exposed to or predisposed to the disease but does not yet experience or display symptoms of the disease).

The term “prophylactic” or “therapeutic” treatment refers to administration to the subject of one or more of the subject compositions. If it is administered prior to clinical manifestation of the unwanted condition (e.g., disease or other unwanted state of the host animal) then the treatment is prophylactic, i.e., it protects the host against developing the unwanted condition, whereas if administered after manifestation of the unwanted condition, the treatment is therapeutic (i.e., it is intended to diminish, ameliorate or maintain the existing unwanted condition or side effects therefrom).

The term “therapeutic effect” refers to a local or systemic effect in animals, particularly mammals, and more particularly humans caused by a pharmacologically active substance. The term thus means any substance intended for use in the diagnosis, cure, mitigation, treatment or prevention of disease or in the enhancement of desirable physical or mental development and conditions in an animal or human. The phrase “therapeutically-effective amount” means that amount of such a substance that produces some desired local or systemic effect at a reasonable benefit/risk ratio applicable to any treatment. In certain embodiments, a therapeutically-effective amount of a compound will depend on its therapeutic index, solubility, and the like. For example, certain compounds discovered by the methods of the present invention may be administered in a sufficient amount to produce a reasonable benefit/risk ratio applicable to such treatment.

The term “expression” is used herein to mean the process by which a polypeptide is produced from DNA. The process involves the transcription of the gene into mRNA and the translation of this mRNA into a polypeptide. Depending on the context in which used, “expression” may refer to the production of RNA, protein or both.

The terms “level of expression of a gene in a cell” or “gene expression level” refer to the level of mRNA, as well as pre-mRNA nascent transcript(s), transcript processing intermediates, mature mRNA(s) and degradation products, encoded by the gene in the cell.

The term “modulation” refers to upregulation (i.e., activation or stimulation), downregulation (i.e., inhibition or suppression) of a response, or the two in combination or apart. A “modulator” is a compound or molecule that modulates, and may be, e.g., an agonist, antagonist, activator, stimulator, suppressor, or inhibitor.

A “higher level of expression”, “higher level of activity”, “increased level of expression” or “increased level of activity” refers to an expression level and/or activity in a test sample that is greater than the standard error of the assay employed to assess expression and/or activity, and is preferably at least twice, and more preferably three, four, five or ten or more times the expression level and/or activity of the marker in a control sample (e.g., a sample from a healthy subject not afflicted with an ontological disorder) and preferably, the average expression level and/or activity of the marker in several control samples.

A “lower level of expression”, “lower level of activity”, “decreased level of expression” or “decreased level of activity” refers to an expression level and/or activity in a test sample that is greater than the standard error of the assay employed to assess expression and/or activity, but is preferably at least twice, and more preferably three, four, five or ten or more times less than the expression level of the marker in a control sample (e.g., a sample that has been calibrated directly or indirectly against a panel of ontological disorders with follow-up information which serve as a validation standard for prognostic ability of the marker) and preferably, the average expression level and/or activity of the marker in several control samples.

As used herein, “antibody” includes, by way of example, naturally-occurring forms of antibodies (e.g., IgG, IgA, IgM, IgE) and recombinant antibodies such as single-chain antibodies, chimeric and humanized antibodies and multi-specific antibodies, as well as fragments and derivatives of all of the foregoing, which fragments and derivatives have at least an antigenic binding site. Antibody derivatives may comprise a protein or chemical moiety conjugated to an antibody.

As used herein, “known standard” or “control” refers to one or more of an amount and/or mathematical relationship, as applicable, with regard to a marker of the invention, and the presence or absence of a metabolic disorder. Reagents for generating a known standard include, without limitation, cells from a patient without a metabolic disorder and optionally labeled antibodies. Known standards may also include tissue culture cell lines (including, but not limited to, cell lines that have been manipulated to express specific marker proteins or to not express specific marker proteins, or samples that either constitutively contain constant amounts of marker protein, or can be manipulated (e.g., by exposure to a changed environment, where such changed environment may include but not limited to growth factors, hormones, steroids, cytokines, antibodies, various drugs and anti-metabolites, and extracellular matrices) to express a marker protein. Cell lines may be mounted directly on glass slides for analysis, fixed, embedded in paraffin directly as a pellet, or suspended in a matrix such as agarose, then fixed, embedded in paraffin, sectioned and processed as tissue samples. The standards must be calibrated directly or indirectly against a panel of patient samples with follow-up information which serve as a validation standard for prognostic ability of the marker proteins.

“Primary treatment” as used herein, refers to the initial treatment of a subject afflicted with a metabolic disorder. Primary treatments include, without limitation, treatment with a sulfonylurea compound, a meglitinide compound, prandin, a nateglinide compound, a biguanide compound, a thiazolidinedione compound, precose, symlin, Byetta, a DPP-IV inhibitor, or insulin.

A metabolic disorder is “treated” if at least one symptom of the metabolic disorder is expected to be or is alleviated, terminated, slowed, or prevented. As used herein, an metabolic disorder is also “treated” if recurrence or progression of the metabolic disorder is reduced, slowed, delayed, or prevented.

A kit is any manufacture (e.g. a package or container) comprising at least one reagent, e.g. a probe, for specifically detecting a marker of the invention, the manufacture being promoted, distributed, or sold as a unit for performing the methods of the present invention.

“Metabolic pathway” refers to a sequence of enzyme-mediated reactions that transform one compound to another and provide intermediates and energy for cellular functions. The metabolic pathway can be linear or cyclic.

“Metabolic state” refers to the molecular content of a particular cellular, multicellular or tissue environment at a given point in time as measured by various chemical and biological indicators as they relate to a state of health or disease.

The term “microarray” refers to an array of distinct polynucleotides, oligonucleotides, polypeptides (e.g., antibodies) or peptides synthesized on a substrate, such as paper, nylon or other type of membrane, filter, chip, glass slide, or any other suitable solid support.

The terms “disorders” and “diseases” are used inclusively and refer to any deviation from the normal structure or function of any part, organ or system of the body (or any combination thereof). A specific disease is manifested by characteristic symptoms and signs, including biological, chemical and physical changes, and is often associated with a variety of other factors including, but not limited to, demographic, environmental, employment, genetic and medically historical factors. Certain characteristic signs, symptoms, and related factors can be quantitated through a variety of methods to yield important diagnostic information.

In some embodiments, the present invention provides methods for diagnosing or prognosisg a Coenzyme Q10 responsive state in a subject in need thereof. The language “Coenzyme Q10 responsive state,” or “CoQ10 responsive state,” includes diseases, disorders, states and/or conditions which can be treated, prevented, or otherwise ameliorated by the administration of Coenzyme Q10. Without wishing to be bound by any particular theory, and as described further herein, it is believed that CoQ10 functions, at least partially, by inducing a metabolic shift to the cell microenvironment, such as a shift towards the type and/or level of oxidative phosphorylation in normal state cells. Accordingly, in some embodiments, CoQ10 responsive states are states that arise from an altered metabolism of cell microenvironment. Coenzyme Q10 responsive states include, for example, oncological disorders, which, for example, may be biased towards glycolysis and lactate biosynthesis. In some embodiments, CoQ10 responsive oncological disorders include liver cancer, pancreatic cancer, breast cancer, prostate cancer, liver cancer, or bone cancer, squamous cell carcinomas, basal cell carcinomas, melanomas, and actinic keratosis, among others. Coenzyme Q10 responsive states also include, for example, metabolic disorders such as obesity, diabetes, pre-diabetes, Metabolic Syndrome, satiety, and endocrine abnormalities. Coenzyme Q10 responsive states further include other metabolic disorders as described herein.

In some embodiments, the compounds of the present invention, e.g., the MIMs or epi-shifters described herein, share a common activity with Coenzyme Q10. As used herein, the phrase “share a common activity with Coenzyme Q10” refers to the ability of a compound to exhibit at least a portion of the same or similar activity as Coenzyme Q10. In some embodiments, the compounds of the present invention exhibit 25% or more of the activity of Coenzyme Q10. In some embodiments, the compounds of the present invention exhibit up to and including about 130% of the activity of Coenzyme Q10. In some embodiments, the compounds of the present invention exhibit about 30%, 31%, 32%, 33%, 34%, 35%, 36%, 37%, 38%, 39%, 40%, 41%, 42%, 43%, 44%, 45%, 46%, 47%, 48%, 49%, 50%, 51%, 52%, 53%, 54%, 55%, 56%, 57%, 58%, 59%, 60%, 61%, 62%, 63%, 64%, 65%, 66%, 67%, 68%, 69%, 70%, 71%, 72%, 73%, 74%, 75%, 76%, 77%, 78%, 79%, 80%, 81%, 82%, 83%, 84%, 85%, 86%, 87%, 88%, 89%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, 100%, 101%, 102%, 103%, 104%, 105%, 106%, 107%, 108%, 109%, 110%, 111%, 112%, 113%, 114%, 115%, 116%, 117%, 118%, 119%, 120%, 121%, 122%, 123%, 124%, 125%, 126%, 127%, 128%, 129%, or 130% of the activity of Coenzyme Q10. It is to be understood that each of the values listed in this paragraph may be modified by the term “about.” Additionally, it is to be understood that any range which is defined by any two values listed in this paragraph is meant to be encompassed by the present invention. For example, in some embodiments, the compounds of the present invention exhibit between about 50% and about 100% of the activity of Coenzyme Q10. In some embodiments, the activity shared by Coenzyme Q10 and the compounds of the present invention is the ability to induce a shift in cellular metabolism. In certain embodiments, the activity shared by of CoQ10 and the compounds of the present invention is measured by OCR (Oxygen Consumption Rate) and/or ECAR (ExtraCellular Acidification Rate).

A kit is any manufacture (e.g. a package or container) comprising at least one reagent, e.g. a probe, for specifically detecting a marker of the invention, the manufacture being promoted, distributed, or sold as a unit for performing the methods of the present invention.

The term “intermediate of the coenzyme biosynthesis pathway” as used herein, characterizes those compounds that are formed between the chemical/biological conversion of tyrosine and Acetyl-CoA to uqiquinone. Intermediates of the coenzyme biosynthesis pathway include 3-hexaprenyl-4-hydroxybenzoate, 3-hexaprenyl-4,5-dihydroxybenzoate, 3-hexaprenyl-4-hydroxy-5-methoxybenzoate, 2-hexaprenyl-6-methoxy-1,4-benzoquinone, 2-hexaprenyl-3-methyl-6-methoxy-1,4-benzoquinone, 2-hexaprenyl-3-methyl-5-hydroxy-6-methoxy-1,4-benzoquinone, 3-Octaprenyl-4-hydroxybenzoate, 2-octaprenylphenol, 2-octaprenyl-6-metholxyphenol, 2-octaprenyl-3-methyl-6-methoxy-1,4-benzoquinone, 2-octaprenyl-3-methyl-5-hydroxy-6-methoxy-1,4-benzoquinone, 2-decaprenyl-3-methyl-5-hydroxy-6-methoxy-1,4-benzoquinone, 2-decaprenyl-3-methyl-6-methoxy-1,4-benzoquinone, 2-decaprenyl-6-methoxy-1,4-benzoquinone, 2-decaprenyl-6-methoxyphenol, 3-decaprenyl-4-hydroxy-5-methoxybenzoate, 3-decaprenyl-4,5-dihydroxybenzoate, 3-decaprenyl-4-hydroxybenzoate, 4-hydroxy phenylpyruvate, 4-hydroxyphenyllactate, 4-hydroxy-benzoate, 4-hydroxycinnamate and hexaprenydiphosphate.

As used herein, the phrase “anaerobic use of glucose” or “anaerobic glycolysis” refers to cellular production of energy by glycolysis followed by lactic acid fermentation in the cytosol. For example, many cancer cells produce energy by anaerobic glycolysis.

As used herein, the phrase “aerobic glycolysis” or “mitochondrial oxidative phosphorylation” refers to cellular production of energy by glycolysis followed by oxidation of pyruvate in mitochondria.

As used herein, the phrase “capable of blocking anaerobic use of glucose and augmenting mitochondrial oxidative phosphorylation” refers to the ability of an environmental influencer (e.g., an epitmetabolic shifter) to induce a shift or change in the metabolic state of a cell from anaerobic glycolysis to aerobic glycolysis or mitochondrial oxidative phosphorylation.

I. Metabolic Disorders

The present invention provides methods for diagnosing or prognosisg a metabolic disorder. A “metabolic disorder”, as used herein, refers to any pathological condition resulting from an alteration in a patient's metabolism. Such disorders include those associated with aberrant whole-body glucose, lipd and/or protein metabolism and pathological consequences arising therefrom. Metabolic disorders include those resulting from an alteration in glucose homeostasis resulting, for example, in hyperglycemia. According to this invention, an alteration in glucose levels is typically an increase in glucose levels by at least 5%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, or even 100% relative to such levels in a healthy individual. Metabolic disorders can detrimentally affect cellular functions such as cellular proliferation, growth, differentiation, or migration, cellular regulation of homeostasis, inter- or intra-cellular communication; tissue function, such as liver function, muscle function, or adipocyte function; systemic responses in an organism, such as hormonal responses (e.g., insulin response). Metabolic disorders include, but are not limited to, obesity, diabetes (also referred to herein as diabetes mellitus) (e.g., diabetes type 1, diabetes type II, MODY, and gestational diabetes), pre-diabetes, Metabolic Syndrome, satiety, and endocrine abnormalities, e.g., of aging. Further examples of metabolic disorders include, but are not limited to, hyperphagia, hypophagia, triglyceride storage disease, Bardet-Biedl syndrome, Lawrence-Moon syndrome, Prader-Labhart-Willi syndrome, Kearns-Sayre syndrome, anorexia, medium chain acyl-CoA dehydrogenase deficiency, and cachexia. In some embodiments, the metabolic disorder is a Coenzyme Q10 responsive state.

By “treating, reducing, or preventing a metabolic disorder” is meant ameliorating such a condition before or after it has occurred. As compared with an equivalent untreated control, such reduction or degree of prevention is at least 5%, 10%, 20%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 80%, 90%, 95%, or 100% as measured by any standard technique.

Diabetes mellitus is a heterogeneous group of metabolic diseases which lead to chronic elevation of glucose in the blood (hyperglycemia). Diabetes is characterized by pancreatic islet destruction or dysfunction leading to loss of glucose regulation. The two major types of diabetes mellitus are Type I, also known as “insulin-dependent diabetes” (“IDDM”) or “juvenile-onset diabetes”, and Type II, also known as “non-insulin dependent” (“NIDDM”) or “maturity-onset diabetes”.

“Type I diabetes” refers to a condition that results from an autoimmune-mediated destruction of pancreatic β cells with consequent loss of insulin production, which results in hyperglycemia. Type I diabetics require insulin replacement therapy to ensure survival. While medications such as injectable insulin and oral hypoglycemics allow diabetics to live longer, diabetes remains the third major killer, after heart disease and cancer. However, these medications do not control blood sugar levels well enough to prevent swinging between high and low blood sugar levels, with resulting damage to the kidneys, eyes, and blood vessels. Data from the Diabetes Control and Complications Trial (DCCT) show that intensive control of blood glucose significantly delays complications of diabetes, such as retinopathy, nephropathy, and neuropathy, compared with conventional therapy consisting of one or two insulin injections per day. Intensive therapy in the DCCT included multiple injection of insulin three or more times per day or continuous subcutaneous insulin infusion (CSII) by external pump. Insulin pumps are one of a variety of alternative approaches to subcutaneous multiple daily injections (MDI) for approximating physiological replacement of insulin.

“Type 2 diabetes” refers to the condition in which a patient has a fasting blood glucose or serum glucose concentration greater than 125 mg/dl (6.94 mmol/L). Type 11 diabetes is characterized by hyperglycemia in the presence of higher-than-normal levels of plasma insulin (hyperinsulinemia) and represents over 90% of all cases and occurs most often in overweight adults over 40 years of age. Progression of Type 11 diabetes is associated with increasing concentrations of blood glucose, coupled with a relative decrease in the rate of glucose-induced insulin secretion. In Type II diabetes, tissue processes which control carbohydrate metabolism are believed to have decreased sensitivity to insulin and therefore occur not from a lack of insulin production, but a decreased sensitivity to increased glucose levels in the blood and an inability to respond by producing insulin. Alternatively, diabetes may result from various defects in the molecular machinery that mediate the action of insulin on its target cells, such as a lack of insulin receptors on their cell surfaces. Treatment of Type II diabetes therefore frequently does not require administration of insulin but may be based on diet and lifestyle changes, augmented by therapy with oral hypoglycemic agents such as, for example, sulfonylurea.

“Pre-diabetes” refers to a condition where a patient is pre-disposed to the development of type 2 diabetes. Pre-diabetes extends the definition of impaired glucose tolerance to include individuals with a fasting blood glucose within the high normal range.gtoreq.100 mg/dL (Meigs et al., Diabetes 2003 52:1475-1484) and fasting hyperinsulinemia (elevated plasma insulin concentration).

“Obesity” refers to the condition where a patient has a BMI equal to or greater than 30 kg/m². “Visceral obesity” refers to a waist to hip ration of 1.0 in male patients and 0.8 in female patients. In another aspect, visceral obesity defines the risk for insulin resistance and the development of pre-diabetes.

“Overweight” refers to a patient with a BMI greater than or 25 kg/m² and less than 30 kg/m². “Weight gain” refers to the increase in body weight in relationship to behavioral habits or addictions, e.g., overeating or gluttony, smoking cessation, or in relationship to biological (life) changes, e.g., weight gain associated with aging in men and menopause in women or weight gain after pregnancy.

“Metabolic Syndrome” (MS), also referred to as Syndrome X, refers to a metabolic disorder that affects other pathways and systems in the body. Originally, Metabolic Syndrome was defined as a cluster of metabolic disorders (including obesity, insulin resistance, hypertension, and dyslipidemia primarily hypertriglyceridemia), that synergize to potentiate cardiovascular disease. More recently (2001), the U.S. National Cholesterol Education Program (NCEP) has classified “Metabolic Syndrome” as meeting any three out of the following five criteria: fasting glucose level of at least 110 mg/dl, plasma triglyceride level of at least 150 mg/dl (hypertriglycerdemia), HDL cholesterol below 40 mg/dl in men or below 50 mg/dl in women, blood pressure at least 130/85 mm Hg (hypertension), and central obesity, with central obesity being defined as abdominal waist circumference greater than 40 inches for men and greater than 35 inches for women. Presently, there are three other internationally recognized definitions for Metabolic Syndrome as follows: 1) World Health Organization 2) American Heart Association/National Heart, Lung and blood Institute (AHA/NHLBI) and 3) International Diabetes Federation (IDF). The definitions of Metabolic Syndrome by the WHO, AHA/NHLBI and IDF are very similar to the definition of the NECP and all use the same metabolic parameters to define the syndrome, but the WHO also includes assessment of insulin fasting insulin levels (Moebus S et al, Cardiovascular Diabetology, 6: 1-10, 2007; Athyros V G et al, Int. J. Cardiology, 117: 204-210, 2007). Yet subtle differences in the thresholds for these metabolic parameters required to be classified as having the syndrome among these different definitions can result in different classification of a particular subject as having or not having the syndrome according to these different definitions. Also, the prevalence of cardiovascular disease (CVD) with MS varies by the definition used. (Moebus S et al, Cardiovascular Diabetology, 6: 1-10, 2007; Athyros V G et al, Int. J. Cardiology, 117: 204-210, 2007). The American Diabetes Association estimates that 1 in every 5 overweight people suffer from Metabolic Syndrome.

In other aspects, the metabolic syndrome is described by accepted synonyms, which includes, but is not limited to, syndrome X, insulin resistance syndrome, insulin-resistant hypertension, the metabolic hypertensive syndrome, dysmetabolic syndrome. Components of the metabolic syndrome include, but are not limited to, glucose intolerance, impaired glucose tolerance, impaired fasting serum glucose, impaired fasting blood glucose, hyperinsulinemia, pre-diabetes, obesity, visceral obesity, hypertriglyceridemia, elevated serum concentrations of free fatty acids, elevated serum concentrations of C-reactive protein, elevated serum concentrations of lipoprotein(a), elevated serum concentrations of homocysteine, elevated serum concentrations of small, dense low-density lipoprotein (LDL)-cholesterol, elevated serum concentrations of lipoprotein-associated phospholipase (A2), reduced serum concentrations of high density lipoprotein (HDL)-cholesterol, reduced serum concentrations of HDL(2b)-cholesterol, reduced serum concentrations of adiponectin, and albuminuria (see: Pershadsingh H A. Peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor-gamma: therapeutic target for diseases beyond diabetes: quo vadis? Expert Opin Investig Drugs. (2004) 13:215-28, and references cited therein).

The “key elements” of the foregoing metabolic disorders include but are not limited to, impaired fasting glucose or impaired glucose tolerance, increased waist circumference, increased visceral fat content, increased fasting plasma glucose, increased fasting plasma triglycerides, decreased fasting high density lipoprotein level, increased blood pressure, insulin resistance, hyperinsulinemia, cardiovascular disease (or components thereof such as arteriosclerosis, coronary artery disease, peripheral vascular disease, or cerebrovascular disease), congestive heart failure, elevated plasma norepinephrine, elevated cardiovascular-related inflammatory factors, elevated plasma factors potentiating vascular endothelial dysfunction, hyperlipoproteinemia, arteriosclerosis or atherosclerosis, hyperphagia, hyperglycemia, hyperlipidemia, and hypertension or high blood pressure, increased plasma postprandial triglyceride or free fatty acid levels, increased cellular oxidative stress or plasma indicators thereof, increased circulating hypercoagulative state, hepatic steatosis, hetaptic steatosis, renal disease including renal failure and renal insufficiency.

“Insulin resistance” refers to a condition in which circulating insulin levels in excess of the normal response to a glucose load are required to maintain the euglycemic state (Ford et al., JAMA. 2002, 287:356-9). Insulin resistance and the response of a patient with insulin resistance to therapy, may be quantified by assessing the homeostasis model assessment to insulin resistance (HOMA-IR) score, a reliable indicator of insulin resistance (Katsuki et al., Diabetes Care 2001, 24:362-5). An estimate of insulin resistance by the homeostasis assessment model (HOMA)-IR score may be calculated by a formula disclosed in Galvin et al., Diabet Med 1992, 9:921-8 where HOMA-IR=[fasting serum insulin (.mu.U/mL)].times.[fasting plasma glucose (mmol/L)/22.5].

“Hyperinsulinemia” is defined as the condition in which a subject with insulin resistance, with or without euglycemia, in which the fasting or postprandial serum or plasma insulin concentration is elevated above that of normal, lean individuals without insulin resistance, having a waist-to-hip ration<1.0 (for men) or <0.8 (for women).

The term “impaired glucose tolerance” (IGT) is used to describe a person who, when given a glucose tolerance test, has a blood glucose level that falls between normal and hyperglycemic. Such a person is at a higher risk of developing diabetes although they are not considered to have diabetes. For example, impaired glucose tolerance refers to a condition in which a patient has a fasting blood glucose concentration or fasting serum glucose concentration greater than 110 mg/dl and less than 126 mg/dl (7.00 mmol/L), or a 2 hour postprandial blood glucose or serum glucose concentration greater than 140 mg/dl (7.78 mmol/L) and less than 200 mg/dl (11.11 mmol/L).

The condition of “hyperglycemia” (high blood sugar) is a condition in which the blood glucose level is too high. Typically, hyperglycemia occurs when the blood glucose level rises above 180 mg/dl. Symptoms of hyperglycemia include frequent urination, excessive thirst and, over a longer time span, weight loss.

The condition of “hypoglycemia” (low blood sugar) is a condition in which the blood glucose level is too low. Typically, hypoglycemia occurs when the blood glucose level falls below 70 mg/dl. Symptoms of hypoglycemia include moodiness, numbness of the extremities (especially in the hands and arms), confusion, shakiness or dizziness. Since this condition arises when there is an excess of insulin over the amount of available glucose it is sometimes referred to as an insulin reaction.

The methods and compositions of the present invention are useful for diagnosing any patient that is at risk of having a metabolic disorder, such as diabetes. A patient in whom the development of a metabolic disorder (e.g., diabetes or obesity) is being prevented may or may not have received such a diagnosis. One in the art will understand that patients of the invention may have been subjected to standard tests or may have been identified, without examination, as one at high risk due to the presence of one or more risk factors.

Diagnosis of metabolic disorders previously has been performed using any standard method known in the art, such as those described herein. Methods for diagnosing diabetes are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 6,537,806, hereby incorporated by reference. Diabetes may be diagnosed and monitored using, for example, urine tests (urinalysis) that measure glucose and ketone levels (products of the breakdown of fat); tests that measure the levels of glucose in blood; glucose tolerance tests; and assays that detect molecular markers characteristic of a metabolic disorder in a biological sample (e.g., blood, serum, or urine) collected from the mammal (e.g., measurements of Hemoglobin A1c (HbA1c) levels in the case of diabetes).

A patient who is being treated for a metabolic disorder is one who a medical practitioner has diagnosed as having such a condition. Diagnosis may be performed by any suitable means, such as those described herein. A patient in whom the development of diabetes or obesity is being prevented may or may not have received such a diagnosis. One in the art will understand that patients of the invention may have been subjected to standard tests or may have been identified, without examination, as one at high risk due to the presence of one or more risk factors, such as family history, obesity, particular ethnicity (e.g., African Americans and Hispanic Americans), gestational diabetes or delivering a baby that weighs more than nine pounds, hypertension, having a pathological condition predisposing to obesity or diabetes, high blood levels of triglycerides, high blood levels of cholesterol, presence of molecular markers (e.g., presence of autoantibodies), and age (over 45 years of age). An individual is considered obese when their weight is 20% (25% in women) or more over the maximum weight desirable for their height. An adult who is more than 100 pounds overweight, is considered to be morbidly obese. Obesity is also defined as a body mass index (BMI) over 30 kg/m².

Patients may be diagnosed as being at risk or as having diabetes if a random plasma glucose test (taken at any time of the day) indicates a value of 200 mg/dL or more, if a fasting plasma glucose test indicates a value of 126 mg/dL or more (after 8 hours), or if an oral glucose tolerance test (OGTT) indicates a plasma glucose value of 200 mg/dL or more in a blood sample taken two hours after a person has consumed a drink containing 75 grams of glucose dissolved in water. The OGTT measures plasma glucose at timed intervals over a 3-hour period. Desirably, the level of plasma glucose in a diabetic patient that has been treated according to the invention ranges between 160 to 60 mg/dL, between 150 to 70 mg/dL, between 140 to 70 mg/dL, between 135 to 80 mg/dL, and preferably between 120 to 80 mg/dL.

Optionally, a hemoglobin A1c (HbA1c) test, which assesses the average blood glucose levels during the previous two and three months, may be employed. A person without diabetes typically has an HbA1c value that ranges between 4% and 6%. For every 1% increase in HbA1c, blood glucose levels increases by approximately 30 mg/dL and the risk of complications increases. Preferably, the HbA1c value of a patient being treated according to the present invention is reduced to less than 9%, less than 7%, less than 6%, and most preferably to around 5%. Thus, the HbA1c levels of the patient being treated are preferably lowered by 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, or more relative to such levels prior to treatment.

Gestational diabetes is typically diagnosed based on plasma glucose values measured during the OGTT. Since glucose levels are normally lower during pregnancy, the threshold values for the diagnosis of diabetes in pregnancy are lower than in the same person prior to pregnancy. If a woman has two plasma glucose readings that meet or exceed any of the following numbers, she has gestational diabetes: a fasting plasma glucose level of 95 mg/dL, a 1-hour level of 180 mg/dl, a 2-hour level of 155 mg/dL, or a 3-hour level of 140 mg/dL.

Ketone testing may also be employed to diagnose type 1 diabetes. Because ketones build up in the blood when there is not enough insulin, they eventually accumulate in the urine. High levels of blood ketones may result in a serious condition called ketoacidosis.

According to the guidelines of the American Diabetes Association, to be diagnosed with Type 2 diabetes, an individual must have a fasting plasma glucose level greater than or equal to 126 mg/dl or a 2-hour oral glucose tolerance test (OGTT) plasma glucose value of greater than or equal to 200 mg/dl (Diabetes Care, 26:S5-S20, 2003).

A related condition called pre-diabetes is defined as having a fasting glucose level of greater than 100 mg/dl but less than 126 mg/dl or a 2-hour OGTT plasma glucose level of greater than 140 mg/dl but less than 200 mg/dl. Mounting evidence suggests that the pre-diabetes condition may be a risk factor for developing cardiovascular disease (Diabetes Care 26:2910-2914, 2003). Prediabetes, also referred to as impaired glucose tolerance or impaired fasting glucose is a major risk factor for the development of type 2 diabetes mellitus, cardiovascular disease and mortality. Much focus has been given to developing therapeutic interventions that prevent the development of type 2 diabetes by effectively treating prediabetes (Pharmacotherapy, 24:362-71, 2004).

Obesity (commonly defined as a Body Mass Index of approximately >30 kg/m²) is often associated with a variety of pathologic conditions such as hyperinsulinemia, insulin resistance, diabetes, hypertension, and dyslipidemia. Each of these conditions contributes to the risk of cardiovascular disease.

Along with insulin resistance, hypertension, and dyslipidemia, obesity is considered to be a component of the Metabolic Syndrome (also known as Syndrome X) which together synergize to potentiate cardiovascular disease. More recently, the U.S. National Cholesterol Education Program has classified Metabolic Syndrome as meeting three out of the following five criteria: fasting glucose level of at least 110 mg/dl, plasma triglyceride level of at least 150 mg/dl (hypertriglycerdemia), HDL cholesterol below 40 mg/dl in men or below 50 mg/dl in women, blood pressure at least 130/85 mm Hg (hypertension), and central obesity, with central obesity being defined as abdominal waist circumference greater than 40 inches for men and greater than 35 inches for women.

The skilled artisan will recognize that the use of any of the above tests or any other tests known in the art may be used to monitor the efficacy of the therapeutic treatments of the invention. Since the measurements of hemoglobin A1c (HbA1c) levels is an indication of average blood glucose during the previous two to three months, this test may be used to monitor a patient's response to diabetes treatment.

The therapeutic methods of the invention are effective in reducing glucose levels or lipid levels in a patient. By “reducing glucose levels” is meant reducing the level of glucose by at least 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 95%, or 100% relative to an untreated control. Desirably, glucose levels are reduced to normoglycemic levels, i.e., between 150 to 60 mg/dL, between 140 to 70 mg/dL, between 130 to 70 mg/dL, between 125 to 80 mg/dL, and preferably between 120 to 80 mg/dL. Such reduction in glucose levels may be obtained by increasing any one of the biological activities associated with the clearance of glucose from the blood. Accordingly, an agent having the ability to reduce glucose levels may increase insulin production, secretion, or action. Insulin action may be increased, for example, by increasing glucose uptake by peripheral tissues and/or by reducing hepatic glucose production. Alternatively, the agent of the invention may reduce the absorption of carbohydrates from the intestines, alter glucose transporter activity (e.g., by increasing GLUT4 expression, intrinsic activity, or translocation), increase the amount of insulin-sensitive tissue (e.g., by increasing muscle cell or adipocyte cell differentiation), or alter gene transcription in adipocytes or muscle cells (e.g., altered secretion of factors from adipocytes expression of metabolic pathway genes). Desirably, the agent of the invention increases more than one of the activities associated with the clearance of glucose. By “reducing lipid levels” is meant reducing the level of lipids by at least 1%, 5%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 95%, or 100% relative to an untreated control.

By “alter insulin signaling pathway such that glucose levels are reduced” is meant to alter (by increasing or reducing) any one of the activities involved in insulin signaling such that the overall result is an increase in the clearance of glucose from plasma. For example, the env-influencer of the invention alters the insulin signaling pathway causing an increase in insulin production, secretion, or action, an increase in glucose uptake by peripheral tissues, a reduction in hepatic glucose production, or a reduction in the absorption of carbohydrates from the intestines.

The ability of an environmental influencer, e.g., epi-shifter, to reduce glucose levels and thereby treat a metabolic disorder may be assessed using standard assays known in the art. For example, cell-based screening assays that identify agents that increase glucose uptake may be employed. In particular, differentiated adipocytes in cell culture can be employed to assess the ability of the epi-shifter to increase glucose uptake upon insulin stimulation, as detected by radiolabeled glucose. In another exemplary assay, human myoblasts obtained by the conditional immortalization of cells derived from a non-diabetic subject can be used to screen the effect of agents on glycogen synthesis, using insulin as a positive control. Prior to treatment, cells are serum-starved, and are then incubated either with the epi-shifter or control for a period of two hours in serum-free media containing radiolabeled glucose, after which, glycogen synthesis is measured. Exemplary assays are further described in the Examples.

II. Environmental Influencers

The present invention provides methods of treating metabolic disorders by administration of an Environmental influencer. “Environmental influencers” (Env-influencers) are molecules that influence or modulate the disease environment of a human in a beneficial manner allowing the human's disease environment to shift, reestablish back to or maintain a normal or healthy environment leading to a normal state. Env-influencers include both Multidimensional Intracellular Molecules (MIMs) and Epimetabolic shifters (Epi-shifters) as defined below.

1. Multidimensional Intracellular Molecule (MIM)

The term “Multidimensional Intracellular Molecule (MIM)”, is an isolated version or synthetically produced version of an endogenous molecule that is naturally produced by the body and/or is present in at least one cell of a human. A MIM is characterized by one or more, two or more, three or more, or all of the following functions. MIMs are capable of entering a cell, and the entry into the cell includes complete or partial entry into the cell, as long as the biologically active portion of the molecule wholly enters the cell. MIMs are capable of inducing a signal transduction and/or gene expression mechanism within a cell. MIMs are multidimensional in that the molecules have both a therapeutic and a carrier, e.g., drug delivery, effect. MIMs also are multidimensional in that the molecules act one way in a disease state and a different way in a normal state. For example, in the case of CoQ-10, administration of CoQ-10 to a melanoma cell in the presence of VEGF leads to a decreased level of Bcl2 which, in turn, leads to a decreased oncogenic potential for the melanoma cell. In contrast, in a normal fibroblast, co-administration of CoQ-10 and VEFG has no effect on the levels of Bcl2. Preferably, MIMs selectively act in cells of a disease state, and have substantially no effect in (matching) cells of a normal state. Preferably, MIMs selectively renders cells of a disease state closer in phenotype, metabolic state, genotype, mRNA/protein expression level, etc. to (matching) cells of a normal state.

In one embodiment, a MIM is also an epi-shifter. In another embodiment, a MIM is not an epi-shifter. The skilled artisan will appreciate that a MIM of the invention is also intended to encompass a mixture of two or more endogenous molecules, wherein the mixture is characterized by one or more of the foregoing functions. The endogenous molecules in the mixture are present at a ratio such that the mixture functions as a MIM.

MIMs can be lipid based or non-lipid based molecules. Examples of MIMs include, but are not limited to, CoQ10, acetyl Co-A, palmityl Co-A, L-carnitine, amino acids such as, for example, tyrosine, phenylalanine, and cysteine. In one embodiment, the MIM is a small molecule. In one embodiment of the invention, the MIM is not CoQ10. MIMs can be routinely identified by one of skill in the art using any of the assays described in detail herein.

In some embodiments, MIMs include compounds in the Vitamin B family, or nucleosides, mononucleotides or dinucleotides that comprise a compound in the Vitamin B family. Compounds in the vitamin B family include, for example, thiamine (vitamin B1), niacin (also known as nicotinic acid or Vitamin B3), or pyridoxine (vitamin B6) as well as provitamins such as panthenol (provitamin B5). In some embodiments, the MIM is selected from thiamine, niacin and pyridoxine. Nucleosides, mononucleotides or dinucleotides that comprise a compound in the vitamin B family include, for example, nucleosides, mononucleotides or dinucleotides which include an adenine or a niacin (nicotinic acid) molecule. In some embodiments, the MIM is selected from adenosine, adenosine diphosphate (ADP), flavin adenosine dinucleotide (FAD, which comprises parts of vitamin B2 and ADP) and nicotinic acid dinucleotide.

In other embodiments, the MIMs include amino acids. Examples of amino acids include, for example, tyrosine (e.g., L-tyrosine), cysteine, phenylalanine (e.g., L-phenylalanine) and alanine. In some embodiments, the amino acid is phenylalanine or alanine. In some embodiments, the MIMs include amino acid derivatives such as 4-hydroxyphenylpyruvate or acetylglycine.

In some embodiment, the MIM is a glucose analog, e.g., a glucose molecule wherein one —OH or —CH₂OH substituent has been replaced with a —COOH, a —COO⁻ or an —NH₂ substituent. Examples of glucose analogs include glucosamine, glucuronic acid, glucuronide and glucuronate.

In some embodiments, the MIM is selected from compounds of formula (I):

wherein

n is an integer of 0 or 1;

R¹, R², R³ and R⁴, when present, are each independently selected from hydrogen and hydroxyl or R¹ and R² are taken together with the carbon on which they are attached to form a carbonyl (C═O) group;

W is —COOH or —N(CH₃)₃ ⁺; and

X is hydrogen, a negative charge or a alkali metal cation, such as Na⁺ or.

It is to be understood that when n is 0, the CHR³ group is bonded to the W substituent.

In some embodiments, W is —N(CH₃)₃ ⁺. In some embodiments, the MIM is a carnitine, such as L-carnitine.

In some embodiments, the MIM is a dicarboxylic acid. In some embodiments, W is —COOH. In some embodiments, R³ is hydrogen. In some embodiments, n is 0. In some embodiments, R¹ and R² are each independently hydrogen. In some embodiments, W is —COOH, R³ is hydrogen, n is 0 and R¹ and R² are each independently hydrogen. In some embodiments, n is 1. In some embodiments R¹ and R² are taken together with the carbon on which they are attached to form a carbonyl (C═O) group. In some embodiments, R⁴ is hydrogen. In some embodiments, R⁴ is hydroxyl. In some embodiments, W is —COOH, R³ is hydrogen, n is 1 and R¹ and R² are taken together with the carbon on which they are attached to form a carbonyl (C═O) group.

In some embodiments, the MIM is an intermediate of the Krebs Cycle, the excess of which drives the Krebs Cycle towards productive oxidative phosphorylation. Exemplary Krebs Cycle intermediates that are MIMs include succinic acid or succinate, malic acid or malate, and α-ketoglutaric acid or α-ketoglutarate.

In some embodiments, the MIM is a building block of CoQ10, which has the following structure:

Thus, building blocks of CoQ10 include, but are not limited to, phenylalanine, tyrosine, 4-hydroxyphenylpyruvate, phenylacetate, 3-methoxy-4-hydroxymandelate, vanillic acid, 4-hydroxybenzoate, mevalonic acid, farnesyl, 2,3-dimethoxy-5-methyl-p-benzoquinone, as well as the corresponding acids or ions thereof. In some embodiments, the MIM is selected from phenylalanine, tyrosine, 4-hydroxyphenylpyruvate, phenylacetate and 4-hydroxybenzoate.

(i) Methods of Identifying MIMS

The present invention provides methods for identifying a MIM. Methods for identifying a MIM involve, generally, the exogenous addition to a cell of an endogenous molecule and evaluating the effect on the cell, e.g., the cellular microenvironment profile, that the endogenous molecule provides. Effects on the cell are evaluated at one or more of the cellular, mRNA, protein, lipid, and/or metabolite level to identify alterations in the cellular microenvironment profile. In one embodiment, the cells are cultured cells, e.g., in vitro. In one embodiment, the cells are present in an organism. The endogenous molecule may be added to the cell at a single concentration or may be added to the cell over a range of concentrations. In one embodiment, the endogenous molecule is added to the cells such that the level of the endogenous molecule in the cells is elevated (e.g., is elevated by 1.1 fold, 1.2 fold, 1.3 fold, 1.4 fold, 1.5 fold, 1.6 fold, 1.7 fold, 1.8 fold, 1.9 fold, 2.0 fold, 3.0 fold, 4.0 fold, 5.0 fold, 10 fold, 15 fold, 20 fold, 25 fold, 30 fold, 35 fold, 40 fold, 45 fold, 50 fold or greater) as compared to the level of the endogenous molecule in a control, untreated cell.

Molecules that induce a change in the cell as detected by alterations in, for example, any one or more of morphology, physiology, and/or composition (e.g., mRNA, protein, lipid, metabolite) may be evaluated further to determine if the induced changes to the cellular microenvironment profile are different between a disease cellular state and a normal cellular state. Cells (e.g., cell culture lines) of diverse tissue origin, cell type, or disease state may be evaluated for comparative evaluation. For example, changes induced in the cellular microenvironment profile of a cancer cell may be compared to changes induced to a non-cancerous or normal cell. An endogenous molecule that is observed to induce a change in the microenvironment profile of a cell (e.g., induces a change in the morphology, physiology and/or composition, e.g., mRNA, protein, lipid or metabolite, of the cell) and/or to differentially (e.g., preferentially) induce a change in the microenvironment profile of a diseased cell as compared to a normal cell, is identified as a MIM.

MIMs of the invention may be lipid based MIMs or non-lipid based MIMs. Methods for identifying lipid based MIMs involve the above-described cell based methods in which a lipid based endogenous molecule is exogenously added to the cell. In a preferred embodiment, the lipid based endogenous molecule is added to the cell such that the level of the lipid based endogenous molecule in the cell is elevated. In one embodiment, the level of the lipid based endogenous molecule is elevated by 1.1 fold, 1.2 fold, 1.3 fold, 1.4 fold, 1.5 fold, 1.6 fold, 1.7 fold, 1.8 fold, 1.9 fold, 2.0 fold, 3.0 fold, 4.0 fold, 5.0 fold, 10 fold, 15 fold, 20 fold, 25 fold, 30 fold, 35 fold, 40 fold, 45 fold, 50 fold or greater as compared to the level in an untreated control cell. Formulation and delivery of the lipid based molecule to the cell is dependent upon the properties of each molecule tested, but many methods are known in the art. Examples of formulation and delivery of lipid based molecules include, but are not limited to, solubilization by co-solvents, carrier molecules, liposomes, dispersions, suspensions, nanoparticle dispersions, emulsions, e.g., oil-in-water or water-in-oil emulsions, multiphase emulsions, e.g., oil-in-water-in-oil emulsions, polymer entrapment and encapsulation. The delivery of the lipid based MIM to the cell can be confirmed by extraction of the cellular lipids and quantification of the MIM by routine methods known in the art, such as mass spectrometry.

Methods for identifying non-lipid based MIMs involve the above-described cell based methods in which a non-lipid based endogenous molecule is exogenously added to the cell. In a preferred embodiment, the non-lipid based endogenous molecule is added to the cell such that the level of the non-lipid based endogenous molecule in the cell is elevated. In one embodiment, the level of the non-lipid based endogenous molecule is elevated by 1.1 fold, 1.2 fold, 1.3 fold, 1.4 fold, 1.5 fold, 1.6 fold, 1.7 fold, 1.8 fold, 1.9 fold, 2.0 fold, 3.0 fold, 4.0 fold, 5.0 fold, 10 fold, 15 fold, 20 fold, 25 fold, 30 fold, 35 fold, 40 fold, 45 fold, 50 fold or greater as compared to the level in an untreated control cell. Formulation and delivery of the non-lipid based molecule to the cell is dependent upon the properties of each molecule tested, but many methods are known in the art. Examples of formulations and modes of delivery of non-lipid based molecules include, but are not limited to, solubilization by co-solvents, carrier molecules, active transport, polymer entrapment or adsorption, polymer grafting, liposomal encapsulation, and formulation with targeted delivery systems. The delivery of the non-lipid based MIM to the cell may be confirmed by extraction of the cellular content and quantification of the MIM by routine methods known in the art, such as mass spectrometry.

2. Epimetabolic Shifters (Epi-Shifters)

As used herein, an “epimetabolic shifter” (epi-shifter) is a molecule (endogenous or exogenous) that modulates the metabolic shift from a healthy (or normal) state to a disease state and vice versa, thereby maintaining or reestablishing cellular, tissue, organ, system and/or host health in a human. Epi-shifters are capable of effectuating normalization in a tissue microenvironment. For example, an epi-shifter includes any molecule which is capable, when added to or depleted from a cell, of affecting the microenvironment (e.g., the metabolic state) of a cell. The skilled artisan will appreciate that an epi-shifter of the invention is also intended to encompass a mixture of two or more molecules, wherein the mixture is characterized by one or more of the foregoing functions. The molecules in the mixture are present at a ratio such that the mixture functions as an epi-shifter. Examples of epi-shifters include, but are not limited to, coQ-10; vitamin D3; ECM components such as fibronectin; immunomodulators, such as TNFa or any of the interleukins, e.g., IL-5, IL-12, IL-23; angiogenic factors; and apoptotic factors.

In some embodiments, the epi-shifter is an enzyme, such as an enzyme that either directly participates in catalyzing one or more reactions in the Krebs Cycle, or produces a Krebs Cycle intermediate, the excess of which drive the Krebs Cycle. In some embodiments, the enzyme is an enzyme of the non-oxidative phase of the pentose phosphate pathway, such as transaldolase, or transketolase. In other embodiments, the enzyme is a component enzyme or enzyme complex that facilitates the Krebs Cycle, such as a synthase or a ligase. Exemplary enzymes include succinyl CoA synthase (Krebs Cycle enzyme) or pyruvate carboxylase (a ligase that catalyzes the reversible carboxylation of pyruvate to form oxaloacetate (OAA), a Krebs Cycle intermediate).

In some embodiments, the epi-shifter is a building block of CoQ10. Building blocks of CoQ10 include, but are not limited to, phenylalanine, tyrosine, 4-hydroxyphenylpyruvate, phenylacetate, 3-methoxy-4-hydroxymandelate, vanillic acid, 4-hydroxybenzoate, mevalonic acid, farnesyl, 2,3-dimethoxy-5-methyl-p-benzoquinone, as well as the corresponding acids or ions thereof. In some embodiments, the epi-shifter is selected from phenylalanine, tyrosine, 4-hydroxyphenylpyruvate, phenylacetate and 4-hydroxybenzoate.

In some embodiments, the epi-shifter is a compound in the Vitamin B family. Compounds in the vitamin B family include, for example, riboflavin (vitamin B2), or analogs thereof. Epi-shifters also include any analogs or pro-drugs that may be metabolized in vivo to any of the endogenous MIMs, such as those described herein.

In one embodiment, the epi-shifter also is a MIM. In one embodiment, the epi-shifter is not CoQ10. Epi-shifters can be routinely identified by one of skill in the art using any of the assays described in detail herein.

(i) Methods of Identifying Epi-Shifters

Epimetabolic shifters (epi-shifter) are molecules capable of modulating the metabolic state of a cell, e.g., inducing a metabolic shift from a healthy (or normal) state to a disease state and vice versa, and are thereby capable of maintaining or reestablishing cellular, tissue, organ, system and/or host health in a human. Epi-shifters of the invention thus have utility in the diagnostic evaluation of a diseased state. Epi-shifters of the invention have further utility in therapeutic applications, wherein the application or administration of the epi-shifter (or modulation of the epi-shifter by other therapeutic molecules) effects a normalization in a tissue microenvironment and the disease state.

The identification of an epimetabolic shifter involves, generally, establishing a molecular profile, e.g., of metabolites, lipids, proteins or RNAs (as individual profiles or in combination), for a panel of cells or tissues that display differential disease states, progression, or aggressiveness A molecule from the profile(s) for which a change in level (e.g., an increased or decreased level) correlates to the disease state, progression or aggressiveness is identified as a potential epi-shifter.

In one embodiment, an epi-shifter is also a MIM. Potential epi-shifters may be evaluated for their ability to enter cells upon exogenous addition to a cell by using any number of routine techniques known in the art, and by using any of the methods described herein. For example, entry of the potential epi-shifter into a cell may be confirmed by extraction of the cellular content and quantification of the potential epi-shifter by routine methods known in the art, such as mass spectrometry. A potential epi-shifter that is able to enter a cell is thereby identified as a MIM.

To identify an epi-shifter, a potential epi-shifter is next evaluated for the ability to shift the metabolic state of a cell. The ability of a potential epi-shifters to shift the metabolic state of the cell microenvironment is evaluated by introducing (e.g., exogenously adding) to a cell a potential epi-shifter and monitoring in the cell one or more of: changes in gene expression (e.g., changes in mRNA or protein expression), concentration changes in lipid or metabolite levels, changes in bioenergetic molecule levels, changes in cellular energetics, and/or changes in mitochondrial function or number. Potential epi-shifters capable of shifting the metabolic state of the cell microenvironment can be routinely identified by one of skill in the art using any of the assays described in detail herein. Potential epi-shifters are further evaluated for the ability to shift the metabolic state of a diseased cell towards a normal healthy state (or conversely, for the ability to shift the metabolic state of a normal cell towards a diseased state). A potential epi-shifter capable of shifting the metabolic state of a diseased cell towards a normal healthy state (or of shifting the metabolic state of healthy normal cell towards a diseased state) is thus identified as an Epi-shifter. In a preferred embodiment, the epi-shifter does not negatively impact the health and/or growth of normal cells.

Epimetabolic shifters of the invention include, but are not limited to, small molecule metabolites, lipid-based molecules, and proteins and RNAs. To identify an epimetabolic shifter in the class of small molecule endogenous metabolites, metabolite profiles for a panel of cells or tissues that display differential disease states, progression, or aggressiveness are established. The metabolite profile for each cell or tissue is determined by extracting metabolites from the cell or tissue and then identifying and quantifying the metabolites using routine methods known to the skilled artisan, including, for example, liquid-chromatography coupled mass spectrometry or gas-chromatography couple mass spectrometry methods. Metabolites for which a change in level (e.g., an increased or decreased level) correlates to the disease state, progression or aggressiveness, are identified as potential epi-shifters.

To identify epimetabolic shifters in the class of endogenous lipid-based molecules, lipid profiles for a panel of cells or tissues that display differential disease states, progression, or aggressiveness are established. The lipid profile for each cell or tissue is determined by using lipid extraction methods, followed by the identification and quantitation of the lipids using routine methods known to the skilled artisan, including, for example, liquid-chromatography coupled mass spectrometry or gas-chromatography couple mass spectrometry methods. Lipids for which a change in level (e.g., an increase or decrease in bulk or trace level) correlates to the disease state, progression or aggressiveness, are identified as potential epi-shifters.

To identify epimetabolic shifters in the class of proteins and RNAs, gene expression profiles for a panel of cells or tissues that display differential disease states, progression, or aggressiveness are established. The expression profile for each cell or tissue is determined at the mRNA and/or protein level(s) using standard proteomic, mRNA array, or genomic array methods, e.g., as described in detail herein. Genes for which a change in expression (e.g., an increase or decrease in expression at the mRNA or protein level) correlates to the disease state, progression or aggressiveness, are identified as potential epi-shifters.

Once the molecular profiles described above are established (e.g., for soluble metabolites, lipid-based molecules, proteins, RNAs, or other biological classes of composition), cellular and biochemical pathway analysis is carried out to elucidate known linkages between the identified potential epi-shifters in the cellular environment. This information obtained by such cellular and/or biochemical pathway analysis may be utilized to categorize the pathways and potential epi-shifters.

The utility of an Epi-shifter to modulate a disease state can be further evaluated and confirmed by one of skill in the art using any number of assays known in the art or described in detail herein. The utility of an Epi-shifter to modulate a disease state can be evaluated by direct exogenous delivery of the Epi-shifter to a cell or to an organism. The utility of an Epi-shifter to modulate a disease state can alternatively be evaluated by the development of molecules that directly modulate the Epi-shifter (e.g., the level or activity of the Epi-shifter). The utility of an Epi-shifter to modulate a disease state can also be evaluated by the development of molecules that indirectly modulate the Epi-shifter (e.g., the level or activity of the Epi-shifter) by regulating other molecules, such as genes (e.g., regulated at the RNA or protein level), placed in the same pathway as the Epi-shifter.

The Epimetabolomic approach described herein facilitates the identification of endogenous molecules that exist in a cellular microenvironment and the levels of which are sensed and controlled through genetic, mRNA, or protein-based mechanisms. The regulation response pathways found in normal cells that are triggered by an Epi-shifter of the invention may provide a therapeutic value in a misregulated or diseased cellular environment. In addition, the epimetabolic approach described herein identifies epi-shifters that may provide a diagnostic indication for use in clinical patient selection, a disease diagnostic kit, or as a prognostic indicator.

III. Assays Useful for Identifying MIMs/Epi-Shifters

Techniques and methods of the present invention employed to separate and identify molecules and compounds of interest include but are not limited to: liquid chromatography (LC), high-pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC), mass spectroscopy (MS), gas chromatography (GC), liquid chromatography/mass spectroscopy (LC-MS), gas chromatography/mass spectroscopy (GC-MS), nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR), magnetic resonance imaging (MRI), Fourier Transform InfraRed (FT-IR), and inductively coupled plasma mass spectrometry (ICP-MS). It is further understood that mass spectrometry techniques include, but are not limited to, the use of magnetic-sector and double focusing instruments, transmission quadrapole instruments, quadrupole ion-trap instruments, time-of-flight instruments (TOF), Fourier transform ion cyclotron resonance instruments (FT-MS) and matrix-assisted laser desorption/ionization time-of-flight mass spectrometry (MALDI-TOF MS).

Quantification of Bioenergetic Molecule Levels:

Environmental influencers (e.g., MIMs or Epi-shifters) may be identified by changes in cellular bioenergetic molecule levels (e.g., ATP, pyruvate, ADP, NADH, NAD, NADPH, NADP, acetylCoA, FADH2) of cells to which a candidate epi-shifter has been applied. Exemplary assays of bioenergetic molecule levels use colorometric, fluorescence, and/or bioluminescent-based methods. Examples of such assays are provided below.

Levels of ATP within cells can be measured with a number of assays and systems known in the art. For example, in one system, cytoplasmic ATP released from lysed cells reacts with luciferin and the enzyme luciferase to produce light. This bioluminescence is measured by a bioluminometer and the intracellular ATP concentration of the lysed cells can be calculated (EnzyLight™ ATP Assay Kit (EATP-100), BioAssay Systems, Hayward, Calif.). In another system, for example, both ATP and its dephosphorylated form, ADP, are calculated via bioluminescence; after ATP levels are calculated, ADP is transformed into ATP and then detected and calculated using the same luciferase system (ApoSENSOR™ ADP/ATP Ratio Assay Kit, BioVision Inc., Mountain View, Calif.).

Pyruvate is an important intermediate in cellular metabolic pathways. Pyruvate may be converted into carbohydrate via gluconeogenesis, converted into fatty acid or metabolized via acetyl CoA, or converted into alanine or ethanol, depending upon the metabolic state of a cell. Thus detection of pyruvate levels provides a measure of the metabolic activity and state of a cell sample. One assay to detect pyruvate, for example, uses both a colorimetric and fluorimetric to detect pyruvate concentrations within different ranges (EnzyChrom™ Pyruvate Assay Kit (Cat# EPYR-100), BioAssay Systems, Hayward, Calif.).

Environmental influencers (e.g., MIMs or Epi-shifters) may influence the process of oxidative phosphorylation carried out by mitochondria in cells, which are involved in the generation and maintenance of bioenergetic molecules in cells. In addition to assays that detect changes in cellular energetics in cell cultures and samples directly (described below), assays exist that detect and quantify the effects of compounds on discrete enzymes and complexes of mitochondria in cells. For example, the MT-OXC MitoTox™ Complete OXPHOS Activity Assay (MitoSciences Inc., Eugene, Oreg.) can detect and quantify the effects of compounds applied directly to complexes I to V extracted from mitochondria. Assays for the detection and quantification of effects on individual mitochondrial complexes such as NADH dehydrogenase (Complex I), cytochrome c oxidase (Complex IV) and ATP synthase (Complex V) are also available (MitoSciences Inc., Eugene, Oreg.).

Measurement of Cellular Energetics:

Environmental influencers (e.g., MIMs or Epi-shifters) may also be identified by changes in cellular energetics. One example of the measurement of cellular energetics are the real-time measures of the consumption of molecular oxygen and/or the change in pH of the media of a cell culture. For example, the ability of a potential epi-shifter to modulate the metabolic state of a cell may be analyzed using, for example, the XF24 Analyzer (Seahorse, Inc.). This technology allows for real time detection of oxygen and pH changes in a monolayer of cells in order to evaluate the bioenergetics of a cell microenvironment. The XF24 Analyzer measures and compares the rates of oxygen consumption (OCR), which is a measure of aerobic metabolism, and extracellular acidification (ECAR), which is a measure of glycolysis, both key indicators of cellular energetics.

Measurement of Oxidative Phosphorylation and Mitochondrial Function

Oxidative Phosphorylation is a process by which ATP is generated via the oxidation of nutrient compounds, carried out in eukaryotes via protein complexes embedded in the membranes of mitochondria. As the primary source of ATP in the cells of most organisms, changes in oxidative phosphorylation activity can strongly alter metabolism and energy balance within a cell. In some embodiments of the invention, environmental influencers (e.g., MIMs or Epi-shifters) may be detected and/or identified by their effects on oxidative phosphorylation. In some embodiments, environmental influencers (e.g., MIMs or Epi-shifters) may be detected and/or identified by their effects on specific aspects of oxidative phosphorylation, including, but not limited to, the electron transport chain and ATP synthesis.

The membrane-embedded protein complexes of the mitochrondria that carry out processes involved in oxidative phosphorylation perform specific tasks and are numbered I, II, III and IV. These complexes, along with the trans-inner membrane ATP synthase (also known as Complex V), are the key entities involved in the oxidative phosphorylation process. In addition to assays that can examine the effects of environmental influencers (e.g., MIMs or Epi-shifters) on mitochondrial function in general and the oxidative phosphorylation process in particular, assays are available that can be used to examine the effects of an epi-shifter on an individual complex separately from other complexes.

Complex I, also known as NADH-coenzyme Q oxidoreductase or NADH dehydrogenase, is the first protein in the electron transport chain. In some embodiments, the detection and quantification of the effect of an epi-shifter on the production of NAD⁺ by Complex I may be performed. For example, the complex can be immunocaptured from a sample in a 96-well plate; the oxidation of NADH to NAD⁺ takes place concurrently with the reduction of a dye molecule which has an increased absorbance at 450 nM (Complex I Enzyme Activity Microplate Assay Kit, MitoSciences Inc., Eugene, Oreg.).

Complex IV, also known as cytochrome c oxidase (COX), is the last protein in the electron transport chain. In some embodiments, the detection and quantification of the effect of an epi-shifter on the oxidation of cytochrome c and the reduction of oxygen to water by Complex IV may be performed. For example, COX can be immunocaptured in a microwell plate and the oxidation of COX measured with a colorimetric assay (Complex IV Enzyme Activity Microplate Assay Kit, MitoSciences Inc., Eugene, Oreg.).

The final enzyme in the oxidative phosphorylation process is ATP synthase (Complex V), which uses the proton gradient created by the other complexes to power the synthesis of ATP from ADP. In some embodiments, the detection and quantification of the effect of an epi-shifter on the activity of ATP synthase may be performed. For example, both the activity of ATP synthase and the amount of ATP synthase in a sample may be measured for ATP synthase that has been immunocaptured in a microwell plate well. The enzyme can also function as an ATPase under certain conditions, thus in this assay for ATP synthase activity, the rate at which ATP is reduced to ADP is measured by detecting the simultaneous oxidation of NADH to NAD⁺. The amount of ATP is calculated using a labeled antibody to ATPase (ATP synthase Duplexing (Activity+Quantity) Microplate Assay Kit, MitoSciences Inc., Eugene, Oreg.).Additional assays for oxidative phosphorylation include assays that test for effects on the activity of Complexes II and III. For example, the MT-OXC MitoTox™ Complete OXPHOS System (MitoSciences Inc., Eugene, Oreg.) can be used to evaluate effects of a compound on Complex II and III as well as Complex I, IV and V, to provide data on the effects of a compound on the entire oxidative phosphorylation system.

As noted above, real-time observation of intact cell samples can be made using probes for changes in oxygen consumption and pH in cell culture media. These assays of cell energetics provide a broad overview of mitochondrial function and the effects of potential environmental influencers (e.g., MIMs or Epi-shifters) on the activity of mitochondria within the cells of the sample.

Environmental influencers (e.g., MIMs or Epi-shifters) may also affect mitochondrial permeability transition (MPT), a phenomena in which the mitochondrial membranes experience an increase in permeability due to the formation of mitochondrial permeability transition pores (MPTP). An increase in mitochondrial permeability can lead to mitochondrial swelling, an inability to conduct oxidative phosphorylation and ATP generation and cell death. MPT may be involved with induction of apoptosis. (See, for example, Halestrap, A. P., Biochem. Soc. Trans. 34:232-237 (2006) and Lena, A. et al. Journal of Translational Med. 7:13-26 (2009), hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.)

In some embodiments, the detection and quantification of the effect of an environmental influencer (e.g., MIM or epi-shifter) on the formation, discontinuation and/or effects of MPT and MPTPs are measured. For example, assays can detect MPT through the use of specialized dye molecules (calcein) that are localized within the inner membranes of mitochondria and other cytosolic compartments. The application of another molecule, CoCl₂, serves to squelch the fluorescence of the calcein dye in the cytosol. CoCl₂ cannot access, however, the interior of the mitochondria, thus the calcein fluorescence in the mitochondria is not squelched unless MPT has occurred and CoCl₂ can access the interior of the mitochondra via MPTPs. Loss of mitochondrial-specific fluorescence signals that MPT has occurred. Flow cytometry can be used to evaluate cellular and organelle fluorescence (MitoProbe™ Transition Pore Assay Kit, Molecular Probes, Eugene, Oreg.). Additional assays utilize a fluorescence microscope for evaluating experimental results (Image-iT™ LIVE Mitochondrial Transition Pore Assay Kit, Molecular Probes, Eugene, Oreg.).

Measurement of Cellular Proliferation and Inflammation

In some embodiments of the invention, environmental influencers (e.g., MIMs or Epi-shifters) may be identified and evaluated by their effects on the production or activity of molecules associated with cellular proliferation and/or inflammation. These molecules include, but are not limited to, cytokines, growth factors, hormones, components of the extra-cellular matrix, chemokines, neuropeptides, neurotransmitters, neurotrophins and other molecules involved in cellular signaling, as well as intracellular molecules, such as those involved in signal transduction.

Vascular endothelial growth factor (VEGF) is a growth factor with potent angiogenic, vasculogenic and mitogenic properties. VEGF stimulates endothelial permeability and swelling and VEGF activity is implicated in numerous diseases and disorders, including rheumatoid arthritis, metastatic cancer, age-related macular degeneration and diabetic retinopathy.

In some embodiments of the invention, an environmental influencer (e.g., MIM or Epi-shifter) may be identified and characterized by its effects on the production of VEGF. For example, cells maintained in hypoxic conditions or in conditions mimicking acidosis will exhibit increased VEGF production. VEGF secreted into media can be assayed using an ELISA or other antibody-based assays, using available anti-VEGF antibodies (R&D Systems, Minneapolis, Minn.). In some embodiments of the invention, an Epi-shifter may be identified and/or characterized based on its effect(s) on the responsiveness of cells to VEGF and/or based on its effect(s) on the expression or activity of the VEGF receptor.

Implicated in both healthy immune system function as well as in autoimmune diseases, tumor necrosis factor (TNF) is a key mediator of inflammation and immune system activation. In some embodiments of the invention, an Epi-shifter may be identified and characterized by its effects on the production or the activity of TNF. For example, TNF produced by cultured cells and secreted into media can be quantified via ELISA and other antibody-based assays known in the art. Furthermore, in some embodiments an environmental influencer may be identified and characterized by its effect(s) on the expression of receptors for TNF (Human TNF RI Duoset, R&D Systems, Minneapolis, Minn.).

The components of the extracellular matrix (ECM) play roles in both the structure of cells and tissues and in signaling processes. For example, latent transforming growth factor beta binding proteins are ECM components that create a reservoir of transforming growth factor beta (TGFβ) within the ECM. Matrix-bound TGFβ can be released later during the process of matrix remodeling and can exert growth factor effects on nearby cells (Dallas, S. Methods in Mol. Biol. 139:231-243 (2000)).

In some embodiments, an environmental influencer (e.g., MIM or Epi-shifter) may be identified or characterized by its effect(s) on the creation of ECM by cultured cells. Researchers have developed techniques with which the creation of ECM by cells, as well as the composition of the ECM, can be studied and quantified. For example, the synthesis of ECM by cells can be evaluated by embedding the cells in a hydrogel before incubation. Biochemical and other analyses are performed on the ECM generated by the cells after cell harvest and digestion of the hydrogel (Strehin, I. and Elisseeff, J. Methods in Mol. Bio. 522:349-362 (2009)).

In some embodiments, the effect of environmental influencer (e.g., MIM or epi-shifter) on the production, status of or lack of ECM or one of its components in an organism may be identified or characterized. Techniques for creating conditional knock-out (KO) mice have been developed that allow for the knockout of particular ECM genes only in discrete types of cells or at certain stages of development (Brancaccio, M. et al. Methods in Mol Bio. 522:15-50 (2009)). The effect of the application or administration of an epi-shifter or potential epi-shifter on the activity or absence of a particular ECM component in a particular tissue or at a particular stage of development may thus be evaluated.

Measurement of Plasma Membrane Integrity and Cell Death

Environmental influencers (e.g., MIMs or Epi-shifters) may be identified by changes in the plasma membrane integrity of a cell sample and/or by changes in the number or percentage of cells that undergo apoptosis, necrosis or cellular changes that demonstrate an increased or reduced likelihood of cell death.

An assay for lactate dehydrogenase (LDH) can provide a measurement of cellular status and damage levels. LDH is a stable and relatively abundant cytoplasmic enzyme. When plasma membranes lose physical integrity, LDH escapes to the extracellular compartment. Higher concentrations of LDH correlate with higher levels of plasma membrane damage and cell death. Examples of LDH assays include assays that use a colorimetric system to detect and quantify levels of LDH in a sample, wherein the reduced form of a tetrazolium salt is produced via the activity of the LDH enzyme (QuantiChrom™ Lactate Dehydrogenase Kit (DLDH-100), BioAssay Systems, Hayward, Calif.; LDH Cytotoxicity Detection Kit, Clontech, Mountain View, Calif.).

Apoptosis is a process of programmed cell death that may have a variety of different initiating events. A number of assays can detect changes in the rate and/or number of cells that undergo apoptosis. One type of assay that is used to detect and quantify apoptosis is a capase assay. Capases are aspartic acid-specific cysteine proteases that are activated via proteolytic cleavage during apoptosis. Examples of assays that detect activated capases include PhiPhiLux® (OncoImmunin, Inc., Gaithersburg, Md.) and Caspase-Glo® 3/7 Assay Systems (Promega Corp., Madison, Wis.). Additional assays that can detect apoptosis and changes in the percentage or number of cells undergoing apoptosis in comparative samples include TUNEL/DNA fragmentation assays. These assays detect the 180 to 200 base pair DNA fragments generated by nucleases during the execution phase of apoptosis. Exemplary TUNEL/DNA fragmentation assays include the In Situ Cell Death Detection Kit (Roche Applied Science, Indianapolis, Ind.) and the DeadEnd™ Colorimetric and Fluorometric TUNEL Systems (Promega Corp., Madison, Wis.).

Some apoptosis assays detect and quantify proteins associated with an apoptotic and/or a non-apoptotic state. For example, the MultiTox-Fluor Multiplex Cytotoxicity Assay (Promega Corp., Madison, Wis.) uses a single substrate, fluorimetric system to detect and quantify proteases specific to live and dead cells, thus providing a ratio of living cells to cells that have undergone apoptosis in a cell or tissue sample.

Additional assays available for detecting and quantifying apoptosis include assays that detect cell permeability (e.g., APOPercentage™ APOPTOSIS Assay, Biocolor, UK) and assays for Annexin V (e.g., Annexin V-Biotin Apoptosis Detection Kit, BioVision Inc., Mountain View, Calif.).

IV. Uses of the Invention

The invention provides methods for assaying whether a subject is afflicted with a metabolic disorder. The methods of the present invention can be practiced in conjunction with any other method used by the skilled practitioner to prognose a metabolic disorder and/or the survival of a subject being treated for a metabolic disorder. For example, the methods of the invention may be performed in conjunction with a morphological or cytological analysis of the sample obtained from the subject. Cytological methods would include immunohistochemical or immunofluorescence detection (and quantitation if appropriate) of any other molecular marker either by itself, in conjunction with other markers, and/or in conjunction with the Shc markers. Other methods would include detection of other markers by in situ PCR, or by extracting tissue and quantitating other markers by real time PCR. PCR is defined as polymerase chain reaction.

Methods for assessing the efficacy of a treatment regimen for treating a metabolic disorder in a subject are also provided. In these methods the amount of marker in a pair of samples (a first sample not subjected to the treatment regimen and a second sample subjected to at least a portion of the treatment regimen) is assessed.

Using the methods described herein, a variety of molecules, particularly including molecules sufficiently small to be able to cross the cell membrane, may be screened in order to identify molecules which modulate, e.g., increase the expression and/or activity of a marker of the invention. Compounds so identified can be provided to a subject in order to inhibit a metabolic disorder in the subject or to treat a metabolic disorder in the subject.

V. Markers of the Invention

The invention relates to markers (hereinafter “biomarkers”, “markers” or “markers of the invention”), which are listed in Tables 2-4 & 6-29. The invention provides nucleic acids and proteins that are encoded by or correspond to the markers (hereinafter “marker nucleic acids” and “marker proteins,” respectively). These markers are particularly useful in screening for the presence of a metabolic disorder, prognosing whether a subject is predisposed to developing a metabolic disorder, identifying a compound for treating a metabolic disorder and assessing the efficacy of a therapy or of an environmental influencer compound for treating a metabolic disorder.

In some embodiments of the present invention, one or more biomarkers is used in connection with the methods of the present invention. As used herein, the term “one or more biomarkers” is intended to mean that at least one biomarker in a disclosed list of biomarkers is assayed and, in various embodiments, more than one biomarker set forth in the list may be assayed, such as two, three, four, five, ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, more than fifty, or all the biomarkers in the list may be assayed.

A “marker” is a gene whose altered level of expression in a tissue or cell from its expression level in normal or healthy tissue or cell is associated with a disease state, such as a metabolic disorder. A “marker nucleic acid” is a nucleic acid (e.g., mRNA, cDNA) encoding the marker or corresponding to a marker of the invention. Such marker nucleic acids include DNA (e.g., cDNA) comprising the entire or a partial sequence encoding any of the markers of the invention or the complement of such a sequence. The marker nucleic acids also include RNA comprising the entire or a partial sequence of encloding a marker of the invention or the complement of such a sequence, wherein all thymidine residues are replaced with uridine residues. A “marker protein” is a protein encoded by or corresponding to a marker of the invention. A marker protein comprises the entire or a partial sequence of a marker protein. The terms “protein” and “polypeptide’ are used interchangeably.

A “marker associated with apoptosis” is a marker involved in an apoptotic pathway. For example, markers associated with apoptosis include, but are not limited to, the markers listed in Tables 6A, 6B, 7-9, 25 and 28. Specifically, markers associated with apoptosis include Bcl-xl, Bcl-xS, BNIP-2, Bcl-2, Birc6, Bcl-2-L11 (Bim), XIAP, BRAF, Bax, c-Jun, Bmf, PUMA, and cMyc.

A “marker associated with oxidative stress” is a marker involved in an oxidative stress pathway. For example, markers associated with oxidative stress include, but are not limited to, the markers listed in Tables 10-12. Specifically, markers associated with oxidative stress include Neutrophil cytosolic factor 2, nitric oxide synthase 2A, and superoxide dismutase 2 (mitochondrial).

A “marker associated with heat shock” is a marker involved in heat shock. For example, markers associated with heat shock include, but are not limited to, the markers listed in Table 13.

A “marker associated with angiogenesis” is a marker involved in an angiogenesis pathway. For example, markers associated with angiogenesis include, but are not limited to, the markers listed in Tables 24 and 27.

A “marker associated with diabetes” is a marker involved in diabetes. For example, markers associated with diabetes include, but are not limited to, the markers listed in Tables 14-17, 23 and 26.

A “metabolic disorder-associated” body fluid is a fluid which, when in the body of a patient, contacts or passes through metabolic cells or into which cells or proteins shed from metabolic cells are capable of passing. Exemplary metabolic disorder-associated body fluids include blood fluids (e.g. whole blood, blood serum, blood having platelets removed therefrom), and are described in more detail below. Many metabolic disorder-associated body fluids can have metabolic cells therein, particularly when the cells are metastasizing. Cell-containing fluids which can contain metabolic cells include, but are not limited to, whole blood, blood having platelets removed therefrom, lymph, and urine.

The “normal” level of expression of a marker is the level of expression of the marker in cells of a human subject or patient not afflicted with a metabolic disorder.

An “over-expression” or “higher level of expression” of a marker refers to an expression level in a test sample that is greater than the standard error of the assay employed to assess expression, and is preferably at least twice, and more preferably three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine or ten times the expression level of the marker in a control sample (e.g., sample from a healthy subject not having the marker associated disease, i.e., metabolic disorder) and preferably, the average expression level of the marker in several control samples.

A “lower level of expression” of a marker refers to an expression level in a test sample that is at least twice, and more preferably three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine or ten times lower than the expression level of the marker in a control sample (e.g., sample from a healthy subjects not having the marker associated disease, i.e., a metabolic disorder) and preferably, the average expression level of the marker in several control samples.

A “transcribed polynucleotide” or “nucleotide transcript” is a polynucleotide (e.g. an mRNA, hnRNA, a cDNA, or an analog of such RNA or cDNA) which is complementary to or homologous with all or a portion of a mature mRNA made by transcription of a marker of the invention and normal post-transcriptional processing (e.g. splicing), if any, of the RNA transcript, and reverse transcription of the RNA transcript.

“Complementary” refers to the broad concept of sequence complementarity between regions of two nucleic acid strands or between two regions of the same nucleic acid strand. It is known that an adenine residue of a first nucleic acid region is capable of forming specific hydrogen bonds (“base pairing”) with a residue of a second nucleic acid region which is antiparallel to the first region if the residue is thymine or uracil. Similarly, it is known that a cytosine residue of a first nucleic acid strand is capable of base pairing with a residue of a second nucleic acid strand which is antiparallel to the first strand if the residue is guanine. A first region of a nucleic acid is complementary to a second region of the same or a different nucleic acid if, when the two regions are arranged in an antiparallel fashion, at least one nucleotide residue of the first region is capable of base pairing with a residue of the second region. Preferably, the first region comprises a first portion and the second region comprises a second portion, whereby, when the first and second portions are arranged in an antiparallel fashion, at least about 50%, and preferably at least about 75%, at least about 90%, or at least about 95% of the nucleotide residues of the first portion are capable of base pairing with nucleotide residues in the second portion. More preferably, all nucleotide residues of the first portion are capable of base pairing with nucleotide residues in the second portion.

“Homologous” as used herein, refers to nucleotide sequence similarity between two regions of the same nucleic acid strand or between regions of two different nucleic acid strands. When a nucleotide residue position in both regions is occupied by the same nucleotide residue, then the regions are homologous at that position. A first region is homologous to a second region if at least one nucleotide residue position of each region is occupied by the same residue. Homology between two regions is expressed in terms of the proportion of nucleotide residue positions of the two regions that are occupied by the same nucleotide residue. By way of example, a region having the nucleotide sequence 5′-ATTGCC-3′ and a region having the nucleotide sequence 5′-TATGGC-3′ share 50% homology. Preferably, the first region comprises a first portion and the second region comprises a second portion, whereby, at least about 50%, and preferably at least about 75%, at least about 90%, or at least about 95% of the nucleotide residue positions of each of the portions are occupied by the same nucleotide residue. More preferably, all nucleotide residue positions of each of the portions are occupied by the same nucleotide residue.

“Proteins of the invention” encompass marker proteins and their fragments; variant marker proteins and their fragments; peptides and polypeptides comprising an at least 15 amino acid segment of a marker or variant marker protein; and fusion proteins comprising a marker or variant marker protein, or an at least 15 amino acid segment of a marker or variant marker protein.

The invention further provides antibodies, antibody derivatives and antibody fragments which specifically bind with the marker proteins and fragments of the marker proteins of the present invention. Unless otherwise specified herewithin, the terms “antibody” and “antibodies” broadly encompass naturally-occurring forms of antibodies (e.g., IgG, IgA, IgM, IgE) and recombinant antibodies such as single-chain antibodies, chimeric and humanized antibodies and multi-specific antibodies, as well as fragments and derivatives of all of the foregoing, which fragments and derivatives have at least an antigenic binding site. Antibody derivatives may comprise a protein or chemical moiety conjugated to an antibody.

In some embodiments, the biomarker is a regulator of the insulin receptor pathway. In some embodiments, the biomarker binds the insulin receptor. In some embodiments, the biomarker is a diabetes related gene. Diabetes related genes include, for example, the genes listed in Table 23. In some embodiments, the biomarker is involved in oxidative stress. In some embodiments, the biomarker is a caspase modulator, e.g., a caspase activator or a caspase inhibitor. In some embodiments, the biomarker is involved in cell growth. In other embodiments, the biomarker is involved in cell cycle regulation and DNA synthesis. In still other embodiments, the biomarker is involved in glycolysis and metabolism, e.g., pentose phosphate pathway and mitochondrial oxidative metabolism. In further embodiments, the biomarker is involved in molecular transport. In some embodiments, the biomarker is involved in cell signaling. In other embodiments, the biomarker is involved in diabetes and oxidative stress, e.g., glycolytic pathways and insulin processing. In still other embodiments, the biomarker is involved in 14-3-3 mediated signaling. In further embodiments, the biomarker is involved in ceramide signaling. In some embodiments, the biomarker is involved in mitochondrial protein transport. In other embodiments, the biomarker is involved in adipocyte differentiation. In still other embodiments, the biomarker is involved in lipid and cholesterol metabolism. In some embodiments, the biomarker is involved in membrane fluidity. In other embodiments, the biomarker is involved in immunomodulation. In still other embodiments, the biomarker is involved in genomic stability. In further embodiments, the biomarker is involved in extracellular matrix protein integrity. In some embodiments, the biomarker is involved in membrane transport. In other embodiments, the biomarker is involved in oxidative control. In some embodiments, the biomarker is involved in the pentose phosphate pathway. In some embodiments, the biomarker is a member of the tumor necrosis factor receptor superfamily. In some embodiments, the biomarker is involved in arachidonic acid metabolism. In some embodiments, the biomarker is involved in two or more of the pathways indicated hereinabove. In some embodiments, the biomarker is involved in three or more, four or more, five or more, etc. of the pathways indicated hereinabove. In some embodiments, more than one biomarker is utilized in connection with the present invention. In these embodiments, the biomarkers may each individually be involved in one or more, two or more, three or more, four or more, five or more, etc. of the pathways indicated hereinabove.

In certain embodiments, where a particular listed gene is associated with more than one treatment conditions, such as at different time periods after a treatment, or treatment by different concentrations of a potential environmental influencer (e.g., CoQ10), the fold change for that particular gene refers to the longest recorded treatment time. In other embodiments, the fold change for that particular gene refers to the shortest recorded treatment time. In other embodiments, the fold change for that particular gene refers to treatment by the highest concentration of env-influencer (e.g., CoQ10). In other embodiments, the fold change for that particular gene refers to treatment by the lowest concentration of env-influencer (e.g., CoQ10). In yet other embodiments, the fold change for that particular gene refers to the modulation (e.g., up- or down-regulation) in a manner that is consistent with the therapeutic effect of the env-influencer.

In certain embodiments, the positive or negative fold change refers to that of any gene listed in any of the Tables 2-4 & 6-29 and 64-69. In certain embodiments, the positive or negative fold change refers to that of any gene listed in any of the Tables 2-4 & 6-29 and 64-69, except for one of the tables (e.g., except for Table 1, except for Table 5, etc.). In certain embodiments, the positive or negative fold change refers to that of any gene listed in any of the Tables 2-4 & 6-29 and 64-69, except for any two of the tables (e.g., except for Tables 1 and 5, except for Table 2 & 16, etc.). In certain embodiments, the positive or negative fold change refers to that of any gene listed in any of the Tables 2-4 & 6-29 and 64-69, except for any three of the tables; or except for any four of the tables; or except for any 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more of the tables. In certain embodiments, the positive or negative fold change refers to that of any gene listed in any of the Tables 2-4 & 6-29 and 64-69, except for tables 1, 5, 9, 12, and 59.

As used herein, “positive fold change” refers to “up-regulation” or “increase (of expression)” of a gene that is listed in the relevant tables.

As used herein, “negative fold change” refers to “down-regulation” or “decrease (of expression)” of a gene that is listed in the relevant tables.

Various aspects of the invention are described in further detail in the following subsections.

1. Isolated Nucleic Acid Molecules

One aspect of the invention pertains to isolated nucleic acid molecules, including nucleic acids which encode a marker protein or a portion thereof. Isolated nucleic acids of the invention also include nucleic acid molecules sufficient for use as hybridization probes to identify marker nucleic acid molecules, and fragments of marker nucleic acid molecules, e.g., those suitable for use as PCR primers for the amplification or mutation of marker nucleic acid molecules. As used herein, the term “nucleic acid molecule” is intended to include DNA molecules (e.g., cDNA or genomic DNA) and RNA molecules (e.g., mRNA) and analogs of the DNA or RNA generated using nucleotide analogs. The nucleic acid molecule can be single-stranded or double-stranded, but preferably is double-stranded DNA.

An “isolated” nucleic acid molecule is one which is separated from other nucleic acid molecules which are present in the natural source of the nucleic acid molecule. In one embodiment, an “isolated” nucleic acid molecule is free of sequences (preferably protein-encoding sequences) which naturally flank the nucleic acid (i.e., sequences located at the 5′ and 3′ ends of the nucleic acid) in the genomic DNA of the organism from which the nucleic acid is derived. For example, in various embodiments, the isolated nucleic acid molecule can contain less than about 5 kB, 4 kB, 3 kB, 2 kB, 1 kB, 0.5 kB or 0.1 kB of nucleotide sequences which naturally flank the nucleic acid molecule in genomic DNA of the cell from which the nucleic acid is derived. In another embodiment, an “isolated” nucleic acid molecule, such as a cDNA molecule, can be substantially free of other cellular material, or culture medium when produced by recombinant techniques, or substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals when chemically synthesized. A nucleic acid molecule that is substantially free of cellular material includes preparations having less than about 30%, 20%, 10%, or 5% of heterologous nucleic acid (also referred to herein as a “contaminating nucleic acid”).

A nucleic acid molecule of the present invention can be isolated using standard molecular biology techniques and the sequence information in the database records described herein. Using all or a portion of such nucleic acid sequences, nucleic acid molecules of the invention can be isolated using standard hybridization and cloning techniques (e.g., as described in Sambrook et al., ed., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, 2nd ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., 1989).

A nucleic acid molecule of the invention can be amplified using cDNA, mRNA, or genomic DNA as a template and appropriate oligonucleotide primers according to standard PCR amplification techniques. The nucleic acid so amplified can be cloned into an appropriate vector and characterized by DNA sequence analysis. Furthermore, nucleotides corresponding to all or a portion of a nucleic acid molecule of the invention can be prepared by standard synthetic techniques, e.g., using an automated DNA synthesizer.

In another preferred embodiment, an isolated nucleic acid molecule of the invention comprises a nucleic acid molecule which has a nucleotide sequence complementary to the nucleotide sequence of a marker nucleic acid or to the nucleotide sequence of a nucleic acid encoding a marker protein. A nucleic acid molecule which is complementary to a given nucleotide sequence is one which is sufficiently complementary to the given nucleotide sequence that it can hybridize to the given nucleotide sequence thereby forming a stable duplex.

Moreover, a nucleic acid molecule of the invention can comprise only a portion of a nucleic acid sequence, wherein the full length nucleic acid sequence comprises a marker nucleic acid or which encodes a marker protein. Such nucleic acids can be used, for example, as a probe or primer. The probe/primer typically is used as one or more substantially purified oligonucleotides. The oligonucleotide typically comprises a region of nucleotide sequence that hybridizes under stringent conditions to at least about 7, preferably about 15, more preferably about 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, or 400 or more consecutive nucleotides of a nucleic acid of the invention.

Probes based on the sequence of a nucleic acid molecule of the invention can be used to detect transcripts or genomic sequences corresponding to one or more markers of the invention. The probe comprises a label group attached thereto, e.g., a radioisotope, a fluorescent compound, an enzyme, or an enzyme co-factor. Such probes can be used as part of a diagnostic test kit for identifying cells or tissues which mis-express the protein, such as by measuring levels of a nucleic acid molecule encoding the protein in a sample of cells from a subject, e.g., detecting mRNA levels or determining whether a gene encoding the protein has been mutated or deleted.

The invention further encompasses nucleic acid molecules that differ, due to degeneracy of the genetic code, from the nucleotide sequence of nucleic acids encoding a marker protein, and thus encode the same protein.

It will be appreciated by those skilled in the art that DNA sequence polymorphisms that lead to changes in the amino acid sequence can exist within a population (e.g., the human population). Such genetic polymorphisms can exist among individuals within a population due to natural allelic variation. An allele is one of a group of genes which occur alternatively at a given genetic locus. In addition, it will be appreciated that DNA polymorphisms that affect RNA expression levels can also exist that may affect the overall expression level of that gene (e.g., by affecting regulation or degradation).

As used herein, the phrase “allelic variant” refers to a nucleotide sequence which occurs at a given locus or to a polypeptide encoded by the nucleotide sequence.

As used herein, the terms “gene” and “recombinant gene” refer to nucleic acid molecules comprising an open reading frame encoding a polypeptide corresponding to a marker of the invention. Such natural allelic variations can typically result in 1-5% variance in the nucleotide sequence of a given gene. Alternative alleles can be identified by sequencing the gene of interest in a number of different individuals. This can be readily carried out by using hybridization probes to identify the same genetic locus in a variety of individuals. Any and all such nucleotide variations and resulting amino acid polymorphisms or variations that are the result of natural allelic variation and that do not alter the functional activity are intended to be within the scope of the invention.

In another embodiment, an isolated nucleic acid molecule of the invention is at least 7, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 60, 80, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 550, 650, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, 2000, 2200, 2400, 2600, 2800, 3000, 3500, 4000, 4500, or more nucleotides in length and hybridizes under stringent conditions to a marker nucleic acid or to a nucleic acid encoding a marker protein. As used herein, the term “hybridizes under stringent conditions” is intended to describe conditions for hybridization and washing under which nucleotide sequences at least 60% (65%, 70%, preferably 75%) identical to each other typically remain hybridized to each other. Such stringent conditions are known to those skilled in the art and can be found in sections 6.3.1-6.3.6 of Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, N.Y. (1989). A preferred, non-limiting example of stringent hybridization conditions are hybridization in 6× sodium chloride/sodium citrate (SSC) at about 45° C., followed by one or more washes in 0.2×SSC, 0.1% SDS at 50-65° C.

In addition to naturally-occurring allelic variants of a nucleic acid molecule of the invention that can exist in the population, the skilled artisan will further appreciate that sequence changes can be introduced by mutation thereby leading to changes in the amino acid sequence of the encoded protein, without altering the biological activity of the protein encoded thereby. For example, one can make nucleotide substitutions leading to amino acid substitutions at “non-essential” amino acid residues. A “non-essential” amino acid residue is a residue that can be altered from the wild-type sequence without altering the biological activity, whereas an “essential” amino acid residue is required for biological activity. For example, amino acid residues that are not conserved or only semi-conserved among homologs of various species may be non-essential for activity and thus would be likely targets for alteration. Alternatively, amino acid residues that are conserved among the homologs of various species (e.g., murine and human) may be essential for activity and thus would not be likely targets for alteration.

Accordingly, another aspect of the invention pertains to nucleic acid molecules encoding a variant marker protein that contain changes in amino acid residues that are not essential for activity. Such variant marker proteins differ in amino acid sequence from the naturally-occurring marker proteins, yet retain biological activity. In one embodiment, such a variant marker protein has an amino acid sequence that is at least about 40% identical, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% identical to the amino acid sequence of a marker protein.

An isolated nucleic acid molecule encoding a variant marker protein can be created by introducing one or more nucleotide substitutions, additions or deletions into the nucleotide sequence of marker nucleic acids, such that one or more amino acid residue substitutions, additions, or deletions are introduced into the encoded protein. Mutations can be introduced by standard techniques, such as site-directed mutagenesis and PCR-mediated mutagenesis. Preferably, conservative amino acid substitutions are made at one or more predicted non-essential amino acid residues. A “conservative amino acid substitution” is one in which the amino acid residue is replaced with an amino acid residue having a similar side chain. Families of amino acid residues having similar side chains have been defined in the art. These families include amino acids with basic side chains (e.g., lysine, arginine, histidine), acidic side chains (e.g., aspartic acid, glutamic acid), uncharged polar side chains (e.g., glycine, asparagine, glutamine, serine, threonine, tyrosine, cysteine), non-polar side chains (e.g., alanine, valine, leucine, isoleucine, proline, phenylalanine, methionine, tryptophan), beta-branched side chains (e.g., threonine, valine, isoleucine) and aromatic side chains (e.g., tyrosine, phenylalanine, tryptophan, histidine). Alternatively, mutations can be introduced randomly along all or part of the coding sequence, such as by saturation mutagenesis, and the resultant mutants can be screened for biological activity to identify mutants that retain activity. Following mutagenesis, the encoded protein can be expressed recombinantly and the activity of the protein can be determined.

The present invention encompasses antisense nucleic acid molecules, i.e., molecules which are complementary to a sense nucleic acid of the invention, e.g., complementary to the coding strand of a double-stranded marker cDNA molecule or complementary to a marker mRNA sequence. Accordingly, an antisense nucleic acid of the invention can hydrogen bond to (i.e. anneal with) a sense nucleic acid of the invention. The antisense nucleic acid can be complementary to an entire coding strand, or to only a portion thereof, e.g., all or part of the protein coding region (or open reading frame). An antisense nucleic acid molecule can also be antisense to all or part of a non-coding region of the coding strand of a nucleotide sequence encoding a marker protein. The non-coding regions (“5′ and 3′ untranslated regions”) are the 5′ and 3′ sequences which flank the coding region and are not translated into amino acids.

An antisense oligonucleotide can be, for example, about 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, or 50 or more nucleotides in length. An antisense nucleic acid of the invention can be constructed using chemical synthesis and enzymatic ligation reactions using procedures known in the art. For example, an antisense nucleic acid (e.g., an antisense oligonucleotide) can be chemically synthesized using naturally occurring nucleotides or variously modified nucleotides designed to increase the biological stability of the molecules or to increase the physical stability of the duplex formed between the antisense and sense nucleic acids, e.g., phosphorothioate derivatives and acridine substituted nucleotides can be used. Examples of modified nucleotides which can be used to generate the antisense nucleic acid include 5-fluorouracil, 5-bromouracil, 5-chlorouracil, 5-iodouracil, hypoxanthine, xanthine, 4-acetylcytosine, 5-(carboxyhydroxylmethyl) uracil, 5-carboxymethylaminomethyl-2-thiouridine, 5-carboxymethylaminomethyluracil, dihydrouracil, beta-D-galactosylqueosine, inosine, N6-isopentenyladenine, 1-methylguanine, 1-methylinosine, 2,2-dimethylguanine, 2-methyladenine, 2-methylguanine, 3-methylcytosine, 5-methylcytosine, N6-adenine, 7-methylguanine, 5-methylaminomethyluracil, 5-methoxyaminomethyl-2-thiouracil, beta-D-mannosylqueosine, 5′-methoxycarboxymethyluracil, 5-methoxyuracil, 2-methylthio-N6-isopentenyladenine, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid (v), wybutoxosine, pseudouracil, queosine, 2-thiocytosine, 5-methyl-2-thiouracil, 2-thiouracil, 4-thiouracil, 5-methyluracil, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid methylester, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid (v), 5-methyl-2-thiouracil, 3-(3-amino-3-N-2-carboxypropyl) uracil, (acp3)w, and 2,6-diaminopurine. Alternatively, the antisense nucleic acid can be produced biologically using an expression vector into which a nucleic acid has been sub-cloned in an antisense orientation (i.e., RNA transcribed from the inserted nucleic acid will be of an antisense orientation to a target nucleic acid of interest, described further in the following subsection).

The antisense nucleic acid molecules of the invention are typically administered to a subject or generated in situ such that they hybridize with or bind to cellular mRNA and/or genomic DNA encoding a marker protein to thereby inhibit expression of the marker, e.g., by inhibiting transcription and/or translation. The hybridization can be by conventional nucleotide complementarity to form a stable duplex, or, for example, in the case of an antisense nucleic acid molecule which binds to DNA duplexes, through specific interactions in the major groove of the double helix. Examples of a route of administration of antisense nucleic acid molecules of the invention includes direct injection at a tissue site or infusion of the antisense nucleic acid into a metabolic disorder-associated body fluid. Alternatively, antisense nucleic acid molecules can be modified to target selected cells and then administered systemically. For example, for systemic administration, antisense molecules can be modified such that they specifically bind to receptors or antigens expressed on a selected cell surface, e.g., by linking the antisense nucleic acid molecules to peptides or antibodies which bind to cell surface receptors or antigens. The antisense nucleic acid molecules can also be delivered to cells using the vectors described herein. To achieve sufficient intracellular concentrations of the antisense molecules, vector constructs in which the antisense nucleic acid molecule is placed under the control of a strong pol II or pol III promoter are preferred.

An antisense nucleic acid molecule of the invention can be an α-anomeric nucleic acid molecule. An α-anomeric nucleic acid molecule forms specific double-stranded hybrids with complementary RNA in which, contrary to the usual α-units, the strands run parallel to each other (Gaultier et al., 1987, Nucleic Acids Res. 15:6625-6641). The antisense nucleic acid molecule can also comprise a 2′-o-methylribonucleotide (Inoue et al., 1987, Nucleic Acids Res. 15:6131-6148) or a chimeric RNA-DNA analogue (Inoue et al., 1987, FEBS Lett. 215:327-330).

The invention also encompasses ribozymes. Ribozymes are catalytic RNA molecules with ribonuclease activity which are capable of cleaving a single-stranded nucleic acid, such as an mRNA, to which they have a complementary region. Thus, ribozymes (e.g., hammerhead ribozymes as described in Haselhoff and Gerlach, 1988, Nature 334:585-591) can be used to catalytically cleave mRNA transcripts to thereby inhibit translation of the protein encoded by the mRNA. A ribozyme having specificity for a nucleic acid molecule encoding a marker protein can be designed based upon the nucleotide sequence of a cDNA corresponding to the marker. For example, a derivative of a Tetrahymena L-19 IVS RNA can be constructed in which the nucleotide sequence of the active site is complementary to the nucleotide sequence to be cleaved (see Cech et al. U.S. Pat. No. 4,987,071; and Cech et al. U.S. Pat. No. 5,116,742). Alternatively, an mRNA encoding a polypeptide of the invention can be used to select a catalytic RNA having a specific ribonuclease activity from a pool of RNA molecules (see, e.g., Bartel and Szostak, 1993, Science 261:1411-1418).

The invention also encompasses nucleic acid molecules which form triple helical structures. For example, expression of a marker of the invention can be inhibited by targeting nucleotide sequences complementary to the regulatory region of the gene encoding the marker nucleic acid or protein (e.g., the promoter and/or enhancer) to form triple helical structures that prevent transcription of the gene in target cells. See generally Helene (1991) Anticancer Drug Des. 6(6):569-84; Helene (1992) Ann. N.Y. Acad. Sci. 660:27-36; and Maher (1992) Bioassays 14(12):807-15.

In various embodiments, the nucleic acid molecules of the invention can be modified at the base moiety, sugar moiety or phosphate backbone to improve, e.g., the stability, hybridization, or solubility of the molecule. For example, the deoxyribose phosphate backbone of the nucleic acids can be modified to generate peptide nucleic acids (see Hyrup et al., 1996, Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry 4(1): 5-23). As used herein, the terms “peptide nucleic acids” or “PNAs” refer to nucleic acid mimics, e.g., DNA mimics, in which the deoxyribose phosphate backbone is replaced by a pseudopeptide backbone and only the four natural nucleobases are retained. The neutral backbone of PNAs has been shown to allow for specific hybridization to DNA and RNA under conditions of low ionic strength. The synthesis of PNA oligomers can be performed using standard solid phase peptide synthesis protocols as described in Hyrup et al. (1996), supra; Perry-O'Keefe et al. (1996) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 93:14670-675.

PNAs can be used in therapeutic and diagnostic applications. For example, PNAs can be used as antisense or antigene agents for sequence-specific modulation of gene expression by, e.g., inducing transcription or translation arrest or inhibiting replication. PNAs can also be used, e.g., in the analysis of single base pair mutations in a gene by, e.g., PNA directed PCR clamping; as artificial restriction enzymes when used in combination with other enzymes, e.g., S1 nucleases (Hyrup (1996), supra; or as probes or primers for DNA sequence and hybridization (Hyrup, 1996, supra; Perry-O'Keefe et al., 1996, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 93:14670-675).

In another embodiment, PNAs can be modified, e.g., to enhance their stability or cellular uptake, by attaching lipophilic or other helper groups to PNA, by the formation of PNA-DNA chimeras, or by the use of liposomes or other techniques of drug delivery known in the art. For example, PNA-DNA chimeras can be generated which can combine the advantageous properties of PNA and DNA. Such chimeras allow DNA recognition enzymes, e.g., RNase H and DNA polymerases, to interact with the DNA portion while the PNA portion would provide high binding affinity and specificity. PNA-DNA chimeras can be linked using linkers of appropriate lengths selected in terms of base stacking, number of bonds between the nucleobases, and orientation (Hyrup, 1996, supra). The synthesis of PNA-DNA chimeras can be performed as described in Hyrup (1996), supra, and Finn et al. (1996) Nucleic Acids Res. 24(17):3357-63. For example, a DNA chain can be synthesized on a solid support using standard phosphoramidite coupling chemistry and modified nucleoside analogs. Compounds such as 5′-(4-methoxytrityl)amino-5′-deoxy-thymidine phosphoramidite can be used as a link between the PNA and the 5′ end of DNA (Mag et al., 1989, Nucleic Acids Res. 17:5973-88). PNA monomers are then coupled in a step-wise manner to produce a chimeric molecule with a 5′ PNA segment and a 3′ DNA segment (Finn et al., 1996, Nucleic Acids Res. 24(17):3357-63). Alternatively, chimeric molecules can be synthesized with a 5′ DNA segment and a 3′ PNA segment (Peterser et al., 1975, Bioorganic Med. Chem. Lett. 5:1119-11124).

In other embodiments, the oligonucleotide can include other appended groups such as peptides (e.g., for targeting host cell receptors in vivo), or agents facilitating transport across the cell membrane (see, e.g., Letsinger et al., 1989, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:6553-6556; Lemaitre et al., 1987, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 84:648-652; PCT Publication No. WO 88/09810) or the blood-brain barrier (see, e.g., PCT Publication No. WO 89/10134). In addition, oligonucleotides can be modified with hybridization-triggered cleavage agents (see, e.g., Krol et al., 1988, Bio/Techniques 6:958-976) or intercalating agents (see, e.g., Zon, 1988, Pharm. Res. 5:539-549). To this end, the oligonucleotide can be conjugated to another molecule, e.g., a peptide, hybridization triggered cross-linking agent, transport agent, hybridization-triggered cleavage agent, etc.

The invention also includes molecular beacon nucleic acids having at least one region which is complementary to a nucleic acid of the invention, such that the molecular beacon is useful for quantitating the presence of the nucleic acid of the invention in a sample. A “molecular beacon” nucleic acid is a nucleic acid comprising a pair of complementary regions and having a fluorophore and a fluorescent quencher associated therewith. The fluorophore and quencher are associated with different portions of the nucleic acid in such an orientation that when the complementary regions are annealed with one another, fluorescence of the fluorophore is quenched by the quencher. When the complementary regions of the nucleic acid are not annealed with one another, fluorescence of the fluorophore is quenched to a lesser degree. Molecular beacon nucleic acids are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 5,876,930.

2. Isolated Proteins and Antibodies

One aspect of the invention pertains to isolated marker proteins and biologically active portions thereof, as well as polypeptide fragments suitable for use as immunogens to raise antibodies directed against a marker protein or a fragment thereof. In one embodiment, the native marker protein can be isolated from cells or tissue sources by an appropriate purification scheme using standard protein purification techniques. In another embodiment, a protein or peptide comprising the whole or a segment of the marker protein is produced by recombinant DNA techniques. Alternative to recombinant expression, such protein or peptide can be synthesized chemically using standard peptide synthesis techniques.

An “isolated” or “purified” protein or biologically active portion thereof is substantially free of cellular material or other contaminating proteins from the cell or tissue source from which the protein is derived, or substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals when chemically synthesized. The language “substantially free of cellular material” includes preparations of protein in which the protein is separated from cellular components of the cells from which it is isolated or recombinantly produced. Thus, protein that is substantially free of cellular material includes preparations of protein having less than about 30%, 20%, 10%, or 5% (by dry weight) of heterologous protein (also referred to herein as a “contaminating protein”). When the protein or biologically active portion thereof is recombinantly produced, it is also preferably substantially free of culture medium, i.e., culture medium represents less than about 20%, 10%, or 5% of the volume of the protein preparation. When the protein is produced by chemical synthesis, it is preferably substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals, i.e., it is separated from chemical precursors or other chemicals which are involved in the synthesis of the protein. Accordingly such preparations of the protein have less than about 30%, 20%, 10%, 5% (by dry weight) of chemical precursors or compounds other than the polypeptide of interest.

Biologically active portions of a marker protein include polypeptides comprising amino acid sequences sufficiently identical to or derived from the amino acid sequence of the marker protein, which include fewer amino acids than the full length protein, and exhibit at least one activity of the corresponding full-length protein. Typically, biologically active portions comprise a domain or motif with at least one activity of the corresponding full-length protein. A biologically active portion of a marker protein of the invention can be a polypeptide which is, for example, 10, 25, 50, 100 or more amino acids in length. Moreover, other biologically active portions, in which other regions of the marker protein are deleted, can be prepared by recombinant techniques and evaluated for one or more of the functional activities of the native form of the marker protein.

Preferred marker proteins are encoded by nucleotide sequences comprising a sequence encoding any of the makers listed in Tables 2-4, 6-29 and 64-69. Other useful proteins are substantially identical (e.g., at least about 40%, preferably 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99%) to one of these sequences and retain the functional activity of the corresponding naturally-occurring marker protein yet differ in amino acid sequence due to natural allelic variation or mutagenesis.

To determine the percent identity of two amino acid sequences or of two nucleic acids, the sequences are aligned for optimal comparison purposes (e.g., gaps can be introduced in the sequence of a first amino acid or nucleic acid sequence for optimal alignment with a second amino or nucleic acid sequence). The amino acid residues or nucleotides at corresponding amino acid positions or nucleotide positions are then compared. When a position in the first sequence is occupied by the same amino acid residue or nucleotide as the corresponding position in the second sequence, then the molecules are identical at that position. Preferably, the percent identity between the two sequences is calculated using a global alignment. Alternatively, the percent identity between the two sequences is calculated using a local alignment. The percent identity between the two sequences is a function of the number of identical positions shared by the sequences (i.e., % identity=# of identical positions/total # of positions (e.g., overlapping positions)×100). In one embodiment the two sequences are the same length. In another embodiment, the two sequences are not the same length.

The determination of percent identity between two sequences can be accomplished using a mathematical algorithm. A preferred, non-limiting example of a mathematical algorithm utilized for the comparison of two sequences is the algorithm of Karlin and Altschul (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87:2264-2268, modified as in Karlin and Altschul (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:5873-5877. Such an algorithm is incorporated into the BLASTN and BLASTX programs of Altschul, et al. (1990) J. Mol. Biol. 215:403-410. BLAST nucleotide searches can be performed with the BLASTN program, score=100, wordlength=12 to obtain nucleotide sequences homologous to a nucleic acid molecules of the invention. BLAST protein searches can be performed with the BLASTP program, score=50, wordlength=3 to obtain amino acid sequences homologous to a protein molecules of the invention. To obtain gapped alignments for comparison purposes, a newer version of the BLAST algorithm called Gapped BLAST can be utilized as described in Altschul et al. (1997) Nucleic Acids Res. 25:3389-3402, which is able to perform gapped local alignments for the programs BLASTN, BLASTP and BLASTX. Alternatively, PSI-Blast can be used to perform an iterated search which detects distant relationships between molecules. When utilizing BLAST, Gapped BLAST, and PSI-Blast programs, the default parameters of the respective programs (e.g., BLASTX and BLASTN) can be used. See http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov. Another preferred, non-limiting example of a mathematical algorithm utilized for the comparison of sequences is the algorithm of Myers and Miller, (1988) CABIOS 4:11-17. Such an algorithm is incorporated into the ALIGN program (version 2.0) which is part of the GCG sequence alignment software package. When utilizing the ALIGN program for comparing amino acid sequences, a PAM120 weight residue table, a gap length penalty of 12, and a gap penalty of 4 can be used. Yet another useful algorithm for identifying regions of local sequence similarity and alignment is the FASTA algorithm as described in Pearson and Lipman (1988) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85:2444-2448. When using the FASTA algorithm for comparing nucleotide or amino acid sequences, a PAM120 weight residue table can, for example, be used with a k-tuple value of 2.

The percent identity between two sequences can be determined using techniques similar to those described above, with or without allowing gaps. In calculating percent identity, only exact matches are counted.

The invention also provides chimeric or fusion proteins comprising a marker protein or a segment thereof. As used herein, a “chimeric protein” or “fusion protein” comprises all or part (preferably a biologically active part) of a marker protein operably linked to a heterologous polypeptide (i.e., a polypeptide other than the marker protein). Within the fusion protein, the term “operably linked” is intended to indicate that the marker protein or segment thereof and the heterologous polypeptide are fused in-frame to each other. The heterologous polypeptide can be fused to the amino-terminus or the carboxyl-terminus of the marker protein or segment.

One useful fusion protein is a GST fusion protein in which a marker protein or segment is fused to the carboxyl terminus of GST sequences. Such fusion proteins can facilitate the purification of a recombinant polypeptide of the invention.

In another embodiment, the fusion protein contains a heterologous signal sequence at its amino terminus. For example, the native signal sequence of a marker protein can be removed and replaced with a signal sequence from another protein. For example, the gp67 secretory sequence of the baculovirus envelope protein can be used as a heterologous signal sequence (Ausubel et al., ed., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, N Y, 1992). Other examples of eukaryotic heterologous signal sequences include the secretory sequences of melittin and human placental alkaline phosphatase (Stratagene; La Jolla, Calif.). In yet another example, useful prokaryotic heterologous signal sequences include the phoA secretory signal (Sambrook et al., supra) and the protein A secretory signal (Pharmacia Biotech; Piscataway, N.J.).

In yet another embodiment, the fusion protein is an immunoglobulin fusion protein in which all or part of a marker protein is fused to sequences derived from a member of the immunoglobulin protein family. The immunoglobulin fusion proteins of the invention can be incorporated into pharmaceutical compositions and administered to a subject to inhibit an interaction between a ligand (soluble or membrane-bound) and a protein on the surface of a cell (receptor), to thereby suppress signal transduction in vivo. The immunoglobulin fusion protein can be used to affect the bioavailability of a cognate ligand of a marker protein. Inhibition of ligand/receptor interaction can be useful therapeutically, both for treating proliferative and differentiative disorders and for modulating (e.g. promoting or inhibiting) cell survival. Moreover, the immunoglobulin fusion proteins of the invention can be used as immunogens to produce antibodies directed against a marker protein in a subject, to purify ligands and in screening assays to identify molecules which inhibit the interaction of the marker protein with ligands.

Chimeric and fusion proteins of the invention can be produced by standard recombinant DNA techniques. In another embodiment, the fusion gene can be synthesized by conventional techniques including automated DNA synthesizers. Alternatively, PCR amplification of gene fragments can be carried out using anchor primers which give rise to complementary overhangs between two consecutive gene fragments which can subsequently be annealed and re-amplified to generate a chimeric gene sequence (see, e.g., Ausubel et al., supra). Moreover, many expression vectors are commercially available that already encode a fusion moiety (e.g., a GST polypeptide). A nucleic acid encoding a polypeptide of the invention can be cloned into such an expression vector such that the fusion moiety is linked in-frame to the polypeptide of the invention.

A signal sequence can be used to facilitate secretion and isolation of marker proteins. Signal sequences are typically characterized by a core of hydrophobic amino acids which are generally cleaved from the mature protein during secretion in one or more cleavage events. Such signal peptides contain processing sites that allow cleavage of the signal sequence from the mature proteins as they pass through the secretory pathway. Thus, the invention pertains to marker proteins, fusion proteins or segments thereof having a signal sequence, as well as to such proteins from which the signal sequence has been proteolytically cleaved (i.e., the cleavage products). In one embodiment, a nucleic acid sequence encoding a signal sequence can be operably linked in an expression vector to a protein of interest, such as a marker protein or a segment thereof. The signal sequence directs secretion of the protein, such as from a eukaryotic host into which the expression vector is transformed, and the signal sequence is subsequently or concurrently cleaved. The protein can then be readily purified from the extracellular medium by art recognized methods. Alternatively, the signal sequence can be linked to the protein of interest using a sequence which facilitates purification, such as with a GST domain.

The present invention also pertains to variants of the marker proteins. Such variants have an altered amino acid sequence which can function as either agonists (mimetics) or as antagonists. Variants can be generated by mutagenesis, e.g., discrete point mutation or truncation. An agonist can retain substantially the same, or a subset, of the biological activities of the naturally occurring form of the protein. An antagonist of a protein can inhibit one or more of the activities of the naturally occurring form of the protein by, for example, competitively binding to a downstream or upstream member of a cellular signaling cascade which includes the protein of interest. Thus, specific biological effects can be elicited by treatment with a variant of limited function. Treatment of a subject with a variant having a subset of the biological activities of the naturally occurring form of the protein can have fewer side effects in a subject relative to treatment with the naturally occurring form of the protein.

Variants of a marker protein which function as either agonists (mimetics) or as antagonists can be identified by screening combinatorial libraries of mutants, e.g., truncation mutants, of the protein of the invention for agonist or antagonist activity. In one embodiment, a variegated library of variants is generated by combinatorial mutagenesis at the nucleic acid level and is encoded by a variegated gene library. A variegated library of variants can be produced by, for example, enzymatically ligating a mixture of synthetic oligonucleotides into gene sequences such that a degenerate set of potential protein sequences is expressible as individual polypeptides, or alternatively, as a set of larger fusion proteins (e.g., for phage display). There are a variety of methods which can be used to produce libraries of potential variants of the marker proteins from a degenerate oligonucleotide sequence. Methods for synthesizing degenerate oligonucleotides are known in the art (see, e.g., Narang, 1983, Tetrahedron 39:3; Itakura et al., 1984, Annu. Rev. Biochem. 53:323; Itakura et al., 1984, Science 198:1056; Ike et al., 1983 Nucleic Acid Res. 11:477).

In addition, libraries of segments of a marker protein can be used to generate a variegated population of polypeptides for screening and subsequent selection of variant marker proteins or segments thereof. For example, a library of coding sequence fragments can be generated by treating a double stranded PCR fragment of the coding sequence of interest with a nuclease under conditions wherein nicking occurs only about once per molecule, denaturing the double stranded DNA, renaturing the DNA to form double stranded DNA which can include sense/antisense pairs from different nicked products, removing single stranded portions from reformed duplexes by treatment with S1 nuclease, and ligating the resulting fragment library into an expression vector. By this method, an expression library can be derived which encodes amino terminal and internal fragments of various sizes of the protein of interest.

Several techniques are known in the art for screening gene products of combinatorial libraries made by point mutations or truncation, and for screening cDNA libraries for gene products having a selected property. The most widely used techniques, which are amenable to high through-put analysis, for screening large gene libraries typically include cloning the gene library into replicable expression vectors, transforming appropriate cells with the resulting library of vectors, and expressing the combinatorial genes under conditions in which detection of a desired activity facilitates isolation of the vector encoding the gene whose product was detected. Recursive ensemble mutagenesis (REM), a technique which enhances the frequency of functional mutants in the libraries, can be used in combination with the screening assays to identify variants of a protein of the invention (Arkin and Yourvan, 1992, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89:7811-7815; Delgrave et al., 1993, Protein Engineering 6(3):327-331).

Another aspect of the invention pertains to antibodies directed against a protein of the invention. In preferred embodiments, the antibodies specifically bind a marker protein or a fragment thereof. The terms “antibody” and “antibodies” as used interchangeably herein refer to immunoglobulin molecules as well as fragments and derivatives thereof that comprise an immunologically active portion of an immunoglobulin molecule, (i.e., such a portion contains an antigen binding site which specifically binds an antigen, such as a marker protein, e.g., an epitope of a marker protein). An antibody which specifically binds to a protein of the invention is an antibody which binds the protein, but does not substantially bind other molecules in a sample, e.g., a biological sample, which naturally contains the protein. Examples of an immunologically active portion of an immunoglobulin molecule include, but are not limited to, single-chain antibodies (scAb), F(ab) and F(ab′)₂ fragments.

An isolated protein of the invention or a fragment thereof can be used as an immunogen to generate antibodies. The full-length protein can be used or, alternatively, the invention provides antigenic peptide fragments for use as immunogens. The antigenic peptide of a protein of the invention comprises at least 8 (preferably 10, 15, 20, or 30 or more) amino acid residues of the amino acid sequence of one of the proteins of the invention, and encompasses at least one epitope of the protein such that an antibody raised against the peptide forms a specific immune complex with the protein. Preferred epitopes encompassed by the antigenic peptide are regions that are located on the surface of the protein, e.g., hydrophilic regions. Hydrophobicity sequence analysis, hydrophilicity sequence analysis, or similar analyses can be used to identify hydrophilic regions. In preferred embodiments, an isolated marker protein or fragment thereof is used as an immunogen.

An immunogen typically is used to prepare antibodies by immunizing a suitable (i.e. immunocompetent) subject such as a rabbit, goat, mouse, or other mammal or vertebrate. An appropriate immunogenic preparation can contain, for example, recombinantly-expressed or chemically-synthesized protein or peptide. The preparation can further include an adjuvant, such as Freund's complete or incomplete adjuvant, or a similar immunostimulatory agent. Preferred immunogen compositions are those that contain no other human proteins such as, for example, immunogen compositions made using a non-human host cell for recombinant expression of a protein of the invention. In such a manner, the resulting antibody compositions have reduced or no binding of human proteins other than a protein of the invention.

The invention provides polyclonal and monoclonal antibodies. The term “monoclonal antibody” or “monoclonal antibody composition”, as used herein, refers to a population of antibody molecules that contain only one species of an antigen binding site capable of immunoreacting with a particular epitope. Preferred polyclonal and monoclonal antibody compositions are ones that have been selected for antibodies directed against a protein of the invention. Particularly preferred polyclonal and monoclonal antibody preparations are ones that contain only antibodies directed against a marker protein or fragment thereof.

Polyclonal antibodies can be prepared by immunizing a suitable subject with a protein of the invention as an immunogen The antibody titer in the immunized subject can be monitored over time by standard techniques, such as with an enzyme linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA) using immobilized polypeptide. At an appropriate time after immunization, e.g., when the specific antibody titers are highest, antibody-producing cells can be obtained from the subject and used to prepare monoclonal antibodies (mAb) by standard techniques, such as the hybridoma technique originally described by Kohler and Milstein (1975) Nature 256:495-497, the human B cell hybridoma technique (see Kozbor et al., 1983, Immunol. Today 4:72), the EBV-hybridoma technique (see Cole et al., pp. 77-96 In Monoclonal Antibodies and Cancer Therapy, Alan R. Liss, Inc., 1985) or trioma techniques. The technology for producing hybridomas is well known (see generally Current Protocols in Immunology, Coligan et al. ed., John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1994). Hybridoma cells producing a monoclonal antibody of the invention are detected by screening the hybridoma culture supernatants for antibodies that bind the polypeptide of interest, e.g., using a standard ELISA assay.

Alternative to preparing monoclonal antibody-secreting hybridomas, a monoclonal antibody directed against a protein of the invention can be identified and isolated by screening a recombinant combinatorial immunoglobulin library (e.g., an antibody phage display library) with the polypeptide of interest. Kits for generating and screening phage display libraries are commercially available (e.g., the Pharmacia Recombinant Phage Antibody System, Catalog No. 27-9400-01; and the Stratagene SurfZAP Phage Display Kit, Catalog No. 240612). Additionally, examples of methods and reagents particularly amenable for use in generating and screening antibody display library can be found in, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,223,409; PCT Publication No. WO 92/18619; PCT Publication No. WO 91/17271; PCT Publication No. WO 92/20791; PCT Publication No. WO 92/15679; PCT Publication No. WO 93/01288; PCT Publication No. WO 92/01047; PCT Publication No. WO 92/09690; PCT Publication No. WO 90/02809; Fuchs et al. (1991) Bio/Technology 9:1370-1372; Hay et al. (1992) Hum. Antibod. Hybridomas 3:81-85; Huse et al. (1989) Science 246:1275-1281; Griffiths et al. (1993) EMBO J. 12:725-734.

The invention also provides recombinant antibodies that specifically bind a protein of the invention. In preferred embodiments, the recombinant antibodies specifically binds a marker protein or fragment thereof. Recombinant antibodies include, but are not limited to, chimeric and humanized monoclonal antibodies, comprising both human and non-human portions, single-chain antibodies and multi-specific antibodies. A chimeric antibody is a molecule in which different portions are derived from different animal species, such as those having a variable region derived from a murine mAb and a human immunoglobulin constant region. (See, e.g., Cabilly et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,816,567; and Boss et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,816,397, which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.) Single-chain antibodies have an antigen binding site and consist of a single polypeptide. They can be produced by techniques known in the art, for example using methods described in Ladner et. al U.S. Pat. No. 4,946,778 (which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety); Bird et al., (1988) Science 242:423-426; Whitlow et al., (1991) Methods in Enzymology 2:1-9; Whitlow et al., (1991) Methods in Enzymology 2:97-105; and Huston et al., (1991) Methods in Enzymology Molecular Design and Modeling: Concepts and Applications 203:46-88. Multi-specific antibodies are antibody molecules having at least two antigen-binding sites that specifically bind different antigens. Such molecules can be produced by techniques known in the art, for example using methods described in Segal, U.S. Pat. No. 4,676,980 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety); Holliger et al., (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:6444-6448; Whitlow et al., (1994) Protein Eng. 7:1017-1026 and U.S. Pat. No. 6,121,424.

Humanized antibodies are antibody molecules from non-human species having one or more complementarity determining regions (CDRs) from the non-human species and a framework region from a human immunoglobulin molecule. (See, e.g., Queen, U.S. Pat. No. 5,585,089, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.) Humanized monoclonal antibodies can be produced by recombinant DNA techniques known in the art, for example using methods described in PCT Publication No. WO 87/02671; European Patent Application 184,187; European Patent Application 171,496; European Patent Application 173,494; PCT Publication No. WO 86/01533; U.S. Pat. No. 4,816,567; European Patent Application 125,023; Better et al. (1988) Science 240:1041-1043; Liu et al. (1987) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 84:3439-3443; Liu et al. (1987) J. Immunol. 139:3521-3526; Sun et al. (1987) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 84:214-218; Nishimura et al. (1987) Cancer Res. 47:999-1005; Wood et al. (1985) Nature 314:446-449; and Shaw et al. (1988) J. Natl. Cancer Inst. 80:1553-1559); Morrison (1985) Science 229:1202-1207; Oi et al. (1986) Bio/Techniques 4:214; U.S. Pat. No. 5,225,539; Jones et al. (1986) Nature 321:552-525; Verhoeyan et al. (1988) Science 239:1534; and Beidler et al. (1988) J. Immunol. 141:4053-4060.

More particularly, humanized antibodies can be produced, for example, using transgenic mice which are incapable of expressing endogenous immunoglobulin heavy and light chains genes, but which can express human heavy and light chain genes. The transgenic mice are immunized in the normal fashion with a selected antigen, e.g., all or a portion of a polypeptide corresponding to a marker of the invention. Monoclonal antibodies directed against the antigen can be obtained using conventional hybridoma technology. The human immunoglobulin transgenes harbored by the transgenic mice rearrange during B cell differentiation, and subsequently undergo class switching and somatic mutation. Thus, using such a technique, it is possible to produce therapeutically useful IgG, IgA and IgE antibodies. For an overview of this technology for producing human antibodies, see Lonberg and Huszar (1995) Int. Rev. Immunol. 13:65-93). For a detailed discussion of this technology for producing human antibodies and human monoclonal antibodies and protocols for producing such antibodies, see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,625,126; U.S. Pat. No. 5,633,425; U.S. Pat. No. 5,569,825; U.S. Pat. No. 5,661,016; and U.S. Pat. No. 5,545,806. In addition, companies such as Abgenix, Inc. (Freemont, Calif.), can be engaged to provide human antibodies directed against a selected antigen using technology similar to that described above.

Completely human antibodies which recognize a selected epitope can be generated using a technique referred to as “guided selection.” In this approach a selected non-human monoclonal antibody, e.g., a murine antibody, is used to guide the selection of a completely human antibody recognizing the same epitope (Jespers et al., 1994, Bio/technology 12:899-903).

The antibodies of the invention can be isolated after production (e.g., from the blood or serum of the subject) or synthesis and further purified by well-known techniques. For example, IgG antibodies can be purified using protein A chromatography. Antibodies specific for a protein of the invention can be selected or (e.g., partially purified) or purified by, e.g., affinity chromatography. For example, a recombinantly expressed and purified (or partially purified) protein of the invention is produced as described herein, and covalently or non-covalently coupled to a solid support such as, for example, a chromatography column. The column can then be used to affinity purify antibodies specific for the proteins of the invention from a sample containing antibodies directed against a large number of different epitopes, thereby generating a substantially purified antibody composition, i.e., one that is substantially free of contaminating antibodies. By a substantially purified antibody composition is meant, in this context, that the antibody sample contains at most only 30% (by dry weight) of contaminating antibodies directed against epitopes other than those of the desired protein of the invention, and preferably at most 20%, yet more preferably at most 10%, and most preferably at most 5% (by dry weight) of the sample is contaminating antibodies. A purified antibody composition means that at least 99% of the antibodies in the composition are directed against the desired protein of the invention.

In a preferred embodiment, the substantially purified antibodies of the invention may specifically bind to a signal peptide, a secreted sequence, an extracellular domain, a transmembrane or a cytoplasmic domain or cytoplasmic membrane of a protein of the invention. In a particularly preferred embodiment, the substantially purified antibodies of the invention specifically bind to a secreted sequence or an extracellular domain of the amino acid sequences of a protein of the invention. In a more preferred embodiment, the substantially purified antibodies of the invention specifically bind to a secreted sequence or an extracellular domain of the amino acid sequences of a marker protein.

An antibody directed against a protein of the invention can be used to isolate the protein by standard techniques, such as affinity chromatography or immunoprecipitation. Moreover, such an antibody can be used to detect the marker protein or fragment thereof (e.g., in a cellular lysate or cell supernatant) in order to evaluate the level and pattern of expression of the marker. The antibodies can also be used diagnostically to monitor protein levels in tissues or body fluids (e.g. in a metabolic disorder-associated body fluid) as part of a clinical testing procedure, e.g., to, for example, determine the efficacy of a given treatment regimen. Detection can be facilitated by the use of an antibody derivative, which comprises an antibody of the invention coupled to a detectable substance. Examples of detectable substances include various enzymes, prosthetic groups, fluorescent materials, luminescent materials, bioluminescent materials, and radioactive materials. Examples of suitable enzymes include horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, β-galactosidase, or acetylcholinesterase; examples of suitable prosthetic group complexes include streptavidin/biotin and avidin/biotin; examples of suitable fluorescent materials include umbelliferone, fluorescein, fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, dichlorotriazinylamine fluorescein, dansyl chloride or phycoerythrin; an example of a luminescent material includes luminol; examples of bioluminescent materials include luciferase, luciferin, and aequorin, and examples of suitable radioactive material include ¹²⁵I, ¹³¹I, ³⁵S or ³H.

Antibodies of the invention may also be used as therapeutic agents in treating metabolic disorders. In a preferred embodiment, completely human antibodies of the invention are used for therapeutic treatment of human patients with metabolic disorders, particularly those having diabetes or obesity. In another preferred embodiment, antibodies that bind specifically to a marker protein or fragment thereof are used for therapeutic treatment. Further, such therapeutic antibody may be an antibody derivative or immunotoxin comprising an antibody conjugated to a therapeutic moiety such as a cytotoxin, a therapeutic agent or a radioactive metal ion. A cytotoxin or cytotoxic agent includes any agent that is detrimental to cells. Examples include taxol, cytochalasin B, gramicidin D, ethidium bromide, emetine, mitomycin, etoposide, tenoposide, vincristine, vinblastine, colchicin, doxorubicin, daunorubicin, dihydroxy anthracin dione, mitoxantrone, mithramycin, actinomycin D, 1-dehydrotestosterone, glucocorticoids, procaine, tetracaine, lidocaine, propranolol, and puromycin and analogs or homologs thereof. Therapeutic agents include, but are not limited to, antimetabolites (e.g., methotrexate, 6-mercaptopurine, 6-thioguanine, cytarabine, 5-fluorouracil decarbazine), alkylating agents (e.g., mechlorethamine, thioepa chlorambucil, melphalan, carmustine (BSNU) and lomustine (CCNU), cyclothosphamide, busulfan, dibromomannitol, streptozotocin, mitomycin C, and cis-dichlorodiamine platinum (II) (DDP) cisplatin), anthracyclines (e.g., daunorubicin (formerly daunomycin) and doxorubicin), antibiotics (e.g., dactinomycin (formerly actinomycin), bleomycin, mithramycin, and anthramycin (AMC)), and anti-mitotic agents (e.g., vincristine and vinblastine).

The conjugated antibodies of the invention can be used for modifying a given biological response, for the drug moiety is not to be construed as limited to classical chemical therapeutic agents. For example, the drug moiety may be a protein or polypeptide possessing a desired biological activity. Such proteins may include, for example, a toxin such as ribosome-inhibiting protein (see Better et al., U.S. Pat. No. 6,146,631, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein in its entirety), abrin, ricin A, pseudomonas exotoxin, or diphtheria toxin; a protein such as tumor necrosis factor, .alpha.-interferon, β-interferon, nerve growth factor, platelet derived growth factor, tissue plasminogen activator; or, biological response modifiers such as, for example, lymphokines, interleukin-1 (“IL-1”), interleukin-2 (“IL-2”), interleukin-6 (“IL-6”), granulocyte macrophase colony stimulating factor (“GM-CSF”), granulocyte colony stimulating factor (“G-CSF”), or other growth factors.

Techniques for conjugating such therapeutic moiety to antibodies are well known, see, e.g., Arnon et al., “Monoclonal Antibodies For Immunotargeting Of Drugs In Cancer Therapy”, in Monoclonal Antibodies And Cancer Therapy, Reisfeld et al. (eds.), pp. 243-56 (Alan R. Liss, Inc. 1985); Hellstrom et al., “Antibodies For Drug Delivery”, in Controlled Drug Delivery (2nd Ed.), Robinson et al. (eds.), pp. 623-53 (Marcel Dekker, Inc. 1987); Thorpe, “Antibody Carriers Of Cytotoxic Agents In Cancer Therapy: A Review”, in Monoclonal Antibodies '84: Biological And Clinical Applications, Pinchera et al. (eds.), pp. 475-506 (1985); “Analysis, Results, And Future Prospective Of The Therapeutic Use Of Radiolabeled Antibody In Cancer Therapy”, in Monoclonal Antibodies For Cancer Detection And Therapy, Baldwin et al. (eds.), pp. 303-16 (Academic Press 1985), and Thorpe et al., “The Preparation And Cytotoxic Properties Of Antibody-Toxin Conjugates”, Immunol. Rev., 62:119-58 (1982).

Accordingly, in one aspect, the invention provides substantially purified antibodies, antibody fragments and derivatives, all of which specifically bind to a protein of the invention and preferably, a marker protein. In various embodiments, the substantially purified antibodies of the invention, or fragments or derivatives thereof, can be human, non-human, chimeric and/or humanized antibodies. In another aspect, the invention provides non-human antibodies, antibody fragments and derivatives, all of which specifically bind to a protein of the invention and preferably, a marker protein. Such non-human antibodies can be goat, mouse, sheep, horse, chicken, rabbit, or rat antibodies. Alternatively, the non-human antibodies of the invention can be chimeric and/or humanized antibodies. In addition, the non-human antibodies of the invention can be polyclonal antibodies or monoclonal antibodies. In still a further aspect, the invention provides monoclonal antibodies, antibody fragments and derivatives, all of which specifically bind to a protein of the invention and preferably, a marker protein. The monoclonal antibodies can be human, humanized, chimeric and/or non-human antibodies.

The invention also provides a kit containing an antibody of the invention conjugated to a detectable substance, and instructions for use. Still another aspect of the invention is a pharmaceutical composition comprising an antibody of the invention. In one embodiment, the pharmaceutical composition comprises an antibody of the invention and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.

3. Predictive Medicine

The present invention pertains to the field of predictive medicine in which diagnostic assays, prognostic assays, pharmacogenomics, and monitoring clinical trails are used for prognostic (predictive) purposes to thereby treat an individual prophylactically. Accordingly, one aspect of the present invention relates to diagnostic assays for determining the level of expression of one or more marker proteins or nucleic acids, in order to determine whether an individual is at risk of developing a metabolic disorder. Such assays can be used for prognostic or predictive purposes to thereby prophylactically treat an individual prior to the onset of the disorder.

Yet another aspect of the invention pertains to monitoring the influence of agents (e.g., drugs or other compounds administered either to inhibit a metabolic disorder or to treat or prevent any other disorder {i.e. in order to understand any carcinogenic effects that such treatment may have)} on the expression or activity of a marker of the invention in clinical trials. These and other agents are described in further detail in the following sections.

A. Diagnostic Assays

An exemplary method for detecting the presence or absence of a marker protein or nucleic acid in a biological sample involves obtaining a biological sample (e.g. a metabolic disorder-associated body fluid) from a test subject and contacting the biological sample with a compound or an agent capable of detecting the polypeptide or nucleic acid (e.g., mRNA, genomic DNA, or cDNA). The detection methods of the invention can thus be used to detect mRNA, protein, cDNA, or genomic DNA, for example, in a biological sample in vitro as well as in vivo. For example, in vitro techniques for detection of mRNA include Northern hybridizations and in situ hybridizations. In vitro techniques for detection of a marker protein include enzyme linked immunosorbent assays (ELISAs), Western blots, immunoprecipitations and immunofluorescence. In vitro techniques for detection of genomic DNA include Southern hybridizations. In vivo techniques for detection of mRNA include polymerase chain reaction (PCR), Northern hybridizations and in situ hybridizations. Furthermore, in vivo techniques for detection of a marker protein include introducing into a subject a labeled antibody directed against the protein or fragment thereof. For example, the antibody can be labeled with a radioactive marker whose presence and location in a subject can be detected by standard imaging techniques.

A general principle of such diagnostic and prognostic assays involves preparing a sample or reaction mixture that may contain a marker, and a probe, under appropriate conditions and for a time sufficient to allow the marker and probe to interact and bind, thus forming a complex that can be removed and/or detected in the reaction mixture. These assays can be conducted in a variety of ways.

For example, one method to conduct such an assay would involve anchoring the marker or probe onto a solid phase support, also referred to as a substrate, and detecting target marker/probe complexes anchored on the solid phase at the end of the reaction. In one embodiment of such a method, a sample from a subject, which is to be assayed for presence and/or concentration of marker, can be anchored onto a carrier or solid phase support. In another embodiment, the reverse situation is possible, in which the probe can be anchored to a solid phase and a sample from a subject can be allowed to react as an unanchored component of the assay.

There are many established methods for anchoring assay components to a solid phase. These include, without limitation, marker or probe molecules which are immobilized through conjugation of biotin and streptavidin. Such biotinylated assay components can be prepared from biotin-NHS (N-hydroxy-succinimide) using techniques known in the art (e.g., biotinylation kit, Pierce Chemicals, Rockford, Ill.), and immobilized in the wells of streptavidin-coated 96 well plates (Pierce Chemical). In certain embodiments, the surfaces with immobilized assay components can be prepared in advance and stored.

Other suitable carriers or solid phase supports for such assays include any material capable of binding the class of molecule to which the marker or probe belongs. Well-known supports or carriers include, but are not limited to, glass, polystyrene, nylon, polypropylene, nylon, polyethylene, dextran, amylases, natural and modified celluloses, polyacrylamides, gabbros, and magnetite.

In order to conduct assays with the above mentioned approaches, the non-immobilized component is added to the solid phase upon which the second component is anchored. After the reaction is complete, uncomplexed components may be removed (e.g., by washing) under conditions such that any complexes formed will remain immobilized upon the solid phase. The detection of marker/probe complexes anchored to the solid phase can be accomplished in a number of methods outlined herein.

In a preferred embodiment, the probe, when it is the unanchored assay component, can be labeled for the purpose of detection and readout of the assay, either directly or indirectly, with detectable labels discussed herein and which are well-known to one skilled in the art.

It is also possible to directly detect marker/probe complex formation without further manipulation or labeling of either component (marker or probe), for example by utilizing the technique of fluorescence energy transfer (see, for example, Lakowicz et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,631,169; Stavrianopoulos, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,868,103). A fluorophore label on the first, ‘donor’ molecule is selected such that, upon excitation with incident light of appropriate wavelength, its emitted fluorescent energy will be absorbed by a fluorescent label on a second ‘acceptor’ molecule, which in turn is able to fluoresce due to the absorbed energy. Alternately, the ‘donor’ protein molecule may simply utilize the natural fluorescent energy of tryptophan residues. Labels are chosen that emit different wavelengths of light, such that the ‘acceptor’ molecule label may be differentiated from that of the ‘donor’. Since the efficiency of energy transfer between the labels is related to the distance separating the molecules, spatial relationships between the molecules can be assessed. In a situation in which binding occurs between the molecules, the fluorescent emission of the ‘acceptor’ molecule label in the assay should be maximal. An FET binding event can be conveniently measured through standard fluorometric detection means well known in the art (e.g., using a fluorimeter).

In another embodiment, determination of the ability of a probe to recognize a marker can be accomplished without labeling either assay component (probe or marker) by utilizing a technology such as real-time Biomolecular Interaction Analysis (BIA) (see, e.g., Sjolander, S. and Urbaniczky, C., 1991, Anal. Chem. 63:2338-2345 and Szabo et al., 1995, Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol. 5:699-705). As used herein, “BIA” or “surface plasmon resonance” is a technology for studying biospecific interactions in real time, without labeling any of the interactants (e.g., BIAcore). Changes in the mass at the binding surface (indicative of a binding event) result in alterations of the refractive index of light near the surface (the optical phenomenon of surface plasmon resonance (SPR)), resulting in a detectable signal which can be used as an indication of real-time reactions between biological molecules.

Alternatively, in another embodiment, analogous diagnostic and prognostic assays can be conducted with marker and probe as solutes in a liquid phase. In such an assay, the complexed marker and probe are separated from uncomplexed components by any of a number of standard techniques, including but not limited to: differential centrifugation, chromatography, electrophoresis and immunoprecipitation. In differential centrifugation, marker/probe complexes may be separated from uncomplexed assay components through a series of centrifugal steps, due to the different sedimentation equilibria of complexes based on their different sizes and densities (see, for example, Rivas, G., and Minton, A. P., 1993, Trends Biochem Sci. 18(8):284-7). Standard chromatographic techniques may also be utilized to separate complexed molecules from uncomplexed ones. For example, gel filtration chromatography separates molecules based on size, and through the utilization of an appropriate gel filtration resin in a column format, for example, the relatively larger complex may be separated from the relatively smaller uncomplexed components. Similarly, the relatively different charge properties of the marker/probe complex as compared to the uncomplexed components may be exploited to differentiate the complex from uncomplexed components, for example through the utilization of ion-exchange chromatography resins. Such resins and chromatographic techniques are well known to one skilled in the art (see, e.g., Heegaard, N. H., 1998, J. Mol. Recognit. Winter 11(1-6):141-8; Hage, D. S., and Tweed, S. A. J Chromatogr B Biomed Sci Appl 1997 Oct. 10; 699(1-2):499-525). Gel electrophoresis may also be employed to separate complexed assay components from unbound components (see, e.g., Ausubel et al., ed., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1987-1999). In this technique, protein or nucleic acid complexes are separated based on size or charge, for example. In order to maintain the binding interaction during the electrophoretic process, non-denaturing gel matrix materials and conditions in the absence of reducing agent are typically preferred. Appropriate conditions to the particular assay and components thereof will be well known to one skilled in the art.

In a particular embodiment, the level of marker mRNA can be determined both by in situ and by in vitro formats in a biological sample using methods known in the art. The term “biological sample” is intended to include tissues, cells, biological fluids and isolates thereof, isolated from a subject, as well as tissues, cells and fluids present within a subject. Many expression detection methods use isolated RNA. For in vitro methods, any RNA isolation technique that does not select against the isolation of mRNA can be utilized for the purification of RNA from metabolic disorder cells (see, e.g., Ausubel et al., ed., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, New York 1987-1999). Additionally, large numbers of tissue samples can readily be processed using techniques well known to those of skill in the art, such as, for example, the single-step RNA isolation process of Chomczynski (1989, U.S. Pat. No. 4,843,155).

The isolated mRNA can be used in hybridization or amplification assays that include, but are not limited to, Southern or Northern analyses, polymerase chain reaction analyses and probe arrays. One preferred diagnostic method for the detection of mRNA levels involves contacting the isolated mRNA with a nucleic acid molecule (probe) that can hybridize to the mRNA encoded by the gene being detected. The nucleic acid probe can be, for example, a full-length cDNA, or a portion thereof, such as an oligonucleotide of at least 7, 15, 30, 50, 100, 250 or 500 nucleotides in length and sufficient to specifically hybridize under stringent conditions to a mRNA or genomic DNA encoding a marker of the present invention. Other suitable probes for use in the diagnostic assays of the invention are described herein. Hybridization of an mRNA with the probe indicates that the marker in question is being expressed.

In one format, the mRNA is immobilized on a solid surface and contacted with a probe, for example by running the isolated mRNA on an agarose gel and transferring the mRNA from the gel to a membrane, such as nitrocellulose. In an alternative format, the probe(s) are immobilized on a solid surface and the mRNA is contacted with the probe(s), for example, in an Affymetrix gene chip array. A skilled artisan can readily adapt known mRNA detection methods for use in detecting the level of mRNA encoded by the markers of the present invention.

An alternative method for determining the level of mRNA marker in a sample involves the process of nucleic acid amplification, e.g., by RT-PCR (the experimental embodiment set forth in Mullis, 1987, U.S. Pat. No. 4,683,202), ligase chain reaction (Barany, 1991, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 88:189-193), self sustained sequence replication (Guatelli et al., 1990, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87:1874-1878), transcriptional amplification system (Kwoh et al., 1989, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:1173-1177), Q-Beta Replicase (Lizardi et al., 1988, Bio/Technology 6:1197), rolling circle replication (Lizardi et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,854,033) or any other nucleic acid amplification method, followed by the detection of the amplified molecules using techniques well known to those of skill in the art. These detection schemes are especially useful for the detection of nucleic acid molecules if such molecules are present in very low numbers. As used herein, amplification primers are defined as being a pair of nucleic acid molecules that can anneal to 5′ or 3′ regions of a gene (plus and minus strands, respectively, or vice-versa) and contain a short region in between. In general, amplification primers are from about 10 to 30 nucleotides in length and flank a region from about 50 to 200 nucleotides in length. Under appropriate conditions and with appropriate reagents, such primers permit the amplification of a nucleic acid molecule comprising the nucleotide sequence flanked by the primers.

For in situ methods, mRNA does not need to be isolated from the cells prior to detection. In such methods, a cell or tissue sample is prepared/processed using known histological methods. The sample is then immobilized on a support, typically a glass slide, and then contacted with a probe that can hybridize to mRNA that encodes the marker.

As an alternative to making determinations based on the absolute expression level of the marker, determinations may be based on the normalized expression level of the marker. Expression levels are normalized by correcting the absolute expression level of a marker by comparing its expression to the expression of a gene that is not a marker, e.g., a housekeeping gene that is constitutively expressed. Suitable genes for normalization include housekeeping genes such as the actin gene, or epithelial cell-specific genes. This normalization allows the comparison of the expression level in one sample, e.g., a patient sample, to another sample, e.g., a non-metabolic disorder sample, or between samples from different sources.

Alternatively, the expression level can be provided as a relative expression level. To determine a relative expression level of a marker, the level of expression of the marker is determined for 10 or more samples of normal versus metabolic disorder isolates, preferably 50 or more samples, prior to the determination of the expression level for the sample in question. The mean expression level of each of the genes assayed in the larger number of samples is determined and this is used as a baseline expression level for the marker. The expression level of the marker determined for the test sample (absolute level of expression) is then divided by the mean expression value obtained for that marker. This provides a relative expression level.

Preferably, the samples used in the baseline determination will be from tissues associated with a metabolic disorder. The choice of the cell source is dependent on the use of the relative expression level. Using expression found in normal tissues as a mean expression score aids in validating whether the marker assayed is metabolic disorder specific (versus normal cells). In addition, as more data is accumulated, the mean expression value can be revised, providing improved relative expression values based on accumulated data.

In another embodiment of the present invention, a marker protein is detected. A preferred agent for detecting marker protein of the invention is an antibody capable of binding to such a protein or a fragment thereof, preferably an antibody with a detectable label. Antibodies can be polyclonal, or more preferably, monoclonal. An intact antibody, or a fragment or derivative thereof (e.g., Fab or F(ab′)₂) can be used. The term “labeled”, with regard to the probe or antibody, is intended to encompass direct labeling of the probe or antibody by coupling (i.e., physically linking) a detectable substance to the probe or antibody, as well as indirect labeling of the probe or antibody by reactivity with another reagent that is directly labeled. Examples of indirect labeling include detection of a primary antibody using a fluorescently labeled secondary antibody and end-labeling of a DNA probe with biotin such that it can be detected with fluorescently labeled streptavidin.

Proteins from cells can be isolated using techniques that are well known to those of skill in the art. The protein isolation methods employed can, for example, be such as those described in Harlow and Lane (Harlow and Lane, 1988, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y.).

A variety of formats can be employed to determine whether a sample contains a protein that binds to a given antibody. Examples of such formats include, but are not limited to, enzyme immunoassay (EIA), radioimmunoassay (RIA), Western blot analysis and enzyme linked immunoabsorbant assay (ELISA). A skilled artisan can readily adapt known protein/antibody detection methods for use in determining whether cells express a marker of the present invention.

In one format, antibodies, or antibody fragments or derivatives, can be used in methods such as Western blots or immunofluorescence techniques to detect the expressed proteins. In such uses, it is generally preferable to immobilize either the antibody or proteins on a solid support. Suitable solid phase supports or carriers include any support capable of binding an antigen or an antibody. Well-known supports or carriers include glass, polystyrene, polypropylene, polyethylene, dextran, nylon, amylases, natural and modified celluloses, polyacrylamides, gabbros, and magnetite.

One skilled in the art will know many other suitable carriers for binding antibody or antigen, and will be able to adapt such support for use with the present invention. For example, protein isolated from metabolic disorder cells can be run on a polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis and immobilized onto a solid phase support such as nitrocellulose. The support can then be washed with suitable buffers followed by treatment with the detectably labeled antibody. The solid phase support can then be washed with the buffer a second time to remove unbound antibody. The amount of bound label on the solid support can then be detected by conventional means.

The invention also encompasses kits for detecting the presence of a marker protein or nucleic acid in a biological sample. Such kits can be used to determine if a subject is suffering from or is at increased risk of developing a metabolic disorder such as diabetes or obesity. For example, the kit can comprise a labeled compound or agent capable of detecting a marker protein or nucleic acid in a biological sample and means for determining the amount of the protein or mRNA in the sample (e.g., an antibody which binds the protein or a fragment thereof, or an oligonucleotide probe which binds to DNA or mRNA encoding the protein). Kits can also include instructions for interpreting the results obtained using the kit.

For antibody-based kits, the kit can comprise, for example: (1) a first antibody (e.g., attached to a solid support) which binds to a marker protein; and, optionally, (2) a second, different antibody which binds to either the protein or the first antibody and is conjugated to a detectable label.

For oligonucleotide-based kits, the kit can comprise, for example: (1) an oligonucleotide, e.g., a detectably labeled oligonucleotide, which hybridizes to a nucleic acid sequence encoding a marker protein or (2) a pair of primers useful for amplifying a marker nucleic acid molecule. The kit can also comprise, e.g., a buffering agent, a preservative, or a protein stabilizing agent. The kit can further comprise components necessary for detecting the detectable label (e.g., an enzyme or a substrate). The kit can also contain a control sample or a series of control samples which can be assayed and compared to the test sample. Each component of the kit can be enclosed within an individual container and all of the various containers can be within a single package, along with instructions for interpreting the results of the assays performed using the kit.

B. Pharmacogenomics

The markers of the invention are also useful as pharmacogenomic markers. As used herein, a “pharmacogenomic marker” is an objective biochemical marker whose expression level correlates with a specific clinical drug response or susceptibility in a patient (see, e.g., McLeod et al. (1999) Eur. J. Cancer 35(12): 1650-1652). The presence or quantity of the pharmacogenomic marker expression is related to the predicted response of the patient and more particularly the patient's metabolic disorder to therapy with a specific drug or class of drugs. By assessing the presence or quantity of the expression of one or more pharmacogenomic markers in a patient, a drug therapy which is most appropriate for the patient, or which is predicted to have a greater degree of success, may be selected. For example, based on the presence or quantity of RNA or protein encoded by specific markers in a patient, a drug or course of treatment may be selected that is optimized for the treatment of the specific metabolic disorder likely to be present in the patient. The use of pharmacogenomic markers therefore permits selecting or designing the most appropriate treatment for each metabolic disorder patient without trying different drugs or regimes.

Another aspect of pharmacogenomics deals with genetic conditions that alters the way the body acts on drugs. These pharmacogenetic conditions can occur either as rare defects or as polymorphisms. For example, glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase (G6PD) deficiency is a common inherited enzymopathy in which the main clinical complication is hemolysis after ingestion of oxidant drugs (anti-malarials, sulfonamides, analgesics, nitrofurans) and consumption of fava beans.

As an illustrative embodiment, the activity of drug metabolizing enzymes is a major determinant of both the intensity and duration of drug action. The discovery of genetic polymorphisms of drug metabolizing enzymes (e.g., N-acetyltransferase 2 (NAT 2) and cytochrome P450 enzymes CYP2D6 and CYP2C19) has provided an explanation as to why some patients do not obtain the expected drug effects or show exaggerated drug response and serious toxicity after taking the standard and safe dose of a drug. These polymorphisms are expressed in two phenotypes in the population, the extensive metabolizer (EM) and poor metabolizer (PM). The prevalence of PM is different among different populations. For example, the gene coding for CYP2D6 is highly polymorphic and several mutations have been identified in PM, which all lead to the absence of functional CYP2D6. Poor metabolizers of CYP2D6 and CYP2C19 quite frequently experience exaggerated drug response and side effects when they receive standard doses. If a metabolite is the active therapeutic moiety, a PM will show no therapeutic response, as demonstrated for the analgesic effect of codeine mediated by its CYP2D6-formed metabolite morphine. The other extreme are the so called ultra-rapid metabolizers who do not respond to standard doses. Recently, the molecular basis of ultra-rapid metabolism has been identified to be due to CYP2D6 gene amplification.

Thus, the level of expression of a marker of the invention in an individual can be determined to thereby select appropriate agent(s) for therapeutic or prophylactic treatment of the individual. In addition, pharmacogenetic studies can be used to apply genotyping of polymorphic alleles encoding drug-metabolizing enzymes to the identification of an individual's drug responsiveness phenotype. This knowledge, when applied to dosing or drug selection, can avoid adverse reactions or therapeutic failure and thus enhance therapeutic or prophylactic efficiency when treating a subject with a modulator of expression of a marker of the invention.

C. Monitoring Clinical Trials

Monitoring the influence of agents (e.g., drug compounds) on the level of expression of a marker of the invention can be applied not only in basic drug screening, but also in clinical trials. For example, the effectiveness of an agent to affect marker expression can be monitored in clinical trials of subjects receiving treatment for a metabolic disorder. In a preferred embodiment, the present invention provides a method for monitoring the effectiveness of treatment of a subject with an agent (e.g., an agonist, antagonist, peptidomimetic, protein, peptide, nucleic acid, small molecule, or other drug candidate) comprising the steps of (i) obtaining a pre-administration sample from a subject prior to administration of the agent; (ii) detecting the level of expression of one or more selected markers of the invention in the pre-administration sample; (iii) obtaining one or more post-administration samples from the subject; (iv) detecting the level of expression of the marker(s) in the post-administration samples; (v) comparing the level of expression of the marker(s) in the pre-administration sample with the level of expression of the marker(s) in the post-administration sample or samples; and (vi) altering the administration of the agent to the subject accordingly. For example, increased expression of the marker gene(s) during the course of treatment may indicate ineffective dosage and the desirability of increasing the dosage. Conversely, decreased expression of the marker gene(s) may indicate efficacious treatment and no need to change dosage.

D. Arrays

The invention also includes an array comprising a marker of the present invention. The array can be used to assay expression of one or more genes in the array. In one embodiment, the array can be used to assay gene expression in a tissue to ascertain tissue specificity of genes in the array. In this manner, up to about 7600 genes can be simultaneously assayed for expression. This allows a profile to be developed showing a battery of genes specifically expressed in one or more tissues.

In addition to such qualitative determination, the invention allows the quantitation of gene expression. Thus, not only tissue specificity, but also the level of expression of a battery of genes in the tissue is ascertainable. Thus, genes can be grouped on the basis of their tissue expression per se and level of expression in that tissue. This is useful, for example, in ascertaining the relationship of gene expression between or among tissues. Thus, one tissue can be perturbed and the effect on gene expression in a second tissue can be determined. In this context, the effect of one cell type on another cell type in response to a biological stimulus can be determined. Such a determination is useful, for example, to know the effect of cell-cell interaction at the level of gene expression. If an agent is administered therapeutically to treat one cell type but has an undesirable effect on another cell type, the invention provides an assay to determine the molecular basis of the undesirable effect and thus provides the opportunity to co-administer a counteracting agent or otherwise treat the undesired effect. Similarly, even within a single cell type, undesirable biological effects can be determined at the molecular level. Thus, the effects of an agent on expression of other than the target gene can be ascertained and counteracted.

In another embodiment, the array can be used to monitor the time course of expression of one or more genes in the array. This can occur in various biological contexts, as disclosed herein, for example development of a metabolic disorder, progression of a metabolic disorder, and processes, such a cellular transformation associated with a metabolic disorder.

The array is also useful for ascertaining the effect of the expression of a gene on the expression of other genes in the same cell or in different cells. This provides, for example, for a selection of alternate molecular targets for therapeutic intervention if the ultimate or downstream target cannot be regulated.

The array is also useful for ascertaining differential expression patterns of one or more genes in normal and abnormal cells. This provides a battery of genes that could serve as a molecular target for diagnosis or therapeutic intervention.

VI. Methods for Obtaining Samples

Samples useful in the methods of the invention include any tissue, cell, biopsy, or bodily fluid sample that expresses a marker of the invention. In one embodiment, a sample may be a tissue, a cell, whole blood, serum, plasma, buccal scrape, saliva, cerebrospinal fluid, urine, stool, or bronchoalveolar lavage. In preferred embodiments, the tissue sample is a metabolic disorder sample, including a blood or urine sample.

Body samples may be obtained from a subject by a variety of techniques known in the art including, for example, by the use of a biopsy or by scraping or swabbing an area or by using a needle to aspirate bodily fluids. Methods for collecting various body samples are well known in the art.

Tissue samples suitable for detecting and quantitating a marker of the invention may be fresh, frozen, or fixed according to methods known to one of skill in the art. Suitable tissue samples are preferably sectioned and placed on a microscope slide for further analyses. Alternatively, solid samples, i.e., tissue samples, may be solubilized and/or homogenized and subsequently analyzed as soluble extracts.

In one embodiment, a freshly obtained tissue sample is frozen using, for example, liquid nitrogen or difluorodichloromethane. The frozen sample is mounted for sectioning using, for example, OCT, and serially sectioned in a cryostat. The serial sections are collected on a glass microscope slide. For immunohistochemical staining the slides may be coated with, for example, chrome-alum, gelatine or poly-L-lysine to ensure that the sections stick to the slides. In another embodiment, samples are fixed and embedded prior to sectioning. For example, a tissue sample may be fixed in, for example, formalin, serially dehydrated and embedded in, for example, paraffin.

Once the sample is obtained any method known in the art to be suitable for detecting and quantitating a marker of the invention may be used (either at the nucleic acid or at the protein level). Such methods are well known in the art and include but are not limited to western blots, northern blots, southern blots, immunohistochemistry, ELISA, e.g., amplified ELISA, immunoprecipitation, immunofluorescence, flow cytometry, immunocytochemistry, mass spectrometrometric analyses, e.g., MALDI-TOF and SELDI-TOF, nucleic acid hybridization techniques, nucleic acid reverse transcription methods, and nucleic acid amplification methods. In particular embodiments, the expression of a marker of the invention is detected on a protein level using, for example, antibodies that specifically bind these proteins.

Samples may need to be modified in order to make a marker of the invention accessible to antibody binding. In a particular aspect of the immunocytochemistry or immunohistochemistry methods, slides may be transferred to a pretreatment buffer and optionally heated to increase antigen accessibility. Heating of the sample in the pretreatment buffer rapidly disrupts the lipid bi-layer of the cells and makes the antigens (may be the case in fresh specimens, but not typically what occurs in fixed specimens) more accessible for antibody binding. The terms “pretreatment buffer” and “preparation buffer” are used interchangeably herein to refer to a buffer that is used to prepare cytology or histology samples for immunostaining, particularly by increasing the accessibility of a marker of the invention for antibody binding. The pretreatment buffer may comprise a pH-specific salt solution, a polymer, a detergent, or a nonionic or anionic surfactant such as, for example, an ethyloxylated anionic or nonionic surfactant, an alkanoate or an alkoxylate or even blends of these surfactants or even the use of a bile salt. The pretreatment buffer may, for example, be a solution of 0.1% to 1% of deoxycholic acid, sodium salt, or a solution of sodium laureth-13-carboxylate (e.g., Sandopan LS) or and ethoxylated anionic complex. In some embodiments, the pretreatment buffer may also be used as a slide storage buffer.

Any method for making marker proteins of the invention more accessible for antibody binding may be used in the practice of the invention, including the antigen retrieval methods known in the art. See, for example, Bibbo, et al. (2002) Acta. Cytol. 46:25-29; Saqi, et al. (2003) Diagn. Cytopathol. 27:365-370; Bibbo, et al. (2003) Anal. Quant. Cytol. Histol. 25:8-11, the entire contents of each of which are incorporated herein by reference.

Following pretreatment to increase marker protein accessibility, samples may be blocked using an appropriate blocking agent, e.g., a peroxidase blocking reagent such as hydrogen peroxide. In some embodiments, the samples may be blocked using a protein blocking reagent to prevent non-specific binding of the antibody. The protein blocking reagent may comprise, for example, purified casein. An antibody, particularly a monoclonal or polyclonal antibody that specifically binds to a marker of the invention is then incubated with the sample. One of skill in the art will appreciate that a more accurate prognosis or diagnosis may be obtained in some cases by detecting multiple epitopes on a marker protein of the invention in a patient sample. Therefore, in particular embodiments, at least two antibodies directed to different epitopes of a marker of the invention are used. Where more than one antibody is used, these antibodies may be added to a single sample sequentially as individual antibody reagents or simultaneously as an antibody cocktail. Alternatively, each individual antibody may be added to a separate sample from the same patient, and the resulting data pooled.

Techniques for detecting antibody binding are well known in the art. Antibody binding to a marker of the invention may be detected through the use of chemical reagents that generate a detectable signal that corresponds to the level of antibody binding and, accordingly, to the level of marker protein expression. In one of the immunohistochemistry or immunocytochemistry methods of the invention, antibody binding is detected through the use of a secondary antibody that is conjugated to a labeled polymer. Examples of labeled polymers include but are not limited to polymer-enzyme conjugates. The enzymes in these complexes are typically used to catalyze the deposition of a chromogen at the antigen-antibody binding site, thereby resulting in cell staining that corresponds to expression level of the biomarker of interest. Enzymes of particular interest include, but are not limited to, horseradish peroxidase (HRP) and alkaline phosphatase (AP).

In one particular immunohistochemistry or immunocytochemistry method of the invention, antibody binding to a marker of the invention is detected through the use of an HRP-labeled polymer that is conjugated to a secondary antibody. Antibody binding can also be detected through the use of a species-specific probe reagent, which binds to monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies, and a polymer conjugated to HRP, which binds to the species specific probe reagent. Slides are stained for antibody binding using any chromagen, e.g., the chromagen 3,3-diaminobenzidine (DAB), and then counterstained with hematoxylin and, optionally, a bluing agent such as ammonium hydroxide or TBS/Tween-20. Other suitable chromagens include, for example, 3-amino-9-ethylcarbazole (AEC). In some aspects of the invention, slides are reviewed microscopically by a cytotechnologist and/or a pathologist to assess cell staining, e.g., fluorescent staining (i.e., marker expression). Alternatively, samples may be reviewed via automated microscopy or by personnel with the assistance of computer software that facilitates the identification of positive staining cells.

Detection of antibody binding can be facilitated by coupling the anti-marker antibodies to a detectable substance. Examples of detectable substances include various enzymes, prosthetic groups, fluorescent materials, luminescent materials, bioluminescent materials, and radioactive materials. Examples of suitable enzymes include horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, β-galactosidase, or acetylcholinesterase; examples of suitable prosthetic group complexes include streptavidin/biotin and avidin/biotin; examples of suitable fluorescent materials include umbelliferone, fluorescein, fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, dichlorotriazinylamine fluorescein, dansyl chloride or phycoerythrin; an example of a luminescent material includes luminol; examples of bioluminescent materials include luciferase, luciferin, and aequorin; and examples of suitable radioactive material include ¹²⁵I, ¹³¹I, ³⁵S, ¹⁴C, or ³H.

In one embodiment of the invention frozen samples are prepared as described above and subsequently stained with antibodies against a marker of the invention diluted to an appropriate concentration using, for example, Tris-buffered saline (TBS). Primary antibodies can be detected by incubating the slides in biotinylated anti-immunoglobulin. This signal can optionally be amplified and visualized using diaminobenzidine precipitation of the antigen. Furthermore, slides can be optionally counterstained with, for example, hematoxylin, to visualize the cells.

In another embodiment, fixed and embedded samples are stained with antibodies against a marker of the invention and counterstained as described above for frozen sections. In addition, samples may be optionally treated with agents to amplify the signal in order to visualize antibody staining. For example, a peroxidase-catalyzed deposition of biotinyl-tyramide, which in turn is reacted with peroxidase-conjugated streptavidin (Catalyzed Signal Amplification (CSA) System, DAKO, Carpinteria, Calif.) may be used.

Tissue-based assays (i.e., immunohistochemistry) are the preferred methods of detecting and quantitating a marker of the invention. In one embodiment, the presence or absence of a marker of the invention may be determined by immunohistochemistry. In one embodiment, the immunohistochemical analysis uses low concentrations of an anti-marker antibody such that cells lacking the marker do not stain. In another embodiment, the presence or absence of a marker of the invention is determined using an immunohistochemical method that uses high concentrations of an anti-marker antibody such that cells lacking the marker protein stain heavily. Cells that do not stain contain either mutated marker and fail to produce antigenically recognizable marker protein, or are cells in which the pathways that regulate marker levels are dysregulated, resulting in steady state expression of negligible marker protein.

One of skill in the art will recognize that the concentration of a particular antibody used to practice the methods of the invention will vary depending on such factors as time for binding, level of specificity of the antibody for a marker of the invention, and method of sample preparation. Moreover, when multiple antibodies are used, the required concentration may be affected by the order in which the antibodies are applied to the sample, e.g., simultaneously as a cocktail or sequentially as individual antibody reagents. Furthermore, the detection chemistry used to visualize antibody binding to a marker of the invention must also be optimized to produce the desired signal to noise ratio.

In one embodiment of the invention, proteomic methods, e.g., mass spectrometry, are used for detecting and quantitating the marker proteins of the invention. For example, matrix-associated laser desorption/ionization time-of-flight mass spectrometry (MALDI-TOF MS) or surface-enhanced laser desorption/ionization time-of-flight mass spectrometry (SELDI-TOF MS) which involves the application of a biological sample, such as serum, to a protein-binding chip (Wright, G. L., Jr., et al. (2002) Expert Rev Mol Diagn 2:549; Li, J., et al. (2002) Clin Chem 48:1296; Laronga, C., et al. (2003) Dis Markers 19:229; Petricoin, E. F., et al. (2002) 359:572; Adam, B. L., et al. (2002) Cancer Res 62:3609; Tolson, J., et al. (2004) Lab Invest 84:845; Xiao, Z., et al. (2001) Cancer Res 61:6029) can be used to detect and quantitate the PY-Shc and/or p66-Shc proteins. Mass spectrometric methods are described in, for example, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,622,824, 5,605,798 and 5,547,835, the entire contents of each of which are incorporated herein by reference.

In other embodiments, the expression of a marker of the invention is detected at the nucleic acid level. Nucleic acid-based techniques for assessing expression are well known in the art and include, for example, determining the level of marker mRNA in a sample from a subject. Many expression detection methods use isolated RNA. Any RNA isolation technique that does not select against the isolation of mRNA can be utilized for the purification of RNA from cells that express a marker of the invention (see, e.g., Ausubel et al., ed., (1987-1999) Current Protocols in Molecular Biology (John Wiley & Sons, New York). Additionally, large numbers of tissue samples can readily be processed using techniques well known to those of skill in the art, such as, for example, the single-step RNA isolation process of Chomczynski (1989, U.S. Pat. No. 4,843,155).

The term “probe” refers to any molecule that is capable of selectively binding to a marker of the invention, for example, a nucleotide transcript and/or protein. Probes can be synthesized by one of skill in the art, or derived from appropriate biological preparations. Probes may be specifically designed to be labeled. Examples of molecules that can be utilized as probes include, but are not limited to, RNA, DNA, proteins, antibodies, and organic molecules.

Isolated mRNA can be used in hybridization or amplification assays that include, but are not limited to, Southern or Northern analyses, polymerase chain reaction analyses and probe arrays. One method for the detection of mRNA levels involves contacting the isolated mRNA with a nucleic acid molecule (probe) that can hybridize to the marker mRNA. The nucleic acid probe can be, for example, a full-length cDNA, or a portion thereof, such as an oligonucleotide of at least 7, 15, 30, 50, 100, 250 or 500 nucleotides in length and sufficient to specifically hybridize under stringent conditions to marker genomic DNA.

In one embodiment, the mRNA is immobilized on a solid surface and contacted with a probe, for example by running the isolated mRNA on an agarose gel and transferring the mRNA from the gel to a membrane, such as nitrocellulose. In an alternative embodiment, the probe(s) are immobilized on a solid surface and the mRNA is contacted with the probe(s), for example, in an Affymetrix gene chip array. A skilled artisan can readily adapt known mRNA detection methods for use in detecting the level of marker mRNA.

An alternative method for determining the level of marker mRNA in a sample involves the process of nucleic acid amplification, e.g., by RT-PCR (the experimental embodiment set forth in Mullis, 1987, U.S. Pat. No. 4,683,202), ligase chain reaction (Barany (1991) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 88:189-193), self sustained sequence replication (Guatelli et al. (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87:1874-1878), transcriptional amplification system (Kwoh et al. (1989) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:1173-1177), Q-Beta Replicase (Lizardi et al. (1988) Bio/Technology 6:1197), rolling circle replication (Lizardi et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,854,033) or any other nucleic acid amplification method, followed by the detection of the amplified molecules using techniques well known to those of skill in the art. These detection schemes are especially useful for the detection of nucleic acid molecules if such molecules are present in very low numbers. In particular aspects of the invention, marker expression is assessed by quantitative fluorogenic RT-PCR (i.e., the TaqMan™ System). Such methods typically utilize pairs of oligonucleotide primers that are specific for a marker of the invention. Methods for designing oligonucleotide primers specific for a known sequence are well known in the art.

The expression levels of a marker of the invention may be monitored using a membrane blot (such as used in hybridization analysis such as Northern, Southern, dot, and the like), or microwells, sample tubes, gels, beads or fibers (or any solid support comprising bound nucleic acids). See U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,770,722, 5,874,219, 5,744,305, 5,677,195 and 5,445,934, which are incorporated herein by reference. The detection of marker expression may also comprise using nucleic acid probes in solution.

In one embodiment of the invention, microarrays are used to detect the expression of a marker of the invention. Microarrays are particularly well suited for this purpose because of the reproducibility between different experiments. DNA microarrays provide one method for the simultaneous measurement of the expression levels of large numbers of genes. Each array consists of a reproducible pattern of capture probes attached to a solid support. Labeled RNA or DNA is hybridized to complementary probes on the array and then detected by laser scanning. Hybridization intensities for each probe on the array are determined and converted to a quantitative value representing relative gene expression levels. See, U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,040,138, 5,800,992 and 6,020,135, 6,033,860, and 6,344,316, which are incorporated herein by reference. High-density oligonucleotide arrays are particularly useful for determining the gene expression profile for a large number of RNA's in a sample.

The amounts of phosphorylated marker, and/or a mathematical relationship of the amounts of a marker of the invention may be used to calculate the survival of a subject being treated for a metabolic disorder, the efficacy of a treatment regimen for treating a metabolic disorder, and the like, using the methods of the invention, which may include methods of regression analysis known to one of skill in the art. For example, suitable regression models include, but are not limited to CART (e.g., Hill, T, and Lewicki, P. (2006) “STATISTICS Methods and Applications” StatSoft, Tulsa, Okla.), Cox (e.g., www.evidence-based-medicine.co.uk), exponential, normal and log normal (e.g., www.obgyn.cam.ac.uk/mrg/statsbook/stsurvan.html), logistic (e.g., www.en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Logistic_regression or http://faculty.chass.ncsu.edu/garson/PA765/logistic.htm), parametric, non-parametric, semi-parametric (e.g., www.socserv.mcmaster.ca/jfox/Books/Companion), linear (e.g., www.en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Linear_regression or http://www.curvefit.com/linear_regression.htm), or additive (e.g., www.en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Generalized_additive_model or http://support.sas.com/rnd/app/da/new/dagam.html).

In one embodiment, a regression analysis includes the amounts of phosphorylated marker. In another embodiment, a regression analysis includes a marker mathematical relationship. In yet another embodiment, a regression analysis of the amounts of phosphorylated marker, and/or a marker mathematical relationship may include additional clinical and/or molecular co-variates. Such clinical co-variates include, but are not limited to, treatment regime, clinical outcome (e.g., disease-specific survival, therapy failure), and/or clinical outcome as a function of time after diagnosis, time after initiation of therapy, and/or time after completion of treatment.

In another embodiment, the amounts of phosphorylated marker, and/or a mathematical relationship of the amounts of a marker may be used to calculate the survival of a subject being treated for a metabolic disorder, the efficacy of a treatment regimen for treating a metabolic disorder, and the like, using the methods of the invention, which may include methods of regression analysis known to one of skill in the art. For example, suitable regression models include, but are not limited to CART (e.g., Hill, T, and Lewicki, P. (2006) “STATISTICS Methods and Applications” StatSoft, Tulsa, Okla.), Cox (e.g., www.evidence-based-medicine.co.uk), exponential, normal and log normal (e.g., www.obgyn.cam.ac.uk/mrg/statsbook/stsurvan.html), logistic (e.g., www.en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Logistic_regression or http://faculty.chass.ncsu.edu/garson/PA765/logistic.htm), parametric, non-parametric, semi-parametric (e.g., www.socserv.mcmaster.ca/jfox/Books/Companion), linear (e.g., www.en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Linear_regression or http://www.curvefit.com/linear_regression.htm), or additive (e.g., www.en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Generalized_additive_model or http://support.sas.com/rnd/app/da/new/dagam.html).

In one embodiment, a regression analysis includes the amounts of phosphorylated marker. In another embodiment, a regression analysis includes a marker mathematical relationship. In yet another embodiment, a regression analysis of the amounts of phosphorylated marker, and/or a marker mathematical relationship may include additional clinical and/or molecular co-variates. Such clinical co-variates include, but are not limited to, treatment regime, clinical outcome (e.g., disease-specific survival, therapy failure), and/or clinical outcome as a function of time after diagnosis, time after initiation of therapy, and/or time after completion of treatment.

VII. Kits

The invention also provides compositions and kits for prognosing a metabolic disorder or survival of a subject being treated for a metabolic disorder. These kits include one or more of the following: a detectable antibody that specifically binds to a marker of the invention, a detectable antibody that specifically binds to a marker of the invention, reagents for obtaining and/or preparing subject tissue samples for staining, and instructions for use.

The kits of the invention may optionally comprise additional components useful for performing the methods of the invention. By way of example, the kits may comprise fluids (e.g., SSC buffer) suitable for annealing complementary nucleic acids or for binding an antibody with a protein with which it specifically binds, one or more sample compartments, an instructional material which describes performance of a method of the invention and tissue specific controls/standards.

VIII. Screening Assays

The invention also provides methods (also referred to herein as “screening assays”) for identifying modulators, i.e., candidate or test compounds or agents (e.g., proteins, peptides, peptidomimetics, peptoids, small molecules or other drugs), which modulate a metabolic disorder by modulating the expression and/or activity of a marker of the invention. Such assays typically comprise a reaction between a marker of the invention and one or more assay components. The other components may be either the test compound itself, or a combination of test compounds and a natural binding partner of a marker of the invention. Compounds identified via assays such as those described herein may be useful, for example, for modulating, e.g., inhibiting, ameliorating, treating, or preventing a metabolic disorder.

The test compounds used in the screening assays of the present invention may be obtained from any available source, including systematic libraries of natural and/or synthetic compounds. Test compounds may also be obtained by any of the numerous approaches in combinatorial library methods known in the art, including: biological libraries; peptoid libraries (libraries of molecules having the functionalities of peptides, but with a novel, non-peptide backbone which are resistant to enzymatic degradation but which nevertheless remain bioactive; see, e.g., Zuckermann et al., 1994, J. Med. Chem. 37:2678-85); spatially addressable parallel solid phase or solution phase libraries; synthetic library methods requiring deconvolution; the ‘one-bead one-compound’ library method; and synthetic library methods using affinity chromatography selection. The biological library and peptoid library approaches are limited to peptide libraries, while the other four approaches are applicable to peptide, non-peptide oligomer or small molecule libraries of compounds (Lam, 1997, Anticancer Drug Des. 12:145).

Examples of methods for the synthesis of molecular libraries can be found in the art, for example in: DeWitt et al. (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 90:6909; Erb et al. (1994) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91:11422; Zuckermann et al. (1994). J. Med. Chem. 37:2678; Cho et al. (1993) Science 261:1303; Carrell et al. (1994) Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl. 33:2059; Carell et al. (1994) Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl. 33:2061; and in Gallop et al. (1994) J. Med. Chem. 37:1233.

Libraries of compounds may be presented in solution (e.g., Houghten, 1992, Biotechniques 13:412-421), or on beads (Lam, 1991, Nature 354:82-84), chips (Fodor, 1993, Nature 364:555-556), bacteria and/or spores, (Ladner, U.S. Pat. No. 5,223,409), plasmids (Cull et al, 1992, Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 89:1865-1869) or on phage (Scott and Smith, 1990, Science 249:386-390; Devlin, 1990, Science 249:404-406; Cwirla et al, 1990, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 87:6378-6382; Felici, 1991, J. Mol. Biol. 222:301-310; Ladner, supra.).

The screening methods of the invention comprise contacting a biological sample from a subject with a test compound and determining the ability of the test compound to modulate the expression and/or activity of a marker of the invention in the sample. The expression and/or activity of a marker of the invention can be determined as described herein.

In another embodiment, the invention provides assays for screening candidate or test compounds which are substrates of a marker of the invention or biologically active portions thereof. In yet another embodiment, the invention provides assays for screening candidate or test compounds which bind to a marker of the invention or biologically active portions thereof. Determining the ability of the test compound to directly bind to a marker can be accomplished, for example, by coupling the compound with a radioisotope or enzymatic label such that binding of the compound to the marker can be determined by detecting the labeled marker compound in a complex. For example, compounds (e.g., marker substrates) can be labeled with ¹³¹I, ¹²⁵I, ³⁵S, ¹⁴C, or ³H, either directly or indirectly, and the radioisotope detected by direct counting of radioemission or by scintillation counting. Alternatively, assay components can be enzymatically labeled with, for example, horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, or luciferase, and the enzymatic label detected by determination of conversion of an appropriate substrate to product.

This invention further pertains to novel agents identified by the above-described screening assays. Accordingly, it is within the scope of this invention to further use an agent identified as described herein in an appropriate animal model. For example, an agent capable of modulating the expression and/or activity of a marker of the invention identified as described herein can be used in an animal model to determine the efficacy, toxicity, or side effects of treatment with such an agent. Alternatively, an agent identified as described herein can be used in an animal model to determine the mechanism of action of such an agent. Furthermore, this invention pertains to uses of novel agents identified by the above-described screening assays for treatment as described above.

This invention is further illustrated by the following examples which should not be construed as limiting. The contents of all references and published patents and patent applications cited throughout the application are hereby incorporated by reference.

EXEMPLIFICATION OF THE INVENTION

The invention now being generally described, it will be more readily understood by reference to the following examples, which are included merely for purposes of illustration of certain aspects and embodiments of the present invention, and are not intended to limit the invention, as one skilled in the art would recognize from the teachings hereinabove and the following examples, that other assays, cell types, agents, constructs, or data analysis methods, all without limitation, can be employed, without departing from the scope of the invention as claimed.

The contents of any patents, patent applications, patent publications, or scientific articles referenced anywhere in this application are herein incorporated in their entirety.

The practice of the present invention will employ, where appropriate and unless otherwise indicated, conventional techniques of cell biology, cell culture, molecular biology, transgenic biology, microbiology, virology, recombinant DNA, and immunology, which are within the skill of the art. Such techniques are described in the literature. See, for example, Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, 3rd Ed., ed. by Sambrook and Russell (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press: 2001); the treatise, Methods In Enzymology (Academic Press, Inc., N.Y.); Using Antibodies, Second Edition by Harlow and Lane, Cold Spring Harbor Press, New York, 1999; Current Protocols in Cell Biology, ed. by Bonifacino, Dasso, Lippincott-Schwartz, Harford, and Yamada, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, 1999; and PCR Protocols, ed. by Bartlett et al., Humana Press, 2003.

Example 1: Identification of CoQ10 as a MIM

In order to evaluate CoQ10 as a potential MIM, CoQ10 in oxidized form was exogenously added to a panel of cell lines, including both cancer cell lines and normal control cell lines, and the changes induced to the cellular microenvironment profile for each cell line in the panel were assessed. Changes to cell morphology/physiology, and to cell composition, including both mRNA and protein levels, were evaluated and compared for the diseased cells as compared to normal cells. The results of these experiments identified CoQ10 and, in particular, the oxidized form of CoQ10, as a MIM.

In a first set of experiments, changes to cell morphology/physiology were evaluated by examining the sensitivity and apoptotic response of cells to CoQ10. A panel of skin cell lines including a control cell lines (primary culture of keratinocytes and melanocytes) and several skin cancers cell lines (SK-MEL-28, a non-metastatic skin melanoma; SK-MEL-2, a metastatic skin melanoma; or SCC, a squamous cell carcinoma; PaCa2, a pancreatic cancer cell line; or HEP-G2, a liver cancer cell line) were treated with various levels of Coenzyme Q10. The results of these experiments demonstrated that the cancer cell lines exhibited an altered dose dependent response as compared to the control cell lines, with an induction of apoptosis and cell death in the cancer cells only. Exemplary experiments are described in detail in Example 3 below.

Assays were next employed to assess changes in the composition of the cell following treatment with CoQ10. Changes in gene expression at the mRNA level were analyzed using Real-Time PCR array methodology. Exemplary experiments are described in detail in Examples 6 and 9-13 below. In complementary experiments, changes in gene expression at the protein level were analyzed by using antibody microarray methodology, 2-dimensional gel electrophoresis followed by protein identificuation using mass spectrometry characterization, and by western blot analysis. Exemplary experiments are described in detail below in Examples 4, 7 and 8, respectively. The results from these assays demonstrated that significant changes in gene expression, both at the mRNA and protein levels, were induced in the cell lines examined due to the addition of the Oxidized form of CoQ10. Genes modulated by CoQ10 treatment were found to be clustered into several cellular pathways, including apoptosis, cancer biology and cell growth, glycolysis and metabolism, molecular transport, and cellular signaling.

Experiments were carried out to confirm the entry of CoQ10 into cells and to determine the level and form of CoQ10 present in the cells. In particular, the level of Coenzyme Q10, as well as the form of CoQ10 (i.e., oxidized or reduced), present in the mitochondria was determined by analyzing mitochondrial enriched preparations from cells treated with CoQ10. The level of Coenzyme Q10 present in the mitochondria was confirmed to increase in a time and dose dependent manner with the addition of exogenous Q10. In a surprising and unexpected result, CoQ10 was determined to be present in the mitochondria primarily in oxidized form. In addition, changes in levels of proteins from mitochondria enriched samples were analyzed by using 2-D gel electrophoresis and protein identification by mass spectrometry characterization. The results from these experiments demonstrated that the levels of the oxidized form of CoQ10 in the mitochondria over the time course examined correlated with a wide variety of cellular changes, as evidenced by the modulation of mRNA and protein levels for specific proteins related to metabolic and apoptotic pathways. Exemplary experiments are described in detail in Example 5 below.

The results described by Applicants herein identified the endogenous molecule CoQ10 and, in particular, the oxidized form of CoQ10, as a MIM. For example, the results identified CoQ10 as a MIM, since CoQ10 was observed to induce changes in gene expression at both the mRNA and protein level. The results identified CoQ10 as having multidimentional character, since CoQ10 induced differential changes in cell morphology/physiology and cell composition (e.g., differential changes in gene expression at both the mRNA and protein level), in a disease state (e.g., cancer) as compared to a normal (e.g., non-cancerous) state. Moreover, the results identified CoQ10 as having multidimensional character in that CoQ10 was capable of entering a cell, and thus exhibited both therapeutic and carrier effects.

Example 2: Methods for Identifying Disease Relevant Processes and Biomarkers for Metabolic Disorders

From the cell based assays in which cell lines were treated with a molecule of interest, the differences in treated vs non-treated cells is evaluated by mRNA arrays, protein antibody arrays, and 2D gel electrophoresis. The proteins identified from comparative sample analysis to be modulated by the MIM or Epi-shifter, are evaluated from a Systems Biology perspective with pathway analysis (Ingenuity IPA software) and a review of the known literature. Proteins identified as potential therapeutic or biomarker targets are submitted to confirmatory assays such as Western blot analysis, siRNA knock-down, or recombinant protein production and characterization methods.

Materials and Methods for Examples 3-8 Coenzyme Q10 Stock

A 500 μM Coenzyme Q10 (5% isopropanol in cell growth media) was prepared as follows. A 10 mL 500 μM Coenzyme Q10 stock was made fresh every time.

Molecular Weight: 863.34

(0.0005 mol/L)(0.010 L)(863.34 g/mol)=0.004317 g To make 10 mL of 500 μM stock, 4.32 mg Coenzyme Q10 was weighted out in a 15 mL falcon tube, and 500 μL isopropanol was added. The solution was warmed in a 50-60° C. water bath while swirling to dissolve completely. To this solution, 9.5 mL of media (the same media in which the cells are grown) was added.

Cell Culture

Cells were obtained from the American Type Culture Collection or Gibco. Cells were grown in DMEM/F-12 media supplemented with 5% fetal bovine serum, 0.25 ug/mL Amphotericin, 100 ug/mL Streptomycin, and 100 U mL-1 penicillin. Cells were maintained in an atmosphere of 95% air and 5% CO2 at 37 degrees C.

Coenzyme Q10 Treatment and Total Protein Isolation

Cells were grown to 85% confluency prior to exposure with Q10. Supplemented media was conditioned with Q10 to 50 and 100 micro molar concentrations. Flasks were treated with control, 50 μM Q10, and 100 μM Q10 in triplicate. Protein was isolated from the treated and control flask after 4, 8, 12, and 24 hours. For isolation of proteins, cells were washed three times with 5 mL of ice cold PBS at a pH of 7.4. The cells were then scraped in 3 mL of PBS, pelleted by centrifuge, and re-suspended in a lysis buffer at pH 7.4 (80 mM TRIS-HCl, 1% SDS, with protease and phosphotase inhibitors). Protein concentrations were quantified using the BCA method.

Cell Lines

The cell lines listed below were propagated and a cell bank established for each. Large scale production of cells for various assays were performed and the material harvested for analysis. In general, when a cell specific media was not required for maintenance of cell lines, the media used for cell growth was DMEMF-12 with 5% serum. Cells were typically grown to 75-80% confluence (clear spacing) prior to splitting and use in cell assays and standard practice methods followed. The following cell lines were established for experiments:

SK-MEL-28 (non-metastatic skin melanoma)

SK-MEL-2 (metastatic skin melanoma)

HEKa (kerantinocytes, skin control)

HEMa (melanocyte, skin control)

nFIB (neonatal fibroblasts)

HEP-G2 (liver cancer) [SBH cell line]

SkBr-3 (breast cancer, Her2 overexpressed)

MCF-7 (breast cancer, p53 mutation)

PC-3 (prostate cancer) [SBH cell line]

SkBr-3 (human breast adenocarcinoma)

NCI-ES-0808

SCC (squamous cell carcinoma)

PaCa-2

NIH-3T3

Cell Culture:

Cells were obtained for the American Type Culture Collection or Gibco. Cells were grown in DMEM/F-12 media supplemented with 5% fetal bovine serum, 0.25 ug/mL Amphotericin, 100 ug/mL Streptomycin, and 100 U mL-1 penicillin. Cells were maintained in an atmosphere of 95% air and 5% CO2 at 37 degrees C.

Skin malignant melanoma SK-MEL28 cells were grown and maintained in DMEM/F12 with Glutamax (Invitrogen, Carlsbad Calif.) supplemented with 5% FBS, amphotericin and penicillin/streptomycin. Cells were grown at 37° C. with 5% CO2. Details of additional cell line and growth conditions are outlined in the table below.

TABLE 1 Cell lines analyzed for sensitivity to Q10. Cell Line Description Growth Conditions PaCa2 Pancreatic DMEM/F12 with Glutamax + 10% FBS, Carcinoma 2.5% Horse Serum, amphotericin, penicillin/streptomycin. HepG2 Hepatocellular MEM with Earles Salts supplemented Carcinoma with 10% FBS, amphotericin, penicillin/streptomycin, sodium pyruvate and non-essential amino acids. PC3 Prostate DMEM/F12 with Glutamax, supplemented Adenocarcinoma with 5% FBS, amphotericin and penicillin/streptomycin. SKBr3 Breast Cancer DMEM/F12 with Glutamax supplemented with 5% FBS and amphotericin, penicillin/streptomycin. MCF-7 Breast Cancer DMEM/F12 with Glutamax supplemented with 5% FBS and amphotericin, penicillin/streptomycin.

Q10 Treatment of SKMEL28 Cells:

SK-MEL28 cells were treated with 100 μM Q10 or the control vehicle. The formulation of the Q10 was as follows. In a 15 mL capped tube, 4.32 mg of Q10 (supplied by Cytotech) was transferred and then dissolved by the addition of 500 μL of isopropanol. The resulting solution was warmed in a 65° C. water bath and vortexed at high speed. The Q10/isopropanol solution was made to a volume of 10 mL with the addition of equilibrated cell culture media. The stock solution was then vortexed to ensure maximum solubility of Q10. The stock solution was diluted (2 mL of stock with 8 mL of media) to obtain a final concentration of 100 μM Q10. For the control vehicle, 9.5 mL of media was added to 500 μL of isopropanol. The control stock was further diluted (2 mL of stock) with 8 mL of media. Cells were harvested 6, 16, 24, 48 or 72 hours after the start of the treatment.

Q10 Treatment of SCC Cells:

SCC cells were treated with 100 μM Q10 (prepared as described above) either for 6 hours or 24 hours. The control cells were untreated cells. Cells were harvested and pelleted at the different times after treatment and the pellets were flash frozen and stored at −80° C. until the RNA was isolated at XTAL as described below.

RNA Isolation:

Cells were lysed for RNA isolation at different treatment times using the RNeasy Mini kit (Qiagen, Inc., Valencia Calif.) kit following the manufacturer's instructions. RNA was quantified by measuring Optical Density at 260 nm.

First Strand Synthesis:

First strand cDNA was synthesized from 1 μg of total RNA using the RT2 First Strand Synthesis kit (SABiosciences., Frederick Md.) as per manufacturer's recommendations.

Real-Time PCR:

Products from the first strand synthesis were diluted with water, mixed with the SYBR green master mix (SABiosciences., Frederick Md.) and loaded onto PCR arrays. Real time PCR was run on the PCR Arrays (Apoptosis Arrays, Diabetes Arrays, Oxidative stress and Antioxidant defense Arrays and Heat Shock Protein Arrays.) (SABiosciences, Frederick Md.) on a Biorad CFX96.

Determining Cell Line Sensitivity to Coenzyme Q10 by Nexin Assay for Apoptosis:

The percentage of cells in early and late apoptosis was quantified following 24 hours of Coenzyme Q10 treatment. Early and late apoptosis was used as a marker to understand the differences in sensitivity of various cancer cell lines to Coenzyme Q10. The different cell lines tested were PaCa2, HepG2, PC-3, SKBr3, MCF-7 and SK-MEL28. Cells were allowed to adhere overnight in 96-well plates. These cells were treated with either control vehicle, 50 μM Q10 or 100 μM Coenzyme Q10. After 24 hours, the presence of apoptotic cells was estimated on a PCA96 flow cytometer (Guava Technologies, Hayward, Calif.). In addition, some cells were treated with 4 Staurosporine for 2 hours as a positive control for apoptosis. Cells were first washed with PBS and detached with 50 μL of Accumax (Innovative Cell Technologies, San Diego, Calif.) at room temperature. The dissociation was stopped by addition of culture medium containing 1% Pluronic F-68 (Sigma-Aldrich, St. Louis, Mo.). Then 100 μL of Nexin reagent (Guava Technologies, Hayward, Calif.) was added to each of the wells. After 20 minutes of incubation in the dark, the assay was performed in low binding plates to minimize reattachment of cells to the substrate. The Nexin Reagent contains two dyes. Annexin-V-PE which detects phosphotidyl serine on the outside of a cell; a characteristic of early apoptotic cells. The second dye, 7-AAD permeates only late apoptotic cells while being excluded from live (healthy) and early apoptotic cells. The percentage of four populations of cells; live, early apoptotic, late apoptotic and debris was determined using the Cytosoft 2.5.7 software (Guava Technologies, Hayward, Calif.).

Immunoblotting

Approximately 50 μg of protein were assayed per sample by immunoblotting. All treatments were run in triplicate with controls. Proteins were separated on 12% TRIS-HCl gels, transferred via electrophoresis to nitro-cellulose membranes and blocked using a 5% milk and TBST solution prior to incubation with primary antibodies. The primary antibodies were incubated overnight at 4 degrees C. in a 5% BSA and TBST solution. Secondary antibodies were incubated for one hour at 4 degrees. All antibodies were purchased from Cell Signaling Technology. Antibodies were used at a ratio of 1:1000, with the exception of βActin at a ratio of 1:5000. Blots were developed and results were quantified using the NIH Java based densitometer analysis software Image J. All blots were also probed for and normalized to their respective βActin expression.

Two-Dimensional Electrophoresis

Before isoelectric focusing (IEF), samples were solubilized in 40 mM Tris, 7 M urea, 2 M thiourea, and 1% C7 zwitterionic detergent, reduced with tributylphosphine, and alkylated with 10 mM acrylamide for 90 min at room temperature. After the sample was run through a 10-kDa cutoff Amicon Ultra device with at least 3 volumes of the resuspension buffer, consisting of 7 M urea, 2 M thiourea, and 2% CHAPS to reduce the conductivity of the sample. One hundred micrograms of protein were subjected to IEF on 11-cm pH 3 to 10, pH 4 to 7 or pH 6 to 11 immobilized pH gradient strips (GE, Amersham, USA) to 100,000 volts hour. After IEF, immobilized pH gradient strips were equilibrated in 6 M urea, 2% SDS, 50 mM Tris-acetate buffer, pH 7.0, and 0.01% bromphenol blue and subjected to SDS-polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis on 8 to 16% Tris-HCl Precast Gel, 1 mm (Bio-Rad, USA). The gels were run in duplicate. They were either fixed, stained in SYPRO Ruby, 80 mL/gel (Invitrogen, USA) and imaged on Fuji FLA-5100 laser scanner or transferred onto PVDF membrane.

Additional information was obtained for a control sample to test the utility of protein identification through the use of methods that utilize dPC (Protein Forest Inc.) selective p1 fractionation, followed by trypsin digestion of the dPC plug with mass spec identification and semi-quantization (Nanomate or LC/LTQ/MS). The dPC analysis performed with a control sample demonstrated its utility in identifying a large subset of proteins. The materials produced during the studies were archived so that they may be utilized as a resource should the future need arise

2D Gel Image Analysis:

Analysis of all gel images was performed using Progenesis Discovery and Pro (Nonlinear Dynamics Inc., Newcastle upon Tyne, UK). After spot detection, matching, background subtraction, normalization, and filtering, data for SYPRO Ruby gel images was exported. Pairwise comparisons between groups were performed using the Student's t test in Progenesis Discovery to identify spots whose expression was significantly altered (p>0.05).

Antibody Array:

An antibody microarray (Panorama XP725 Antibody Array, Sigma) was utilized to screen over 700 protein antibodies to assess changes at the protein concentration level in Q10 treated cells (SK-MEL-28, SCC). The expression of a protein in a cell extract is detected when it is bound by a corresponding antibody spotted on the slide. Prior to binding, the proteins are directly labeled with a fluorescent dye which is used for fluorescent visualization and quantitative analysis. The array is used for comparing protein expression profiles of two samples (test versus reference samples), each labeled with a different CyDye (Cy3 or Cy5) and the two samples are applied simultaneously at equal protein concentrations on the array. Fluorescent signal intensity for each sample is then recorded individually at the wavelength corresponding to the dye label of the sample and compared.

High doses of Coenzyme Q10 regulates expression of genes involved in the apoptotic, diabetic and oxidative stress pathways in cultured SKMEL-28 cells. Experimental details: SKMEL-28 cells (ATCC Catalog # HTB-72) are non metastatic, skin melanoma cells that were cultured in DMEM-F12 containing Glutamax (Invitrogen Cat#10565-042) supplemented with 5% FBS, Penicillin, Streptomycin and Amphotericin, were treated with the vehicle or 100 uM Coenzyme Q10 for varying amounts of time. Any changes in gene expression consequent to Coenzyme Q10 treatment were quantified using Real time PCR Arrays (Apoptosis Cat #PAHS-12, Diabetes Cat #PAHS-023 and Oxidative Stress Cat #PAHS-065). (SABiosciences, Frederick, Md.).

A stock concentration of 500 uM Coenzyme Q10 was prepared by dissolving 4.32 mg in 500 ul of isopropanol which was further diluted to 10 ml by addition of media. Alternate vortexing and heating to 65° C. dissolved the Coenzyme Q10. 2 ml of the stock solution was diluted to 10 ml with media to get a 100 uM Q10 containing media that was used to treat cells. A vehicle was prepared in parallel with a similar protocol except that the Coenzyme Q10 was not added.

SKMEL-28 cells were plated at a density of 1×10⁵ cells/well in a 6-well plate. After 24 hours, when cells had attached and were at 50% confluence, either the vehicle or 100 uM Q10 was added. Cells were harvested by at 6, 16, 24, 48 or 72 hours after Q10 treatment while the vehicle treated cells were harvested after 24 hours. Cells were lysed for RNA isolation at different treatment times using the RNeasy Mini kit (Qiagen, Inc., Valencia Calif. Cat #74104) kit following the manufacturer's instructions using a spin column and on-column DNase treatment. RNA was quantified by measuring absorbance at 260 nm.

Real time PCR was preceded by first strand cDNA synthesis using 0.4-1 ug of total RNA as the template using the RT2 First Strand Synthesis kit (SABiosciences., Frederick Md. Cat# C-03) with a genomic DNA elimination step as per manufacturer's recommendations. Products from the first strand synthesis were diluted with water, mixed with the SYBR green master mix (SABiosciences., Frederick Md. Cat#PA-010-12) and loaded onto PCR arrays that contain primer assays for 84 different genes linked within a common pathway, 5 housekeeping genes used for normalization, reverse transcription and PCR controls. Real time PCR was run on a Biorad Cfx96. The amplification was initiated with a hot start to activate the enzyme, followed by 40 cycles each of (95° C.-15 second denaturation step and 60° C.-1 minute annealing and extension step) followed by a melting curve program. Ct values, the output from the PCR thermocycler for all treatment groups were organized on an excel spreadsheet and loaded onto the comparative analysis software available at http://www.sabiosciences.com/per/arrayanalysis.php.

Purification of Mitochondria Enriched Samples:

Experimental details: SKMEL-28, NCI-ES0808 and NIH-3T3 cells that were treated with 100 μM Q10 for 24 or 48 hours along with cells that were harvested at t=0 were harvested by washing and scraping from T160 flasks. Cells were centrifuged, pelleted, flash frozen and stored at −80° C. until the mitochondria were isolated. Cell pellets were thawed, resuspended and ruptured in Dounce homogenizer. The homogenate was centrifuged and mitochondria were isolated using reagents and the protocol recommended by the Mitochondria Isolation kit for Cultured cells (MitoSciences, Eugene Oreg., Cat # MS852). The mitochondrial fraction was aliquoted and stored at −80° C.

Coenzyme Q10 and Ubiquinol-10 Quantification Method:

A method for the simultaneous determination of Coenzyme Q10 (Q10) and the reduced form ubiquinol-10 (Q10H2) was implemented based upon a recently published method (Ruiz-Jimenez, 2007, J. Chromatogr. A, 1175, 242-248) through the use of LC-MS/MS with electrospray ionization (ESI) in the positive ion mode. The highly selective identification and sensitive quantitation of both Q10 and Q10H2 is possible, along with the identification of other selected lipids. An aliquot of the mitochondrial enriched samples from SK-MEL-28 treated with 100 μM Q10 was subjected to a conventional pre-treatment based on protein precipitation (100 μl of packed cells sonicated in 300 μl of 1-propanol), liquid-liquid extraction (add 100 μl of water to supernatant and extract ×3 with 200 μl of n-hexane), evaporation of combined hexane extracts to dryness and reconstitution in 50 μl of 95:5 methanol/hexane (v/v). Analysis was by LC-MS/MS on a Waters Quattro II triple quadrupole mass spectrometer with a Prism RP 1×100 mm, 5 μm particle size column (Keystone Scientific). Isocratic elution with 4 mM ammonium formate in 20% isopropyl alcohol 80% methanol at a flow rate of 50 μI/min. Ten μl of each sample was injected. MRM analysis was performed using m/z 882.7>197.00 (Q10H2) and m/z 880.80>197.00 (Q10) transitions with cone voltage of 40 and collision energy of 30.

Example 3: Sensitivity of Cell Lines to CoQ10

A number of cell lines were tested for their sensitivity to Q10 after 24 hours of application by using a reagent (Nexin reagent) that contains a combination of two dyes, 7AAD and Annexin-V-PE. The 7AAD dye will enter into cells with permeabilized cell membranes; primarily those cells that are in late apoptosis. Annexin-V-PE is a dye that binds to Phosphotidyl serine, which is exposed on the outer surface of the plasma membrane in early apoptotic cells. The Nexin reagent thus can be used to differentiate between different populations of apoptotic cells in a flow cytometer.

PaCa2 cells showed an increase in both early and late apoptotic cells (between 5-10% of gated cells) with 50 μM Q10 and 100 μM Q10 after 24 hours of Q10 application. PC-3 cells also showed an increase in both early and late apoptotic population with 50 μM and 100 μM Q10, although the increase was less when compared to PaCa2 cells. MCF-7 and SK-MEL28 cells showed an increase only in early apoptotic population with 50 μM and 100 μM Q10. HepG2 cells were also sensitive to 50 μM Q10 treatment, where there was an increase of about 20% of the gated populated in the late apoptotic and early apoptotic stages. SKBr3 was the only cell line tested that did not show any significant increases of early and late apoptosis with either 50 μM or 100 μM Q10 treatment. The results are depicted in FIGS. 1-6.

To provide additional confirmation that Q10 treatment causes an apoptotic response in HepG2 liver cancer cells, a second apoptosis assay was evaluated using the ApoStrand™ ELISA based method that measures single-stranded DNA. The ApoStrand™ ELISA is based on the sensitivity of DNA in apoptotic cells to formamide denaturation and the detection of the denatured DNA with a monoclonal antibody to single-stranded DNA (ssDNA). Treatment of the liver cancer cell line HepG2 with 50 and 100 μM Q10 resulted in detectable apoptosis, with a dose-response of 17% and 32%, respectively (FIG. 7). These results are consistent with the observation of Q10 inducing apoptosis in other cancer cell lines from other tissues (e.g., SCC, SKMEL-28, MCF-7, and PC-3).

Example 4: Proteomic Analysis of Cells Treated with Q10

Cell pellets of samples treated with Q10 were analyzed using proteomic methods. The cell pellets were lysed and treated for use in 2-D gel and Western blot analysis. Three cell types (SKMEL-28, SCC, and nFib) were treated with Q10 and submitted to proteomic characterization by 2-D gel electrophoresis.

Proteomic Analysis of SKMEL-28 Cells Treated with Q10

The first experimental set processed and evaluated by Western blot and 2-D gel electrophoresis was the skin cancer cell line SKMEL-28. This experimental set involved SK-MEL-28 cells treated at 3, 6, 12, and 24 hours with 0, 50 or 100 μM Q10.

The set of Q10 treated SK-MEL-28 samples were subjected to 2-D gel electrophoreses (FIG. 8) and were analyzed to identify protein-level changes relative to the control samples. A comparative analysis of 943 spots across all twenty-four gels was performed, comparing the control sample against all of the treated samples. The analysis included the identification of spot changes over the time course due to increase, decrease, or post-translational modification.

The analysis found thirty-two statistically significant differential spot changes. From this, twenty non-redundant spots were excised and submitted for protein identification by trypsin digestion and mass spectrometry characterization. The characterized peptides were searched against protein databases with Mascot and MSRAT software analysis to identify the protein (Table 2).

TABLE 2 Proteins identified to have a differential response to Q10 treatment in SKMEL-28 cell. Q10 Time Conc. 2D (hr) (uM) Spot # Expression Difference Protein Name Type 3 50 528 down 1.234 cathepsin D CTSD peptidase 3 50 702 down 1.575 chaperonin containing CCT3 other TCP1, subunit 3 3 50 74 down 1.383 eukaryotic translation EIF3G translation initiation factor 3 regulator 3 50 829 down 1.074 Ribosomal protein P2 RPLP2 other 3 50 368 down 1.121 transaldolase 1 TALDO1 enzyme 6 50 452 up −1.464 eukaryotic translation EIF6 translation initiation factor 6 regulator 6 50 175 up −1.32 Stomatin; HSPC322 STOM other 6 50 827 up −1.457 Tyrosine 3/Tryptophan 5- YWHA enzyme monooxygenase activation protein 6 50 139 up −1.628 Vimentin VIM other 6 50 218 up −1.416 Vimentin VIM other 6 50 218 up −1.212 Vimentin VIM other 6 50 139 up −1.036 Vimentin VIM other 6 50 507 down 1.379 Lamin B1 LMNB1 other 6 50 571 down 1.832 mitochandrial import TOMM22 transporter receptor Tom22 12 50 166 up −1.171 ALG-2 interacting protein 1 PDCD6IP other 12 50 550 up −1.747 peptidylprolyl isomerase A PPIA enzyme 12 50 613 down 1.802 galectin-1 LGALS1 other 12 50 242 down 1.373 Phosphoglycerate mutase; PGAM2 phosphatase Posphomannomutase 2 24 50 326 down 1.385 glycyl-tRNA synthase GARS enzyme 24 50 419 down 1.451 Mago-nashi homolog MAGOH other 3 100 528 down −1.036 cathepsin D CTSD peptidase 3 100 702 down 1.151 chaperonin containing CCT3 other TCP1, subunit 3 3 100 74 down 1.122 eukaryotic translation EIF3G translation initiation factor 3 regulator 3 100 829 down 1.145 Ribosomal protein P2 RPLP2 other 3 100 368 down 1.209 transaldolase 1 TALDO1 enzyme 6 100 139 up −1.829 Vimentin VIM other 6 100 218 up −1.761 Vimentin VIM other 6 100 452 down 1.134 eukaryotic translation EIF6 translation initiation factor 6 regulator 6 100 252 down 1.4 Sec 13 protein, Keratin II ? 6 100 827 down 1.12 Tyrosine 3/Tryptophan 5- YWHA enzyme monooxygenase activation protein 12 100 76 up −1.679 galectin-1; keratin II LGALS1 other

A key finding in this experiment was the decrease of Transaldolase 1, which supports the premise that Q10 acts by altering the metabolic state within the cancer cell. Transaldolase 1 is an enzyme in the pentose phosphate pathway (also known as the hexose monophosphate shunt). Transaldolase (EC:2.2.1.2) catalyses the reversible transfer of a three-carbon ketol unit from sedoheptulose 7-phosphate to glyceraldehyde 3-phosphate to form erythrose 4-phosphate and fructose 6-phosphate. This enzyme, together with transketolase, provides a link between the glycolytic and pentose-phosphate pathways. This is relevant to nucleotide and NADPH synthesis, to facilitate production of reducing equivalents for biosynthetic reactions and maintenance of a reducing environment.

A recent publication (Basta, P., et. al. August 2008, Cancer Detect Prevention, 32, 200-208) provided evidence of genetic polymorphism in Transaldolase and was linked to squamous cell carcinoma of the head and neck. Another recent publication (Qian, Y., et. al. May 2008, Biochem J, 415, 123-134) identified transaldolase deficiency as a modulator of mitochondrial homoeostasis, Ca2+ fluxing and apoptosis.

From these initial results, the other proteins identified by 2-D gel electrophoresis as being modulated by Q10 in SK-MEL-28 were analyzed for known relationships (FIG. 9). A functional evaluation of these proteins revealed that there was a group involved in 14-3-3-mediated signaling (PDCP6IP, YWHAZ, and VIM), along with individual proteins linked to a variety of processes [cell cycle; pentose phosphate pathway (TALDO1); ceramide signaling (CTSD); aminoacyl-tRNA biosynthesis (GARS), and mitochondrial protein import (TOM22)].

Proteomic Analysis of SCC Cells Treated with Q10

Another skin cancer cell line, Squamous Cell Carcinoma (SCC), was also prepared and analyzed by 2-D gel electrophoreses as a follow-up experiment the previous SK-MEL-28 analysis The SCC cells were treated with 100 μM Q10 for 6 hour or 24 hours before harvesting. A control of untreated cells was also harvested. The cell pellets were lysed and the samples were subjected to 2-D electrophoresis (in duplicate). Analysis of over six hundred protein spots in the comparative study was performed, comparing the control sample against the six hour and twenty-four hour treatments.

The top twenty-five statistically significant differential spot changes were evaluated from the comparative analysis of the 2-D electrophoresis gels. From this, twelve spots were excised and submitted for identification by trypsin digestion and mass spectrometry characterization (results summarized in Table 3 below).

TABLE 3 Proteins identified to have a differential response to 100 μM Q10 treatment in SCC cells at 6 and 24 hours. Response Cellular (fold Spot # Protein Name localization Function change) 331 Transaldolase 1 TALDO1 Cytoplasm Enzyme Decrease (1.5) at 6 and 14 hr 23 Human BSCv C20ORF3 Plasma strictosidine Decrease (chromosome 20 reading membrane synthase (2.1) at 6 frame 3) and 24 hr 54 NM23 protein NME1 Nucleus, Kinase Increase (mitochondria?) (−1.2) at 6 hr, decrease at 24 hr 116 two Human ESTs from HSP70 Decrease MCF7 breast cancer cell (2.6) at 6 hr, line (HSP 70) further decrease at 24 hr 176 Heat shock 27 kDa HSPB1 Cytoplasm Response to Increase protein 1 environmental (−1.9) at 6 stresses and 24 hr 135 Keratin 1 KRT1 Cytoplasm intermediate Decrease filaments (2.3) at 6 and 24 hr 50 Keratin 14 KRT14 Cytoplasm intermediate Increase filaments (−1.6) at 6 and 24 hr 68 Keratin 13 KRT13 Cytoplasm intermediate Increase filaments (−1.5) at 6 and 24 hr 49 Proteasome Beta 7 PSMB7 Cytoplasm Proteasome Decrease subunit (1.6) at 24 hr only 93 Proteasome activator PSME3 Cytoplasm peptidase Decrease subunit 3 (1.3) at 24 hr only 66 Rho GDP dissociation ARHGDIA Cytoplasm Inhibitor Decrease inhibitor (GDI) alpha (1.5) at 6 hr only 1 Unknown? Decrease (9.5)

Transaldolase 1:

As previously observed in the SKMEL-28 cells treated with Q10, the enzyme Transaldolase 1 was modulated with a decrease in levels. This provides an independent confirmation of the previously observation of a linkage between Q10 and alterations in transaldolase (and thus the metabolic state of the cell).

Transaldolase is an enzyme in the non-oxidative phase of the pentose phosphate pathway (FIG. 10). The pentose phosphate pathway is critical in the metabolic state of cells for the generation of nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide phosphate (reduced NADH), for reductive biosynthesis, and in the formation of ribose which is an essential component of ATP, DNA, and RNA. Transaldolase also links the pentose phosphate pathway to glycolysis. Glycolysis is the metabolic pathway by which cancer cells obtain the energy needed for cell survival, as the mitochondrial process of oxidative phosphorylation is not utilized. Q10 is an essential coenzyme factor required for oxidatative phosphorylation and mitochondrial ATP production.

BSCv:

Spot 23 was a novel human protein from Chromosome 20 named BSCv. BSCv protein is also known as Adipocyte plasma membrane-associated protein (Gene names: APMAP or C20orf3) and is predicted to be a single-pass type 11 membrane protein with sequence similarity to the strictosidine synthase family of proteins. Q10 treatment caused a reduction in the levels of this protein. This protein is not well characterized, nor has its homology with strictosidine synthases been confirmed. Interestingly, this protein has been associated with a role in adipocyte differentiation (Albrektsen et al., 2001). Recent proteomic studies of human omental adipose tissue identified BSCv as one of nine proteins with differential expression for polcystic ovary syndrome (PCOS) from morbidly obese women (Corton, 2008 Hum. Reprod. 23: 651-661). As a cell surface protein that responds to Q10, an antibody against BSCv would be useful as a biomarker. Based on the current results and the literature available, BSCv may a have a potential role in cancer and diabetes.

NM23A:

Non-metastatic cells 1, protein (NM23A, also known as NME1) is thought to be a metastasis suppressor. This gene (NME1) was identified because of its reduced mRNA transcript levels in highly metastatic cells. The protein has activity as a nucleoside diphosphate kinase (NDK) and exists as a hexamer composed of ‘A’ (encoded by this gene) and ‘B’ (encoded by NME2) isoforms. Mutations in this gene have been identified in aggressive neuroblastomas. NDK activities maintain an equilibrium between the concentrations of different nucleoside triphosphates such as, for example, when GTP produced in the citric acid (Krebs) cycle is converted to ATP. The NDK complex is associated with p53 through interaction with STRAP. It is noteworthy that STRAP is linked to HNF4A. Thus, NM23A is a potential protein involved in pathways important for cell control and disease treatment.

Rho GDP Dissociation Inhibitor (GDI) Alpha:

GDI Regulates the GDP/GTP exchange reaction of the Rho proteins by inhibiting the dissociation of GDP from them, and the subsequent binding of GTP to them. The protein is upregulated in cancer cells.

Example 5: Mitochondrial Enrichment Analysis

Several lines of evidence suggested that a closer evaluation of the role of mitochondrial proteins and cancer biology and Q10 response was warranted. First, there is the essential role of Q10 in the mitochondrial oxidative phosphorylation process for energy production in normal cells. However, the metabolic shift that occurs in cancer cells is to energy production through the alternative pathway of glycolysis, which does not require Q10. Second, the apoptotic response of cells requires mitochondrial proteins to occur. Q10 has been established as stimulating apoptosis in cancer cells (Bcl-2 family proteins, cytochrome c). Finally, new mitochondrial proteins were identified as being modulated by Q10 treatment, as exemplified by the modulation in protein levels of the mitochondrial import receptor protein TOM22 (see experiments described herein).

Production of Mitochondrial Enriched Samples

The skin cancer SKMEL-28 cells were treated with 100 μM Q10 or a mock vehicle for 6, 19, or 48 hours. The cells were harvested by washing and scraping the cells from T-160 flasks (4 for each time point). The cells were collected by centrifugation and the pellets flash frozen and stored at −80° C. The cell pellets were resuspended and ruptured using a 2 mL Dounce homogenizer. The reagents and method were obtained from a Mitochondria Isolation Kit for Cultured Cells (MitoSciences, Cat# MS852). The resultant mitochondria samples were divided into 75 μL aliquots (4-5 aliquots per sample) and stored at −80° C.

Proteomic Analysis of Mitochondria Enriched Samples Isolated from SK-MEL-28 Cells Treated with Q10

2-D gel electrophoresis was performed on proteins solubilized from two aliquots of the SK-MEL-28 mitochondria enriched samples treated with 100 μM Q10 for 6, 19, and 48 hours (along with the corresponding mock vehicle controls). The samples were subjected to 2-D electrophoresis (in duplicate). Analysis of 525 protein spots in the comparative study was performed, comparing the control samples against the other time point samples (FIG. 11).

The nine statistically significant differential spot changes were selected from the comparative analysis of the 2-D electrophoresis gels. From these, 9 spots were excised and submitted for identification by trypsin digestion and mass spectrometry characterization

TABLE 4 Proteins identified to have a differential response to Q10 treatment in SKMEL-28 mitochondria. Response (fold Spot # Protein Name Function change) 11 Unknown protein ? ? Up (1.3) at 6 hr, drop to low levels after this 131 Unknown, same as spot ? ? Down (1.3) at 6 hr, #11, modified drops more for 19 and 48 hr 279 acyl-CoA thioesterase ACOT7 Cleaves fatty acyl-CoA's Down (1.3) at 6 hr, 7 isoform hBACHb into free fatty acids and back to normal at 48 hr CoA 372 Pyruvate kinase PKM2 catalyzes the production Up (1.5) at 6 hr, of phosphoenolpyruvate back to normal at 48 hr from pyruvate and ATP 110 ER60 protein PDIA3 Protein disulfide Up at 19 and 48 hr isomerase 185 Keratin 10 KRT10 intermediate filament Up only at 19 hr 202 Beta-Actin Structural protein Up only at 19 hr 246 Malectin MLEC carbohydrate-binding Up only at 19 hr protein of the endoplasmic reticulum and a candidate player in the early steps of protein N-glycosylation 75 Coiled-coil domain CCDC58 Conserved hypothetical Up at 48 hr containing 58 protein - nuclear pore forming

Acyl-CoA Thioesterase 7:

Acyl-CoA thioesterase 7 (ACOT7) is a member of the enzyme family that catalyzes the hydrolysis of fatty acyl-CoA to free fatty acid and CoA. This enzyme thus has a role in the regulation of lipid metabolism and cellular signaling. ACOT7 has a preference for long-chain acyl-CoA substrates with fatty acid chains of 8-16 carbon atoms (C8-C16). The exact cellular function is ACOT7 is not fully understood. The transcription of this gene is activated by sterol regulatory element-binding protein 2, thus suggesting a function in cholesterol metabolism.

The results in this Example indicate that ACOT7 is potentially involved in the metabolism of Q10, either directly or indirectly. Thus, targeting ACOT7 could facilitate modulation of intercellular levels of Q10 and thus impact cellular Q10 effects.

Pyruvate Kinase:

Pyruvate kinase is an enzyme involved in the last step of glycolysis. It catalyzes the transfer of a phosphate group from phosphoenolpyruvate (PEP) to ADP, yielding one molecule of pyruvate and one molecule of ATP.

The protein is presumably that of PKM2, the type 2 isoform, as this was identified from the mitochondria enriched SK-MEL-28 sample. This isoform is well known to be involved in tumor cell formation and regulation.

Quantification of Q10 Levels in Mitochondria

A method for the simultaneous determination of Coenzyme Q10, (Q10) and the reduced form ubiquinol-10 (Q10H2) was implemented based upon a recently published method (Ruiz-Jimenez, 2007, J. Chroma A, 1175, 242-248) through the use of LC-MS-MS with electrospray ionization (ESI) in the positive mode. The highly selective identification and sensitive quantitation of both Q10 and Q10H2 is possible, along with the identification of other selected lipids. An aliquot of the mitochondrial enriched samples from SK-MEL-28 treated with 100 μM Q10 were subject to a conventional pre-treatment based on protein precipitation, liquid-liquid extraction, evaporation to dryness and reconstitution with 95:5 methanol/hexane (v/v).

In this analysis, Q10, Q10H2, and Q9 were quantitated (Table 5). The levels of the related molecule Q9 were low, and near the level of detection. The level of the untreated samples were relatively consistent, with the 6 hour Q10 treated sample having this same level. To control for sample variance in total material, the levels of cholesterol was also measured to confirm that the differences were not due to sample size errors. When the Q10 levels were corrected against total protein values obtained by protein extraction other aliquots of the same mitochondrial preps, the relative ratios were comparative. Thus, a significant increase in Q10 levels was obtained at 19 hours (˜3-fold) with an even larger increase by the 48 hour time point (˜6-fold) (FIG. 12).

TABLE 5 HPLC-MS Quantification results for the levels of Q10 present in mitochondrial enriched samples from SK-MEL-28 cells treated with 100 μM Q10 in the media. Peak Area ng/Sample μg/sample File Sample Injection Q9 Q10 Q9 Q10 Q10H₂ Cholesterol 081204-05 100 ng Std 245,342 352792 081204-06 6 hr mock#1 10% 2560 32649 1.04 9.25 081204-07 Solvent Blank#1 5 ul 3781 3174 1.54 0.9 081204-08 Solvent Blank#2 5 ul 2396 4399 0.98 1.25 081204-09 6 hr mock#2 20% 1572 36328 0.64 10.3 081204-10 Solvent Blank#3 10 ul  1722 2504 0.7 0.71 081204-11 48 hr Q10 treated 20% 4879 164496 1.99 46.63 0.28 13.86 081204-12 48 hr mock 20% 2412 25552 0.98 7.24 0.09 13.04 081204-13 6 hr Q10 treated 20% 692 25427 028 7.21 081204-14 19 hr Q10 treated 20% 1161 59164 0.47 16.77 081204-15 19 hr mock 20% 901 19999 0.37 5.67

A surprising result from this study was the finding that the Q10 was supplied to the cells as the oxidized form. For the 48 hour samples, the reduced form Q10H2 was also measured and found to be present in significantly lower amounts (0.28 ng/sample of CoQ10H2 as compared to 46.63 ng/sample of CoQ10). There was a general increase (3-fold) in the levels of Q10H2 in the Q10 treated 48 hour sample, although the levels were near the presumed detection limit of the assay. Interestingly, the oxidized form (Q10) can act as a pro-oxidant in biological systems. According to the literature, when human plasma was evaluated for Q10 and Q10H2, the majority (90%) of the molecule was found in the reduced form of Q10H2 (Ruiz-Jimenez, 2007, J. Chroma A, 1175, 242-248) which can act as an anti-oxidant.

Thus, these results confirm and quantitate that the levels of Q10 increase in the mitochondria upon the exogenous addition of Q10 to the media. A surprising and unexpected discovery was that Q10 was maintained in the supplied oxidized form (pro-oxidant) and not converted to the reduced (anti-oxidant) form of Q10H2 in any significant amounts.

Example 6: Real-Time PCR Arrays Experiment 1: Apoptosis Array

As discussed above in Example 3, exposure of cancer cells to Q10 induces a portion of these cells to die due to apoptotic processes. To identify proteins that were involved in the Q10 response, real-time polymerase chain reaction (RT-PCR) methods were employed to identify changes in the level of mRNA for genes/proteins involved in targeted pathway arrays for apoptosis.

Using PCR arrays as a screening tool, a spectrum of molecular targets that would potentially offer an insight to the mode of biological action of Q10 within the cells were thus evaluated. Changes in mRNA levels were evaluated using real-time PCR quantification to assess mRNA levels in pre-selected subsets containing 80 pathway specific targets.

For the interpretation of mRNA results, the genes that were altered in their mRNA transcription by a two-fold level were identified and evaluated. The level of gene transcription to produce mRNA only provides a rough estimate of potential changes in the level of the expressed protein. The skilled artisan will appreciate that each mRNA may have different rates at which it is degraded or its translation inefficiently, thus resulting in differing amounts of protein.

SkBr-3 Cells Treated with 50 um Q10 for 24 Hours

The assay method of RT-PCR was utilized to provide a measure of mRNA level changes to a total of 84 apoptotic pathway related proteins. The experiments with the real-time PCR apoptosis analysis on SkBr3 with Q10 (24 hr) identified the following mRNA's being affected: Bcl2, Bcl2L1, Bcl2L11, Birc6, Bax, Xiap, Hprt1, Apaf1, Abl1, Braf. These results again provided supporting evidence for the apoptotic response of cancer cells to Q10 treatment.

TABLE 6A Up-Down Symbol Regulation Unigene Refseq Description Gname BCL2L1 13.1957 Hs.516966 NM_138578 BCL2-like 1 BCL-XL/S BNIP2 6.3291 Hs.646490 NM_004330 BCL2/adenovirus E1B BNIP-2/NIP2 19 kDa interacting protein 2 BCL2 5.4717 Hs.150749 NM_000633 B-cell CLL/lymphoma 2 Bcl-2 BIRC6 4.7966 Hs.150107 NM_016252 Baculoviral IAP APOLLON/BRUCE repeat-containing 6 (apollon) BCL2L11 4.6012 Hs.469658 NM_006538 BCL2-like 11 (apoptosis BAM/BIM facilitator) XIAP 4.3832 Hs.356076 NM_001167 X-linked inhibitor of API3/BIRC4 apoptosis BRAF 4.3832 Hs.550061 NM_004333 V-raf murine sarcoma B-raf viral oncogene homolog 1/BRAF1 B1 BAX 3.896 Hs.631546 NM_004324 BCL2-associated X Bax zeta protein APAF1 2.6244 Hs.708112 NM_001160 Apoptotic peptidase CED4/DKFZp781B1145 activating factor 1 HPRT1 −160.6748 Hs.412707 NM_000194 Hypoxanthine HGPRT/HPRT phosphoribosyltransferase 1 (Lesch-Nyhan syndrome)

Results that are consistent from three independent experiments from SK-MEL-28 cells are summarized below in Table 6B. Many genes are regulated in SCC cells as well with 100 μM Q10 treatment. The genes in the Apoptosis array that appear to be regulated in SCC cells are described in Table 7. We find that many genes are regulated at 6 hours, both in SK-MEL-28 cells and in SCC cells. By 24 hours, the regulation is decreased. Genes that appear to be regulated in both SK-MEL-28 cells and in SCC cells are described in Table 8.

TABLE 6B Genes in SK-MEL-28 cells regulated by 100 μM Q10 treatment when analyzed by the Apoptosis Array. Symbol Description Regulation Location Possible Functions ABL1 C-abl oncogene 1, Down Regulated at Nucleus Tyrosine Kinase receptor tyrosine 72 hours kinase BAG1 BCL2-associated Up Regulated at 48 Cytoplasm Anti-apoptotic, athanogene hours glucocorticoid receptor pathway BCL2 B-cell CLL/lymphoma 2 Down Regulated at Cytoplasm Cell death 48 hours BCL2A1 BCL2-related protein Down Regulated at Cytoplasm Regulates Caspases, A1 48 hours phosphorylates TP73 BCL2L1 BCL2-like 1 Down Regulated at Cytoplasm Caspase Inhibitor 72 hours BCL2L10 BCL2-like 10 Down Regulated at Cytoplasm Caspase Activator (apoptosis facilitator) 48 hours BCL2L11 BCL2-like 11 Down Regulated at Cytoplasm Pro-Apoptotic, (apoptosis facilitator) 48 hours Caspase3 Activator BIRC3 Baculoviral IAP Down Regulated at Cytoplasm Anti-apoptotic repeat-containing 3 6 hours BIRC8 Baculoviral IAP Down Regulated at Cytoplasm Activates Caspase repeat-containing 8 48 hours CARD8 Caspase recruitment Down Regulated at Nucleus Caspase Activator domain family, 48 hours member 8 CASP14 Caspase 14, apoptosis- Down Regulated at Cytoplasm Apoptosis related related cysteine 48 hours cysteine peptidase peptidase CASP5 Caspase 5, apoptosis- Down Regulated at Cytoplasm Apoptosis related related cysteine 48 hours cysteine peptidase peptidase CD40LG CD40 ligand (TNF Down Regulated at Extracellular CD40 receptor superfamily, member 48 hours Space binding 5, hyper-IgM syndrome) CIDEA Cell death-inducing Up Regulated at 48 Cytoplasm Pro-Apoptotic DFFA-like effector a hours FADD Fas (TNFRSF6)- Down Regulated at Cytoplasm Pro-Apoptotic associated via death 6 hours domain FAS Fas (TNF receptor Up Regulated at 48 Plasma Pro-Apoptotic superfamily, member hours Membrane 6) FASLG Fas ligand (TNF Down Regulated at Extracellular Pro-Apoptotic superfamily, member 48 hours Space 6) GADD45A Growth arrest and Up Regulated at 48 Nucleus Growth Arrest DNA-damage- hours inducible, alpha HRK Harakiri, BCL2 Down Regulated at Cytoplasm Pro-Apoptotic interacting protein 48 hours (contains only BH3 domain) PYCARD PYD and CARD Down Regulated at Cytoplasm Apoptotic Protease domain containing 6 hours Activator TNF Tumor necrosis factor Up Regulated at 48 Extracellular TNF receptor binding (TNF superfamily, hours then down Space member 2) regulated TNFRSF10A Tumor necrosis factor Up Regulated at 48 Plasma Caspase Activator receptor superfamily, hours then down Membrane member 10a regulated TNFRSF10B Tumor necrosis factor Down Regulated at Plasma p53 signaling, caspase receptor superfamily, 72 hours Membrane activation. member 10b TNFRSF1A Tumor necrosis factor Down Regulated at Plasma Pro-apoptotic receptor superfamily, 72 hours Membrane member 1A TNFRSF21 Tumor necrosis factor Down Regulated at Plasma Activates Caspase receptor superfamily, 48 hours Membrane member 21 CD27 CD27 molecule Down Regulated at Plasma Caspase Inhibitor 48 hours Membrane TNFRSF9 Tumor necrosis factor Down Regulated at Plasma Pro-apoptotic receptor superfamily, 48 hours Membrane member 9 TNFSF10 Tumor necrosis factor Upregulated at 48 Extracellular Pro-apoptotic (ligand) superfamily, hours Space member 10 TP73 Tumor protein p73 Down Regulated at Nucleus Transcription factor 48 hours TRAF3 TNF receptor- Down Regulated at Cytoplasm Zinc-finger domain associated factor 3 48 hours TRAF4 TNF receptor- Down Regulated at Cytoplasm Zinc-finger domain associated factor 4 48 hours

TABLE 7 Genes in SCC cells that are regulated by 100 μM Q10 treatment when analyzed by the Apoptosis Array. Symbol Description Regulation. AKT1 V-akt murine thymoma viral oncogene Down regulated at 6 hours and then homolog 1 up regulated at 24 hours. BAG4 BCL2-associated athanogene 4 Up regulated at 24 hours. BAX BCL2-associated X protein Up regulated at 24 hours. BCL2 B-cell CLL/lymphoma 2 Up regulated at 24 hours. BCL2L1 BCL2-like 1 Down regulated at 6 hours and then up regulated at 24 hours. BIRC3 Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing 3 Down regulated at 6 hours. BNIP3 BCL2/adenovirus E1B 19 kDa Down regulated at 24 hours. interacting protein 3 CARD6 Caspase recruitment domain family, Down regulated at 6 hours. member 6 CASP6 Caspase 6, apoptosis-related cysteine Up regulated at 24 hours. peptidase CASP7 Caspase 7, apoptosis-related cysteine Up regulated at 24 hours. peptidase CD40 CD40 molecule, TNF receptor Down regulated at 6 hours. superfamily member 5 FADD Fas (TNFRSF6)-associated via death Up regulated at 24 hours. domain GADD45A Growth arrest and DNA-damage- Up regulated at 24 hours. inducible, alpha HRK Harakiri, BCL2 interacting protein Up regulated at 24 hours. (contains only BH3 domain) TNFRSF21 Tumor necrosis factor receptor Down regulated at 6 hours. superfamily, member 21 TNFRSF25 Tumor necrosis factor receptor Down regulated at 6 hours and then superfamily, member 25 up regulated at 24 hours. CD27 CD27 molecule Down regulated at 6 hours. TNFRSF9 Tumor necrosis factor receptor Down regulated at 6 hours. superfamily, member 9 TNFSF10 Tumor necrosis factor (ligand) Up regulated at 24 hours. superfamily, member 10 CD70 CD70 molecule Down regulated at 6 hours. TP53 Tumor protein p53 Up regulated at 24 hours. TP73 Tumor protein p73 Down regulated at 6 hours and then up regulated at 24 hours. TRAF2 TNF receptor-associated factor 2 Up regulated at 24 hours.

TABLE 8 Genes from the apoptosis array regulated with 100 μM Q10 treatment in both SK-MEL-28 and SCC cells. Symbol Description BCL2 B-cell CLL/lymphoma 2 BCL2L1 BCL2-like 1 (Bcl-xl) BIRC3 Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing 3 FADD Fas (TNFRSF6)-associated via death domain GADD45A Growth arrest and DNA-damage-inducible, alpha TNFRSF21 Tumor necrosis factor receptor superfamily, member 21 CD27 CD27 molecule TNFRSF9 Tumor necrosis factor receptor superfamily, member 9 TNFSF10 Tumor necrosis factor (ligand) superfamily, member 10 TP73 Tumor protein p73 TRAF2 TNF receptor-associated factor 2

Interestingly, the altered mRNA levels showed a significant up-regulation in a series of apoptitic proteins, with Bcl-xl one of the highest. This was also observed in the protein array experiments on SK-MEL-28 cells.

Bcl-xl is a transmembrane molecule in the mitochondria (Bcl-xl stands for “Basal cell lymphoma-extra large”). It is involved in the signal transduction pathway of the FAS-L and is one of several anti-apoptotic proteins which are members of the Bcl-2 family of proteins. It has been implicated in the survival of cancer cells. However, it is known that alternative splicing of human Bcl-x mRNA may result in at least two distinct Bcl-x mRNA species, Bcl-xL and Bcl-xS.) The predominant protein product (233 amino acids) is the larger Bcl-x mRNA, Bcl-xL, which inhibits cell death upon growth factor withdrawal (Boise et al., 1993. Cell 74, 597-608). Bcl-xS, on the other hand, inhibits the ability of Bcl-2 to inhibit cell death and renders cells more susceptible to apoptotic cell death. The employed assays utilized do not distinguish which isoform of Bcl-x is being upregulated. The Bcl-x isoform being upregulated by CoQ10 in these studies may be determined by routine methods known in the art, e.g., by using RT-PCR methods to evaluate the ratio of the two mRNA splicing isoforms (Bcl-xL vs Bcl-sL).

From the survey of apoptotic related proteins it was observed multiple pro- and anti-apoptotic factors were in the BCL-2 family or that interact with these factors have modulated expression levels (BCL2L11, BNIP2, BAG1, IIRK, BAK1, BCL2, BCL2L1). These proteins govern mitochondrial outer membrane permeabilization.

An early marker for apoptotic response is observed with the upregulation of Caspase-9 (16 hour) which is consistent with previous observations of apoptosis with caspase 3/7 proteins. Induction of stress signaling pathways causes release of cytochrome c from mitochondria and activation of apaf-1 (apoptosome), which in turn cleaves the pro-enzyme of caspase-9 into the active form. Once initiated caspase-9 goes on to cleave procaspase-3 & procaspase-7 to trigger additional apoptotic pathways.

There is also a consistent linkage to the tumor necrosis factor receptor family of proteins being modulated.

A strong down regulation of tumor protein p73 is also noted. Analyses of many tumors typically found in humans including breast and ovarian cancer show a high expression of p73 when compared to normal tissues in corresponding areas. Recent finding are suggesting that deregulated over expression of transcription factors within the body involved in cell cycle regulation and synthesis of DNA in mammalian cells (i.e.: E2F-1), induces the expression of p73. The suggestion is that p73 may be an oncoprotein, but may involve different mechanism that the related p53 protein. A schematic showing mapping of the apoptosis pathway is provided in FIGS. 13A and 13B.

SKMEL-28 Cells

From the survey of apoptotic related proteins it was observed multiple pro- and anti-apoptotic factors were in the BCL-2 family or that interact with these factors have modulated expression levels (BCL2L11, BNIP2, BAG1, HRK, BAK1, BCL2, BCL2L1). These proteins govern mitochondrial outer membrane permeabilization.

An early marker for apoptotic response is observed with the upregulation of Caspase-9 (16 hour) which is consistent with previous observations of apoptosis with caspase 3/7 proteins. Induction of stress signaling pathways causes release of cytochrome c from mitochondria and activation of apaf-1 (apoptosome), which in turn cleaves the pro-enzyme of caspase-9 into the active form. Once initiated caspase-9 goes on to cleave procaspase-3 & procaspase-7 to trigger additional apoptotic pathways.

TABLE 9 Changes in mRNA levels for SKMEL-28 cells treated with 100 μM A10, evaluated by RT-PCR arrays focused around apoptotic pathways. 6 hr 16 hr 24 hr 72 hr Refseq Description Symbol Q10 Q10 Q10 Q10 NM_006538 BCL2-like 11 BCL2L11 2.13 2.41 1.92 2.51 (apoptosis facilitator) NM_000875 Insulin-like IGF1R 1.77 1.09 1.33 1.25 growth factor 1 receptor NM_004048 Beta-2- B2M 1.74 1.76 1.58 3.11 microglobulin NM_003921 B-cell BCL10 1.55 1.87 1.48 −3.11 CLL/lymphoma 10 NM_004330 BCL2/adenovirus BNIP2 1.46 1.51 1.57 −1.61 E1B 19 kDa interacting protein 2 NM_005157 C-abl oncogene 1, ABL1 1.42 2.77 −1.22 −2.03 receptor tyrosine kinase NM_004323 BCL2-associated BAG1 1.41 1.44 −1.61 −2.45 athanogene NM_001229 Caspase 9, CASP9 1.32 3.96 1.83 1.14 apoptosis-related cysteine peptidase NM_003806 Harakiri, BCL2 HRK 1.18 4.52 2.73 −1.14 interacting protein (contains only BH3 domain) NM_001924 Growth arrest and GADD45A 1.07 3.34 1.13 −2.36 DNA-damage- inducible, alpha NM_001188 BCL2-antagonist/ BAK1 1.06 2.73 −1.00 −4.54 killer 1 NM_004295 TNF receptor- TRAF4 −1.91 2.63 −1.58 −740.66 associated factor 4 NM_003842 Tumor necrosis TNFRSF10B −2.07 1.53 −1.81 −710.49 factor receptor superfamily, member 10b NM_000633 B-cell BCL2 −2.98 −1.63 −2.82 −11.36 CLL/lymphoma 2 NM_001242 CD27 molecule CD27 −3.40 −2.38 −1.35 −12.72 NM_014430 Cell death- CIDEB −3.48 1.56 −3.69 −2.59 inducing DFFA- like effector b NM_001065 Tumor necrosis TNFRSF1A −4.53 2.28 −3.30 1.22 factor receptor superfamily, member 1A NM_005427 Tumor protein TP73 −4.66 −9.80 −8.71 −26.96 p73 NM_003844 Tumor necrosis TNFRSF10A −4.84 −5.26 −4.33 −11.84 factor receptor superfamily, member 10a NM_138578 BCL2-like 1 BCL2L1 −4.94 −1.80 −6.17 −7.04 NM_001165 Baculoviral IAP BIRC3 −13.68 −1.98 −2.42 −3.42 repeat-containing 3

There is a consistent linkage to the tumor necrosis factor receptor family of proteins being modulated.

A strong down regulation of tumor protein p73 is also noted. Analyses of many tumors typically found in humans including breast and ovarian cancer show a high expression of p73 when compared to normal tissues in corresponding areas. Recent finding are suggesting that deregulated over expression of transcription factors within the body involved in cell cycle regulation and synthesis of DNA in mammalian cells (i.e.: E2F-J), induces the expression of p73. The suggestion is that p73 may be an oncoprotein, but may involve different mechanism that the related p53 protein

Experiment 2: Real-Time PCR Arrays Using Oxidative Stress and Antioxidant Defense Array

To identify proteins that were involved in the Q10 response, real-time polymerase chain reaction (RT-PCR) methods were employed to identify changes in the level of mRNA's for genes/proteins involved in targeted pathway arrays for oxidative stress and antioxidant defense.

Table 10 below lists the genes that are regulated in SK-MEL28 cells with 100 μM Q10 treatment. Results are given only for those genes that are regulated in two independent experiments. Although there is a significant amount of gene regulation seen at 6 hours, most significant changes in RNA levels are seen at 48 hours.

TABLE 10 Genes in SK-MEL-28 cells that are regulated by 100 μM Q10 treatement as seen in the Oxidative Stress and Antioxidant Defense Arrays. Symbol Description Regulation Location Possible Functions. ALB Albumin Down Regulation Extracellular Carrier protein, anti-apoptotic at 48 hours space AOX1 Aldehyde oxidase 1 Up regulation Cytoplasm Produces free radicals, drug from 16 hours metabolic process. APOE Apolipoprotein E Down Regulation Extracellular Lipid metabolism at 48 hours space ATOX1 ATX1 antioxidant protein Down Regulation Cytoplasm Copper metabolism 1 homolog (yeast) at 48 hours BNIP3 BCL2/adenovirus E1B Down Regulation Cytoplasm Anti-apoptotic 19 kDa interacting protein 3 at 48 hours CSDE1 Cold shock domain Down Regulation Cytoplasm Transcriptional regulation. containing E1, RNA- at 48 hours binding CYBA Cytochrome b-245, alpha Down Regulation Cytoplasm Apoptotic, polypeptide at 48 hours CYGB Cytoglobin Down Regulation Cytoplasm Peroxidase, Transporter. at 48 hours DHCR24 24-dehydrocholesterol Down Regulation Cytoplasm Electron carrier, binds to TP53, reductase at 6 hours involved in apoptosis. DUOX1 Dual oxidase 1 Up Regulation at Plasma Calcium ion binding, electron 48 hours Membrane carrier. DUOX2 Dual oxidase 2 Down Regulation Unknown Calcium ion binding. at 48 hours EPHX2 Epoxide hydrolase 2, Down Regulation Cytoplasm Arachidonic acide metabolism. cytoplasmic at 48 hours EPX Eosinophil peroxidase Down Regulation Cytoplasm Phenyl alanine metabolism, at 48 hours apoptosis. GPX2 Glutathione peroxidase 2 Down Regulation Cytoplasm Electron carrier, binds to TP53, (gastrointestinal) at 48 hours involved in apoptosis. GPX3 Glutathione peroxidase 3 Up Regulation at Extracellular Arachidonic acid metabolims, (plasma) 48 hours space up regulated in carcinomas. GPX5 Glutathione peroxidase 5 Up Regulation at Extracellular Arachidonic acid metabolism. (epididymal androgen- 48 hours space related protein) GPX6 Glutathione peroxidase 6 Down Regulation Extracellular Arachidonic acid metabolism. (olfactory) at 48 hours space GSR Glutathione reductase Down Regulation Cytoplasm Glutamate and glutathione at 48 hours metabolism, apoptosis. GTF2I General transcription Down Regulation Nucleus Transcriptional activator, factor II, i at 6 hours transcription of fos. KRT1 Keratin 1 (epidermolytic Up Regulation at Cytoplasm Sugar Binding. hyperkeratosis) 48 hours LPO Lactoperoxidase Down Regulation Extracellular Phenyl alanine metabolism. at 48 hours space MBL2 Mannose-binding lectin Down Regulation Extracellular Complement signaling, pattern (protein C) 2, soluble at 48 hours space recognition in receptors. (opsonic defect) MGST3 Microsomal glutathione S- Upregulation at Cytoplasm Xenobiotic metabolism. transferase 3 16 hours MPO Myeloperoxidase Down Regulation Cytoplasm Anti-apoptotic, phenyl alanine at 48 hours metabolism. MPV17 MpV17 mitochondrial Down Regulation Cytoplasm Maintenance of mitochondrial inner membrane protein at 6 hours DNA. MT3 Metallothionein 3 Down Regulation Cytoplasm Copper ion binding. at 48 hours NCF1 Neutrophil cytosolic factor Down Regulation Cyoplasm Produces free radicals. 1, (chronic granulomatous from 6 hours disease, autosomal 1) NCF2 Neutrophil cytosolic factor Up Regulation at Cytoplasm Electron carrier. 2 (65 kDa, chronic 48 hours granulomatous disease. autosomal 2) NME5 Non-metastatic cells 5, Down Regulation Unknown Kinase, Purine and pyrimidine protein expressed in at 48 hours metabolism. (nucleoside-diphosphate kinase) NOS2A Nitric oxide synthase 2A Down Regulation Cytoplasm Glucocorticoid receptor (inducible, hepatocytes) at 48 hours signaling, apoptosis. OXR1 Oxidation resistance 1 Down Regulation Cytoplasm Responds to oxidative stress. at 48 hours PDLIM1 PDZ and LIM domain 1 Up Regulation at Cytoplasm Transcriptional activator. (elfin) 48 hours PIP3-E Phosphoinositide-binding Down Regulation Cytoplasm Peroxidase. protein PIP3-E at 48 hours PRDX2 Peroxiredoxin 2 Down Regulation Cytoplasm Role in phenyl alanine at 6 hours metabolism. Role in cell death. PRDX4 Peroxiredoxin 4 Down Regulation Cytoplasm Thioredoxin peroxidase. from 24 hours PREX1 Phosphatidylinositol 3,4,5- Down Regulation Cytoplasm Forms oxygen free radicals. trisphosphate-dependent at 48 hours RAC exchanger 1 PRG3 Proteoglycan 3 Down Regulation Extracellular Role in cell death. at 48 hours space PTGS1 Prostaglandin- Down Regulation Cytoplasm arachidonic acid metabolism, endoperoxide synthase 1 at 48 hours prostaglandin synthesis. (prostaglandin G/H synthase and cyclooxygenase) PTGS2 Prostaglandin- Up Regulation at Cytoplasm arachidonic acid metabolism, endoperoxide synthase 2 48 hours prostaglandin synthesis. (prostaglandin G/H synthase and cyclooxygenase) PXDN Peroxidasin homolog Up Regulation at Unknown binds to TRAF4, calcium ion (Drosophila) 48 hours binding, iron ion binding. PXDNL Peroxidasin homolog Down Regulation Unknown peroxidase, calcium ion (Drosophila)-like at 48 hours binding, iron ion binding. RNF7 Ring finger protein 7 Up Regulation at Nucleus apoptotic, copper ion binding, 16 hours ubiquitin pathway. SGK2 Serum/glucocorticoid Down Regulation Cytoplasm Kinase, potasium channel regulated kinase 2 at 48 hours regulator. SIRT2 Sirtuin (silent mating type Up regulation at Nucleus Transcription factor. information regulation 2 16 hours homolog) 2 (S. cerevisiae) SOD1 Superoxide dismutase 1, Up Regulation at Cytoplasm Apoptotic, Caspase Activator. soluble (amyotrophic 16 hours lateral sclerosis 1 (adult)) SOD2 Superoxide dismutase 2, Up regulation at Cytoplasm Apoptotic, Regulated by TNF. mitochondrial 16 hours SOD3 Superoxide dismutase 3, Down Regulation Extracellular Pro-apoptotic extracellular at 48 hours space SRXN1 Sulfiredoxin 1 homolog Down Regulation Cytoplasm DNA binding, oxidoreductase (S. cerevisiae) at 48 hours TPO Thyroid peroxidase Down Regulation Plasma iodination of thyroglobulin, at 48 hours Membrane tyrosine metabolism, phenylalanine metabolism. TTN Titin Down Regulation Cytoplasm Actin cytoskeleton signaling. at 48 hours integrin signaling TXNDC2 Thioredoxin domain- Down Regulation Cytoplasm Pyrimidine metabolism containing 2 at 48 hours (spermatozoa)

The Neutrophil cytosolic factor 2 (NCF2, 65 kDa, chronic granulomatous disease, autosomal 2) was one of the initial top induced mRNA's (observed at 6 hours). Subsequently at the 16 hour time point and onward, Neutrophil cytosolic factor 1 (NCF1) (chronic granulomatous disease, autosomal 1) was induced at very high levels after an initial lag phase.

Neutrophil cytosolic factor 2 is the cytosolic subunit of the multi-protein complex known as NADPH oxidase commonly found in neutrophils. This oxidase produces a burst of superoxide which is delivered to the lumen of the neutrophil phagosome.

The NADPH oxidase (nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide phosphate-oxidase) is a membrane-bound enzyme complex. It can be found in the plasma membrane as well as in the membrane of phagosome. It is made up of six subunits. These subunits are:

a Rho guanosine triphosphatase (GTPase), usually Rac1 or Rac2 (Rac stands for Rho-related C3 botulinum toxin substrate)

Five “phox” units. (Phox stands for phagocytic oxidase.)

-   -   P91-PHOX (contains heme)     -   p22phox     -   p40phox     -   p47phox (NCF1)     -   p67phox (NCF2)

It is noted that another NADPH oxidase levels do not change. The enzyme is NOX5, which is a novel NADPH oxidase that generates superoxide and functions as a H+ channel in a Ca(2+)-dependent manner

In addition Phosphatidylinositol 3,4,5-trisphosphate-dependent RAC exchanger 1 (PREX1) was also upregulated. This protein acts as a guanine nucleotide exchange factor for the RHO family of small GTP-binding proteins (RACs). It has been shown to bind to and activate RAC1 by exchanging bound GDP for free GTP. The encoded protein, which is found mainly in the cytoplasm, is activated by phosphatidylinositol-3,4,5-trisphosphate and the beta-gamma subunits of heterotrimeric G proteins.

The second major early induced protein was Nitric oxide synthase 2A (inducible, hepatocytes) (NOS2A). Nitric oxide is a reactive free radical which acts as a biologic mediator in several processes, including neurotransmission and antimicrobial and antitumoral activities. This gene encodes a nitric oxide synthase which is expressed in liver and is inducible by a combination of lipopolysaccharide and certain cytokines.

Superoxide dismutase 2, mitochondrial (SOD2) is a member of the iron/manganese superoxide dismutase family. It encodes a mitochondrial protein that forms a homotetramer and binds one manganese ion per subunit. This protein binds to the superoxide byproducts of oxidative phosphorylation and converts them to hydrogen peroxide and diatomic oxygen. Mutations in this gene have been associated with idiopathic cardiomyopathy (IDC), premature aging, sporadic motor neuron disease, and cancer.

An example of a down regulated protein is Forkhead box M1 (FOXM1), which is known to play a key role in cell cycle progression where endogenous FOXM1 expression peaks at S and G2/M phases. Recent studies have shown that FOXM1, regulates expression of a large array of G2/M-specific genes, such as Plk1, cyclin B2, Nek2 and CENPF, and plays an important role in maintenance of chromosomal segregation and genomic stability. The FOXM1 gene is now known as a human proto-oncogene. Abnormal upregulation of FOXM1 is involved in the oncogenesis of basal cell carcinoma (BCC). FOXM1 upregulation was subsequently found in the majority of solid human cancers including liver, breast, lung, prostate, cervix of uterus, colon, pancreas, and brain. Further studies with BCC and Q10 should evaluate FOXM1 levels.

SKMEL-28 Cells

Further experiments were carried out using SKMEL-28 cells. The level of mRNA present in SKMEL-28 cells treated with 100 μM Q10 were compared to the levels in untreated cells at various time points using real-time PCR methods (RT-PCR). The PCR array (SABiosciences) is a set of optimized real-time PCR primer assays on 96-well plates for pathway or disease focused genes as well as appropriate RNA quality controls. The PCR array performs gene expression analysis with real-time PCR sensitivity and the multi-gene profiling capability of a microarray.

TABLE 11 Listing and classification of mRNA levels evaluated in the Oxidative Stress and Antioxidant Defense PCR Array. After six hours of treatment with 100 μM Q10 on SKMEL-28 cells, the largest changes to the mRNA levels are indicated by highlighting the protein code (increased - bold; decreased - underlined; or no change - grey). Antioxidants: Glutathione Peroxidases (GPx): GPX1, GPX2, GPX3, GPX4, GPX5, GPX6, GPX7, GSTZ1. Peroxiredoxins (TPx): PRDX1, PRDX2, PRDX3, PRDX4, PRDX5, PRDX6. Other Peroxidases: CAT, CSDE1, CYGB, DUOX1, DUOX2, EPX, GPR156, LPO MPO, PIP3-E, PTGS1, PTGS2, PXDN, PXDNL, TPO, TTN. Other Antioxidants: ALB, APOE, GSR, MT3, SELS, SOD1, SOD3, SRXN1, TXNDC2, TXNRD1, TXNRD2. Genes Involved in Reactive Oxygen Species (ROS) Metabolism: Superoxide Dismutases (SOD): SOD1, SOD2, SOD3. Other Genes Involved in Superoxide Metabolism: ALOX12, CCS, CYBA, DUOX1, DUOX2, GTF2I, MT3, NCF1, NCF2, NOS2A, NOX5, PREX1, PRG3. Other Genes Involved in ROS Metabolism: AOX1, BNIP3, EPHX2, MPV17, SFTPD. Oxidative Stress Responsive Genes: ANGPTL7, APOE, ATOX1, CAT, CCL5, CSDE1, CYGB, DGKK, DHCR24, DUOX1, DUOX2, DUSP1, EPX, FOXM1, GLRX2, GPR156, GPX1, GPX2, GPX3, GPX4, GPX5, GPX6, GPX7, GSS, KRT1, LPO, MBL2, MPO, MSRA, MTL5, NME5, NUDT1, OXR1, OXSR1, PDLIM1, PIP3-E, PNKP, PRDX2, PRDX5, PRDX6, PRNP, RNF7, SCARA3, SELS, SEPP1, SGK2, SIRT2, SOD1, SOD2, SRXN1, STK25, TPO, TTN, TXNRD2.

TABLE 12 Time course evaluation of 100 μM treatment of SKMEL-28. The mRNA level changes were monitored by RT-PCR methods and oxidative stress and antioxidant defense proteins array was evaluated. 6 hr 16 hr 24 hr 48 hr 72 hr Refseq Symbol Description Q10 Q10 Q10 Q10 Q10 NM_000265 NCF1 Neutrophil cytosolic 0 high 3.3829 15.7838 31.5369 factor 1, (chronic granulomatous disease, autosomal 1) NM_012423 RPL13A Ribosomal protein −0.9025 3.1857 2.5492 4.9253 7.82 L13a NM_020820 PREX1 Phosphatidylinositol −3.2971 2.867 0.3222 6.3719 7.476 3,4,5-trisphosphate- dependent RAC exchanger 1 NM_012237 SIRT2 Sirtuin (silent mating −0.9025 4.0829 4.4766 5.7166 6.6257 type information regulation 2 homolog) 2 (S. cerevisiae) NM_005125 CCS Copper chaperone for −0.6206 3.0077 3.452 2.9801 6.1539 superoxide dismutase NM_181652 PRDX5 Peroxiredoxin 5 −2.995 3.0454 3.5381 4.7955 6.0169 NM_016276 SGK2 Serum/glucocorticoid 0 0 0 0.5995 5.937 regulated kinase 2 NM_003551 NME5 Non-metastatic cells 5, −0.6652 3.1138 3.3694 3.1549 5.782 protein expressed in (nucleoside-diphosphate kinase) NM_004417 DUSP1 Dual specificity −0.6998 0.5902 2.7713 3.321 5.5375 phosphatase 1 NM_001752 CAT Catalase −0.8589 2.8424 0.1046 3.8557 5.3988 NM_000041 APOE Apolipoprotein E −0.8212 3.2069 −0.9543 3.7694 5.3315 NM_000101 CYBA Cytochrome b-245, −0.3945 4.3475 3.9208 6.2452 5.0762 alpha polypeptide NM_000433 NCF2 Neutrophil cytosolic 1.2266 3.0077 0.0954 5.476 0 factor 2 (65 kDa, chronic granulomatous disease, autosomal 2) NM_000963 PTGS2 Prostaglandin-endoperoxide −0.6912 2.7046 2.6552 4.0553 −3.3022 synthase 2 (prostaglandin G/H synthase and cyclooxygenase) NM_183079 PRNP Prion protein (p27-30) −0.2144 3.5236 2.9086 5.0837 −3.9396 (Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease, Gerstmann Strausler-Scheinker syndrome, fatal familial insomnia) NM_004052 BNIP3 BCL2/adenovirus E1B −2.9376 3.3288 4.312 −18.2069 −4.8424 19 kDa interacting protein 3 NM_000242 MBL2 Mannose-binding lectin −0.3622 −1.9072 −3.0142 −1.1854 −6.4544 (protein C) 2, soluble (opsonic defect) NM_021953 FOXM1 Forkhead box M1 −0.8135 0.068 −0.9216 3.3655 −10.0953

The Neutrophil cytosolic factor 2 (NCF2, 65 kDa, chronic granulomatous disease, autosomal 2) was one of the initial top induced mRNA's (observed at 6 hours). Subsequently at the 16 hour time point and onward, Neutrophil cytosolic factor 1 (NCF1) (chronic granulomatous disease, autosomal 1) was induced at very high levels after an initial lag phase.

Neutrophil cytosolic factor 2 is the cytosolic subunit of the multi-protein complex known as NADPH oxidase commonly found in neutrophils. This oxidase produces a burst of superoxide which is delivered to the lumen of the neutrophil phagosome. The NADPH oxidase (nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide phosphate-oxidase) is a membrane-bound enzyme complex. It can be found in the plasma membrane as well as in the membrane of phagosome. It is made up of six subunits.

These subunits are:

a Rho guanosine triphosphatase (GTPase), usually Rac1 or Rac2 (Rac stands for Rho-related C3 botulinum toxin substrate)

Five “phox” (phagocytic oxidase) units.

P91-PHOX (contains heme)

p22phox

p40phox

p47phox (NCF1)

p67phox (NCF2)

It is noted that another NADPH oxidase levels do not change. The enzyme is NOX5, which is a novel NADPH oxidase that generates superoxide and functions as a H+ channel in a Ca(2+)-dependent manner

In addition Phosphatidylinositol 3,4,5-trisphosphate-dependent RAC exchanger 1 (PREX1) was also upregulated. This protein acts as a guanine nucleotide exchange factor for the RHO family of small GTP-binding proteins (RACs). It has been shown to bind to and activate RAC1 by exchanging bound GDP for free GTP. The encoded protein, which is found mainly in the cytoplasm, is activated by phosphatidylinositol-3,4,5-trisphosphate and the beta-gamma subunits of heterotrimeric G proteins.

The second major early induced protein was Nitric oxide synthase 2A (inducible, hepatocytes) (NOS2A). Nitric oxide is a reactive free radical which acts as a biologic mediator in several processes, including neurotransmission and antimicrobial and antitumoral activities. This gene encodes a nitric oxide synthase which is expressed in liver and is inducible by a combination of lipopolysaccharide and certain cytokines.

An example of a down regulated protein is FOXM1, which is known to play a key role in cell cycle progression where endogenous FOXM1 expression peaks at S and G2/M phases. Recent studies have shown that FOXM1, regulates expression of a large array of G2/M-specific genes, such as Plk1, cyclin B2, Nek2 and CENPF, and plays an important role in maintenance of chromosomal segregation and genomic stability. The FOXM1 gene is now known as a human proto-oncogene. Abnormal upregulation of FOXM1 is involved in the oncogenesis of basal cell carcinoma (BCC). FOXM1 upregulation was subsequently found in the majority of solid human cancers including liver, breast, lung, prostate, cervix, uterus, colon, pancreas, and brain.

Experiment 3: Real-Time PCR Arrays Using Heat Shock Array

Heat Shock Arrays were run for SCC cells and the data of regulated genes is summarized below in Table 13.

TABLE 13 Genes from the Heat Shock Protein array regulated with 100 μM Q10 treatment in SCC cells. Symbol Description Regulation. Location. Possible functions. CCT6B Chaperonin Down regulated Cytoplasm Protein folding and protein containing TCP1, at 24 hours complex assembly. subunit 6B (zeta 2) DNAJA1 DnaJ (Hsp40) Up regulated at 6 Nucleus Responds to DNA damage homolog, subfamily hours. and changes in protein A, member 1 folding. DNAJB13 DnaJ (Hsp40) Down regulated Unknown Protein folding and apoptosis. related, subfamily B, at 6 hours. member 13 DNAJB5 DnaJ (Hsp40) Down regulated Unknown Binds to HSP, involved in homolog, subfamily at 6 hours. protein folding and in protein B, member 5 complex assembly. DNAJC12 DnaJ (Hsp40) Down regulated Unknown Binds to HSP, involved in homolog, subfamily at 6 hours. protein folding and in protein C, member 12 complex assembly. DNAJC4 DnaJ (Hsp40) Down regulated Cytoplasm Binds to HSP, involved in homolog, subfamily at 6 hours. protein folding and in protein C, member 4 complex assembly. DNAJC5B DnaJ (Hsp40) Down regulated Unknown Involved in protein folding homolog, subfamily at 6 hours. responds to changes in protein C, member 5 beta folding. HSPA8 Heat shock 70 kDa Up regulated at 6 Cytoplasm Regulates TNF, binds BAG1, protein 8 hours. STUB1, TP53, involved in apoptosis. HSPH1 Heat shock Up regulated at 6 Cytoplasm Binds to HSPA8, important 105 kDa/110 kDa hours. for protein folding, responds protein 1 to protein unfolding and stress.

Experiment 4: Real-Time PCR Arrays Using Diabetes Array

The experiments described in this example were performed to test the overall hypothesis that Q10 would have an impact on multiple genes and alter the metabolic state of a cell. The mRNA from SKMEL-28 cells treated with 100 μM Q10 was evaluated by RT-PCR against a panel of target proteins involved in diabetes and related pathways. Results from this experiment demonstrate that several proteins involved in glycolyic pathways and insulin processing are altered in their mRNA expression levels (summarized in Table 14).

TABLE 14 Major mRNA level changes to SKMEL-28 cells treated with 100 μM Q10 for 16 hours. Fold Change after 16 hours (100 μM Refseq Description Symbol Q10) NM_000162 Glucokinase (hexokinase 4) GCK 8.5386 NM_178849 Hepatocyte nuclear factor 4, HNF4A 8.421 alpha NM_005249 Forkhead box G1 FOXG1 4.6396 NM_000599 Insulin-like growth factor IGFBP5 2.2721 binding protein 5 NM_001101 Actin, beta ACTB −2.0936 NM_002863 Phosphorylase, glycogen; liver PYGL −2.65 (Hers disease, glycogen storage disease type VI) NM_001065 Tumor necrosis factor receptor TNFRSF1A −2.8011 superfamily, member 1A NM_021158 Tribbles homolog 3 TRIB3 −2.8011 (Drosophila) NM_003749 Insulin receptor substrate 2 IRS2 −2.9404 NM_004578 RAB4A, member RAS RAB4A −3.1296 oncogene family NM_004176 Sterol regulatory element SREBF1 −3.5455 binding transcription factor 1 NM_004969 Insulin-degrading enzyme IDE −4.4878 NM_005026 Phosphoinositide-3-kinase, PIK3CD −6.8971 catalytic, delta polypeptide NM_000208 Insulin receptor INSR −8.6099 NM_003376 Vascular endothelial growth VEGFA −15.5194 factor A NM_001315 Mitogen-activated protein kinase MAPK14 −74.3366 14

The results of this initial experiment show that the mRNA levels for a variety of insulin related proteins were modulated in both directions. The results indicate that Q10 would have an impact on diabetic disease treatment and/or evaluation.

Further experiments were next conducted to confirm the results above obtained from SK-MEL-28 cells treated with Q10. Many of the genes in SK-MEL-28 cells are regulated as early as 6 hours after Q10 treatment. However, the initial regulation becomes less evident by 16 and 24 hours. Around 48 hours, we find that many of the genes in the Diabetes array are again strongly regulated. Results that are consistent from two or more or independent experiments are summarized below in Table 15. SCC cells also appeared to exhibit regulation in some genes, both at 6 and 24 hours after Q10 treatment. These results from SCC cells are summarized in Table 16 while genes that are regulated both in SK-MEL-28 cells and in SCC cells are summarized in Table 17.

TABLE 15 Genes in SK-MEL-28 cells regulated by 100 μM Q10 treatment when analyzed by the Diabetes Array. Symbol Description Regulation. Location Possible Function ADRB3 Adrenergic, beta-3-, receptor Down Regulated at Plasma cAMP signaling, G- 48 hours membrane protein signaling CEACAM1 Carcinoembryonic antigen- Down Regulated at Extracellular Anti-apoptotic, related cell adhesion 48 hours space positive regulation of molecule 1 (biliary angiogenesis. glycoprotein) CEBPA CCAAT/enhancer binding Up regulated at 48 Nucleus Glucocorticoid protein (C/EBP), alpha hours receptor signaling, VDR/RXR activation. CTLA4 Cytotoxic T-lymphocyte- Down Regulated at Plasma T cell receptor associated protein 4 48 hours Membrane signaling, activates CASP8. DUSP4 Dual specificity phosphatase 4 Down Regulated at Nucleus Phosphatase 48 hours ENPP1 Ectonucleotide Down Regulated at Plasma Negative regulator of pyrophosphatase/phosphodiesterase 1 48 hours membrane the insulin receptor pathway FOXC2 Forkhead box C2 (MFH-1, Down Regulated at Nucleus Anti-apoptotic, mesenchyme forkhead 1) 48 hours transcription factor G6PD Glucose-6-phosphate Up regulated at 48 Cytoplasm Pentose Phosphate dehydrogenase hours, then down Pathway, Glutathione regulated metabolism. HMOX1 Heme oxygenase (decycling) 1 Down Regulated at Cytoplasm Heme oxygenase 48 hours decycling ICAM1 Intercellular adhesion Down Regulated at Plasma Regulated by molecule 1 (CD54), human 48 hours membrane atorvastatin, rhinovirus receptor processes some caspases. IL4R Interleukin 4 receptor Down Regulated at Plasma Up regulation by 48 hours membrane TP73, binds to IRS1 and IRS2 IRS1 Insulin receptor substrate 1 Up regulated at 48 Plasma Binds Insulin hours then down membrane receptor regulated IRS2 Insulin receptor substrate 2 Down Regulated at Plasma IGF-1 signaling 48 hours membrane NSF N-ethylmaleimide-sensitive Down Regulated at Cytoplasm GABA signaling factor 48 hours PIK3CD Phosphoinositide-3-kinase, Down Regulated at Cytoplasm Kinase catalytic, delta polypeptide 48 hours PPARG Peroxisome proliferator- Down Regulated at Nucleus Transcriptional factor activated receptor gamma 48 hours PRKCB1 Protein kinase C, beta 1 Down Regulated at Cytoplasm PKC family 48 hours SELL Selectin L (lymphocyte Down Regulated at Plasma Activates RAS, adhesion molecule 1) 48 hours membrane MAPK SREBF1 Sterol regulatory element Up regulated at 48 Nucleus Transcriptional factor binding transcription factor 1 hours then down regulated STXBP1 Syntaxin binding protein 1 Down Regulated at Cytoplasm Present in myelin 48 hours enriched fraction. TGFB1 Transforming growth factor, Up regulated at 48 Extracellular Pro-apoptotic beta 1 hours then down space regulated NKX2-1 NK2 homeobox 1 Down Regulated at Nucleus Transcriptional 48 hours activator TNF Tumor necrosis factor (TNF Up regulated at 48 Extracellular Pro-apoptotic superfamily, member 2) hours space TNFRSF1A Tumor necrosis factor Down Regulated at Plasma Pro-apoptotic receptor superfamily, 72 hours membrane member 1A VEGFA Vascular endothelial growth Up regulated at 58 Cytoplasm Kinase factor A hours then down regulated

TABLE 16 Genes in SCC cells regulated by 100 μM Q10 treatment when analyzed by the Diabetes Array. Symbol Description Regulation. G6PD Glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase Down regulated at 6 hours. ICAM1 Intercellular adhesion molecule 1 (CD54), Down regulated at 6 hours. human rhinovirus receptor INPPL1 Inositol polyphosphate phosphatase-like 1 Down regulated at 6 hours. NOS3 Nitric oxide synthase 3 (endothelial cell) Down regulated at 6 hours. PIK3CD Phosphoinositide-3-kinase, catalytic, delta Down regulated at 6 hours. polypeptide PPARA Peroxisome proliferative activated receptor, Down regulated at 6 hours. alpha PYGL Phosphorylase, glycogen; liver (Hers disease, Down regulated at 6 hours. glycogen storage disease type VI) SREBF1 Sterol regulatory element binding Down regulated at 6 hours. transcription factor 1 STXBP2 Syntaxin binding protein 2 Down regulated at 6 hours. TNF Tumor necrosis factor (TNF superfamily, Down regulated at 6 hours. member 2) TNFRSF1A Tumor necrosis factor receptor superfamily, Down regulated at 6 and 24 member 1A hours. VEGFA Vascular endothelial growth factor A Down regulated at 6 hours.

TABLE 17 Genes from the diabetes array regulated with 100 μM Q10 treatment for both SK-MEL-28 and SCC cells. Symbol Description. G6PD Glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase ICAM1 Intercellular adhesion molecule 1 (CD54), human rhinovirus receptor PIK3CD Phosphoinositide-3-kinase, catalytic, delta polypeptide SREBF1 Sterol regulatory element binding transcription factor 1 TNF Tumor necrosis factor (TNF superfamily, member 2) TNFRSF1A Tumor necrosis factor receptor superfamily, member 1A VEGFA Vascular endothelial growth factor A

The mRNA levels for a variety of insulin related proteins were modulated in both directions. Q10 has an impact on regulation of cellular metabolism, and thus influences metabolic disregluation diseases such as diabetes. Two proteins that were significantly modulated are further discussed below.

Mitogen-Activated Protein Kinase 14 (MAPK14):

Mitogen-activated protein kinase 14 (MAPK14) is a member of the MAP kinase family. MAP kinases act as an integration point for multiple biochemical signals, and are involved in a wide variety of cellular processes such as proliferation, differentiation, transcription regulation and development. Results from this experiment show that the MAPK14 was significantly down-regulated.

Hepatocyte Nuclear Factor 4, Alpha (HNF4A):

HNF4 (Hepatocyte Nuclear Factor 4) is a nuclear receptor protein mostly expressed in the liver, gut, kidney, and pancreatic beta cells that is critical for liver development. In humans, there are two isoforms of NHF4, alpha and gamma encoded by two separate genes HNF4A and HNF4G respectively. (See, e.g., Chartier F L, Bossu J P, Laudet V, Fruchart J C, Laine B (1994). “Cloning and sequencing of cDNAs encoding the human hepatocyte nuclear factor 4 indicate the presence of two isoforms in human liver”. Gene 147 (2): 269-72.)

HNF4 was originally classified as an orphan receptor. However HNF4 was found later to be constitutively active by virtue of being continuously bound to a variety of fatty acids. (See, e.g., Sladek F (2002). “Desperately seeking . . . something”. Mol Cell 10 (2): 219-221 and Jump D B, Botolin D, Wang Y, Xu J, Christian B, Demeure O (2005). “Fatty acid regulation of hepatic gene transcription”. J Nutr 135 (11)). The ligand binding domain of HNF4, as with other nuclear receptors, adopts a canonical alpha helical sandwich fold (see, e.g., Wisely G B, Miller A B, Davis R G, Thornquest A D Jr, Johnson R, Spitzer T, Sefler A, Shearer B, Moore J T, Miller A B, Willson T M, Williams S P (2002). “Hepatocyte nuclear factor 4 is a transcription factor that constitutively binds fatty acids”. Structure 10 (9): 1225-34 and Dhe-Paganon S, Duda K, Iwamoto M, Chi Y I, Shoelson S E (2002). “Crystal structure of the HNF4 alpha ligand binding domain in complex with endogenous fatty acid ligand”. J Biol Chem 277 (41): 37973-6) and interacts with co-activator proteins. (See, e.g., Duda K, Chi Y I, Shoelson S E (2004). “Structural basis for HNF-4alpha activation by ligand and coactivator binding”. J Biol Chem 279 (22): 23311-6).

Mutations in the HNF4-α gene have been linked to maturity onset diabetes of the young (MODY). (See, e.g., Fajans S S, Bell G I, Polonsky K S (2001). “Molecular mechanisms and clinical pathophysiology of maturity-onset diabetes of the young”. N Engl J Med 345 (13): 971-80.)

Hepatocyte nuclear factor 4 (HNF4) is a tissue-specific transcription factor known to regulate a large number of genes in hepatocytes and pancreatic cells. Although HNF4 is highly expressed in some sections of the kidney, little is known about its role in this organ and about HNF4-regulated genes in the kidney cells. The abundance and activity of HNF4 are frequently reduced in renal cell carcinoma (RCC) indicating some tumor suppressing function of HNF4 in renal cells. Interestingly, many of the genes regulated by HNF4 have been shown to be deregulated in RCC microarray studies. These genes (ACY1, WT1, SELENBP1, COBL, EFHD1, AGXT2L1, ALDH5A1, THEM2, ABCB1, FLJ14146, CSPG2, TRIM9 and HEY1) are good candidates for genes whose activity is changed upon the decrease of HNF4 in RCC.

In the structure of the ligand binding domain of HNF4alpha (1M7W.pdb; Dhe-Paganon (2002) JBC, 277, 37973); a small lipid was observed and which co-purified from E. coli production. The crystal contains two conformations of the protein, where the elongated helix 10 and short helix 12 have alternate conformations. Upon examination of the lipid binding region, it was interesting to observe that there are two exits regions. One exit region holds the small lipids head group, and it is noted that several pocket regions are co-localized with this exit port. A hypothesis would be that Q10 binds specifically to this transcription factor. When Q10 in modeled into this lipid binding tunnel, the Q10 ring would fit into the surface pocket (FIG. 28). A known loss-of-function mutation (E276Q) would have the potential to order the residues lining this surface pocket, and thus have a negative impact on the putative Q10 binding.

In addition, with this Q10 binding model, the hydrophobic tail would extend out of the internal cavity and would then interact with the elongated helix 10. Thus, this interaction could potential alter the conformation of the helix 10/12 group. This may then alter the activation/inactivation equilibrium of the transcription factor activity.

Example 7: Antibody MicroArray Analysis

The evaluation of protein concentration due to the presence of Q10 was evaluated through the utilization of antibody microarray methods. The microarray contained antibodies for over 700 proteins, sampling a broad range of protein types and potential pathway markers.

An initial experiment to assess changes at the protein concentration level in cells treated with Q10 was conducted with an antibody microarray (Panorama XP725 Antibody Array, Sigma) and SK-MEL-28 cells treated for 6 or 24 hour. The cells were harvested and extracted to obtain a soluble protein supernatant. Two portions of protein (˜1 mg total) from each sample (at 1 mg/mL) were each label with fluorescent dye (Cy3 and Cy5, respectively). The excess dye was removed from the protein and the material utilized for the microarray incubations. To compare two time point samples, equal amounts of protein were mixed, with each sample being of the different label type (e.g., 3 hour extract labeled with Cy3 was mixed with the 24 hour extract labeled with Cy5). After incubation with the microarray chip (according to manufactures recommended protocols), the chips were washed and dried. The microarrays were scanned with a fluorescent laser scanner to measure the relative fluorescence intensity of the Cy3 and Cy5 dyes.

TABLE 18 Proteins with increased levels in SK-MEL-28 cells after 24 hour treatment with 50 μM Q10 Name Ratio Cdk1 0.1 DcR1 0.1 Protein Kinase Cb2 0.1 Tumor Necrosis Factor Soluble 0.1 Receptor II BAD 0.1 Caspase13 0.2 FBI1 PAKEMON 0.2 Zyxin 0.2 Cdc25A 0.3 PIASx 0.3 Nerve Growth Factor b 0.3 Protein Tyrosine Phosphatase 0.3 PEST hBRM hSNF2a 0.4 GRP94 0.4 Calmodulin 0.4 Serine Threonine Protein 0.4 Phosphatase 2C a b ARC 0.4 NeurabinII 0.4 Nitric Oxide Synthase bNOS 0.4 Serine Threonine Protein 0.4 Phosphatase 1b Heat Shock Protein 110 0.4 Serine Threonine Protein 0.4 Phosphatase Ig1 COX II 0.5 HSP70 0.5 BLK 0.5 Cytokeratin 8 12 0.5 BUBR1 0.5 FOXC2 0.5 Serine Threonine Protein 0.5 Phosphatase 2 A Bg MSH6 0.5 DR6 0.5 Rad17 0.5 BAF57 0.5 Transforming Growth Factorb 0.5 pan BTK 0.5 SerineThreonine Protein 0.5 Phosphatase 2 A/B pan2 CNPase 0.5 SynCAM 0.5 Proliferating Cell Nuclear 0.5 Antigen

TABLE 19 Proteins with increased levels in SK-MEL-28 cells after 24 hour treatment with 50 μM Q10 Name Ratio BclxL 4.2 BID 3.7 Bmf 3.7 PUMA bbc3 3.0 Zip Kinase 2.8 Bmf 2.8 DcR2 2.7 E2F1 2.7 FAK pTyr577 2.5 FKHRL1 FOXO3a 2.5 MTBP 2.5 Connexin 32 2.5 Annexin VII 2.4 p63 2.4 SUMO1 2.4 1Afadin 2.3 MDMX 2.3 Pyk2 2.3 RIP Receptor Interacting Protein 2.3 RICK 2.3 IKKa 2.3 Bclx 2.3 Afadin 2.2 Proliferating Cell Protein Ki67 2.2 Histone H3 pSer28 2.2 CASK LIN2 2.2 Centrin 2.2 TOM22 2.1 Nitric Oxide Synthase Endothelial 2.1 eNOS Protein Kinase Ba 2.1 Laminin 2.1 Myosin 1b Nuclear 2.1 Caspase 7 2.1 MAP Kinase 2 ERK2 2.1 KIF17 2.1 Claspin 2.1 GRP75 2.1 Caspase 6 2.1 ILP2 2.1 aActinin 2.1 Vitronectin 2.1 DRAK1 2.1 PTEN 2.1 Grb2 2.1 HDAC4 2.0 HDAC7 2.0 Nitric Oxide Synthase bNOS 2.0 HDAC2 2.0 p38 MAPK 2.0 Reelin 2.0 Protein Kinase Cd 2.0 cerbB3 2.0 hSNF5 INI1 2.0 Protein Kinase Ca 2.0 Glutamate receptor NMDAR 2a 2.0 Leptin 2.0 Dimethyl Histone H3 diMeLys4 2.0 BID 2.0 MeCP2 2.0 Nerve growth factor receptor p75 2.0 Myosin Light Chain Kinase 2.0 cRaf pSer621 2.0 GRP78 BiP 2.0 cMyc 2.0 Raf1 2.0 MTA2 MTA1L 2.0 Sir2 2.0 ATF2 pThr69 71 2.0 Protein Kinase C 2.0 Protein Kinase Cb2 2.0

In order to confirm the previously observed apoptosis proteins, and to expand the evaluation into a larger number of pro-apoptosis and anti-apoptosis proteins, two assay methods were chosen which were capable of screening the broad family of proteins potentially involved.

First, an antibody micro array (Panorama XP725 Antibody Array, Sigma) was utilized to screen over 700 protein antibodies to assess changes at the protein concentration level in SK-MEL-28 cells treated for 24 hours with 50 μM Q10.

From the Antibody array experiments, on SKMEL-28 with Q10 (24 hr), the following are some of the identified proteins with altered levels: Bcl-xl, Bmf, BTK, BLK, cJun (pSer63), Connexin 32, PUMA bbc3, BID, Par4, cCb1. The key conclusion from this initial study was that the expected pro-apoptosis proteins are altered.

Antibody Microarray for SK-MEL-28

An antibody micro array (Panorama XP725 Antibody Array, Sigma) was utilized to screen over 700 protein antibodies to assess changes at the protein concentration level in SK-MEL-28 cells treated for 24 hours with 50 μM Q10.

TABLE 20 Changes in protein levels in SKMEL-28 treated with 50 μM Q10 SKMEL28 HEKa Antibody Q10/ SKMEL28/ Q10/ Number SKMEL28 HEKa HEKa Name (Sigma) control control control BclxL B9429 2.46 1.04 1.83 PUMA bbc3 P4743 2.31 1.14 2.14 Bmf B1559 2.23 1.12 2.11 Bmf B1684 2.09 1.13 1.74 cJun pSer63 J2128 1.99 1.14 1.85 BLK B8928 1.94 1.05 1.51

From the Antibody array experiments, on SKMEL-28 with Q10 (24 hr), the following are some of the identified proteins with altered levels: Bcl-xl, Bmf, BTK, BLK, cJun (pSer63), Connexin 32, PUMA bbc3, BID, Par4, cCb1. These data confirm that the levels of pro-apoptosis proteins are altered upon incubation with elevated levels of exogenously added Q10.

Bcl-xl (“Basal cell lymphoma-extra large”) is a transmembrane molecule in the mitochondria. It is involved in the signal transduction pathway of the FAS-L and is one of several anti-apoptotic proteins which are members of the Bcl-2 family of proteins. It has been implicated in the survival of cancer cells. However, it is known that alternative splicing of human Bcl-x mRNA may result in at least two distinct Bcl-x mRNA species, Bcl-xL and Bcl-xS. The predominant protein product (233 amino acids) is the larger Bcl-x mRNA, Bcl-xL, which inhibits cell death upon growth factor withdrawal (Boise et al., 1993. Cell 74, 597-608). Bcl-xS, on the other hand, inhibits the ability of Bcl-2 to inhibit cell death and renders cells more susceptible to apoptotic cell death.

TABLE 21 Proteins with increased levels in SCC cells after 24 hour treatment with 100 μM Q10. Name Ratio PUMA bbc3 3.81 HDAC7 3.21 BID 3.12 MTBP 3.00 p38 MAP Kinase 2.93 NonActivated PKR 2.87 TRAIL 2.86 DR5 2.86 Cdk3 2.82 NCadherin 2.71 Reelin 2.68 p35 Cdk5 Regulator 2.63 HDAC10 2.60 RAP1 2.59 PSF 2.56 cMyc 2.55 methyl Histone H3 2.54 MeLys9 HDAC1 2.51 F1A 2.48 ROCK1 2.45 Bim 2.45 FXR2 2.44 DEDAF 2.44 DcR1 2.40 APRIL 2.40 PRMT1 2.36 Pyk2 pTyr580 2.34 Vitronectin 2.33 Synaptopodin 2.32 Caspase13 2.30 Syntaxin 8 2.29 DR6 2.29 BLK 2.28 ROCK2 2.28 Sir2 2.25 DcR3 2.24 RbAp48 RbAp46 2.21 OGlcNAc Transferase 2.21 GRP78 BiP 2.20 Sin3A 2.20 p63 2.20 Presenilin1 2.19 PML 2.18 PAK1pThr212 2.17 HDAC8 2.16 HDAC6 2.15 Nitric Oxide Synthase 2.15 Inducible iNOS Neurofibromin 2.15 Syntaxin 6 2.13 Parkin 2.12 Rad17 2.11 Nitric Oxide Synthase bNOS 2.10 TIS7 2.09 OP18 Stathmin (stathmin 2.08 1/oncoprotein 18) phospho-b-Catenin pSer45 2.07 NeurabinII 2.07 e Tubulin 2.07 PKB pThr308 2.07 Ornithine Decarboxylase 2.07 P53 BP1 2.06 Pyk2 2.05 HDAC5 2.05 Connexin 43 2.05 a1Syntrophin 2.04 MRP1 2.04 cerbB4 2.03 S Nitrosocysteine 2.03 SGK 2.02 Rab5 2.01 Ubiquitin Cterminal Hydrolase 2.01 L1 Myosin Ib Nuclear 2.00 Par4 Prostate Apoptosis 2.00 Response 4

TABLE 22 Proteins with reduced levels in SCC cells after 24 hour treatment with 100 μM Q10. Name Ratio AP1 0.68 Centrin 0.55 CUGBP1 0.67 Cystatin A 0.69 Cytokeratin CK5 0.60 Fibronectin 0.63 gParvin 0.70 Growth Factor Independence1 0.63 Nerve Growth Factor b 0.60 ProCaspase 8 0.72 Rab7 0.62 Rab9 0.73 Serine Threonine Protein Phosphatase 1g1 0.71 Serine Threonine Protein Phosphatase 2 A 0.73 Bg SKM1 0.70 SLIPR MAGI3 0.67 Spectrin a and b 0.70 Spred2 0.66 TRF1 0.74

Example 8: Western Blot Analysis

The first experiment processed and evaluated by Western blot and 2-D gel electrophoresis was carried out on the skin cancer cell line SKMEL-28. This experimental set involved SK-MEL-28 cells treated at 3, 6, 12, and 24 hours with 50 or 100 μM Q10.

A variety of cell types were evaluated by Western blot analysis against an antibody for Bcl-xL (FIG. 14), an antibody for Vimentin (FIG. 15), a series of antibodies for mitochondrial oxidative phosphorylation function (FIGS. 16-21) and against a series of antibodies related to mitochondrial membrane integrity (FIGS. 22-27). The results from these experiments demonstrated that several of the examined proteins were upregulated or downregulated as a result of cell treatment with Q10.

Example 9: Diabetes Related Genes Identified as being Modulated at the mRNA Level by Treatment of Pancreatic Cancer Cells (PaCa2) with 100 um Q10

Diabetes arrays were run for samples treated with 100 uM Q10 at various times after treatment. Experiments were carried out essentially as described above. The various genes found to be modulated upon Q10 treatment are summarized in Table 23 below. The results showed that the following genes are modulated by Q10 treatment: ABCC8, ACLY, ADRB3, CCL5, CEACAM1, CEBRA, FOXG1, FOXP3, G6PD, GLP1R, GPD1, HNF4A, ICAM1, IGFBP5, INPPL1, IRS2, MAPK14, ME1, NFKB1, PARP1, PIK3C2B, PIK3CD, PPARGC1B, PRKAG2, PTPN1, PYGL, SLC2A4, SNAP25, HNF1B, TNRFSF1A, TRIB3, VAPA, VEGFA, IL4R and IL6.

TABLE 23 Genes from the diabetes array whose expression is regulated with 100 μM Q10 and their possible functions in a cell. Up-regulated (bold) and down-regulated (regular). Gene Name Gene Function. ADRB cAMP signaling, G-protein signaling CCL5 Natural ligands for CCR5 and is regulated by TNF. CEACAM1 Anti-apoptotic, positive regulation of angiogenesis. GLPR1 Increases Insulin and decreases glucagon secretion from the pancreas. GPD1 Carbohydrate metabolism, NADH oxidation. ICAM1 Regulated by atorvastatin, processes some caspases. MAPK14 DNA damage checkpoint, angiogenesis, glucose metabolic process. PARP1 DNA repair, regulates TP53, NOS2A, NFKB, telomere maintenance. PIK3C2B Phosphoinositide mediated signaling, regulates AKT and AKT1. PIK3CD Kinase PYGL carbohydrate metabolism, regulates glycogen and glycogen synthase. SLC2A4 regulates glucose and is regulated by INS and insulin. SNAP25 regulation of insulin secretion, nerotransmitter uptake. CEBPA Glucocorticoid receptor signaling, VDR/RXR activation. FOXP3 Regulates IL4, 1L2. G6PD Pentose Phosphate Pathway, Glutathione metabolism. IGFBP5 Regulation of cell growth, regulated by IGF1 INPPL1 Regulates Akt and glycogen. IRS2 IGF-1 signaling ME1 Regulates malic acid and is regulated by T3. NFKB1 Regulates IL6 and TNF. PPARGC1B Regulated by MAPK14 PRKAG2 Fatty acid, cholesterol biosynthesis. PTPN1 dephosphorylates JAK2 and EGFreceptor kinase. VEGFA Kinase, angiogenesis. IL4R Up regulation by TP73, binds to IRS1 and IRS2 HNF1B HNF4A TNFRSF1A Pro-apoptotic TRIB3 Regulates AKT1 and negative regulator of NFkB. VAPA Regulates NFkB, vesicle trafficking.

Example 10: Angiogenesis Related Genes Identified as being Modulated at the mRNA Level by Treatment of Pancreatic Cancer Cells (PaCa2) with 100 μM Q10

Angiogenesis arrays were run for samples treated with 100 uM Q10 at various times after treatment. Experiments were carried out essentially as described above. The various genes found to be modulated upon Q10 treatment are summarized in Table 24 below. The results showed that the following genes are modulated by Q10 treatment: AKT1, ANGPTL4, ANGPEP, CCL2, CDH4, CXCL1, EDG1, EFNA3, EFNB2, EGF, FGF1, ID3, IL1B, IL8, KDR, NRP1, PECAM1, PROK2, SERPINF1, SPHK1, STAB1, TGFB1, VEGFA and VEGFB.

TABLE 24 A list of genes from the angiogenesis array whose expression is regulated with 100 μM Q10 and their possible functions in a cell. Up-regulated (bold) and down-regulated (regular). Gene Gene Function. ANGPTL4 antiangiogenesis, negative regulator of apoptosis, lipid metabolism. CDH5 blood vessel maturation, cell-adhesion, negative regulator of cell proliferation. FGF1 Cell adhesion, cell proliferation. AKT1 carbohydrate metabolic process, glycogen biosynthetic process, glucose metabolic process, insulin receptor signaling pathway, activation of pro- apoptotic gene products, apoptotic mitochondrial changes ANPEP proteolysis, multicellular organismal development, cell differentiation CCL2 chemotaxis, anti-apoptosis, JAK-STAT cascade, organ morphogenesis, viral genome replication CXCL1 chemotaxis, inflammatory response, immune response, negative regulation of cell proliferation, actin cytoskeleton organization and biogenesis. EDG1 positive regulation of cell proliferation, transmission of nerve impulse, regulation of cell adhesion, neuron differentiation, positive regulation of cell migration, positive regulation of Ras EFNB2 cell-cell signaling, regulated by VEGFA. EGF activation of MAPKK activity, positive regulation of mitosis, DNA replication ILIB response to glucocorticoid stimulus, apoptosis, signal transduction, cell- cell signaling, negative regulation of cell proliferation IL8 cell cycle arrest KDR VEGF pathway, regulated by AKT. NRP1 cell adhesion, signal transduction, cell-cell signaling, cell proliferation, regulated by VEGFA PECAM1 cell adhesion, regulated by TNF. PROK2 activation of MAPK, anti-apoptosis, cell proliferation, regulates AKT, SPHK1 anti-apoptosis, cell proliferation, regulates mitosis, cell migration. STAB1 inflammatory response, cell adhesion, receptor-mediated endocytosis, cell-cell signaling, negative regulation of angiogenesis, defense response to bacterium VEGFA anti-apoptosis, regulates TNF, regulated by HIF1.

Example 11: Apoptosis Related Genes Identified as being Modulated at the mRNA Level by Treatment of Pancreatic Cancer Cells (PaCa2) with 100 μM Q10

Apoptosis arrays were run for samples treated with 100 uM Q10 at various times after treatment. Experiments were carried out essentially as described above. The various genes found to be modulated upon Q10 treatment are summarized in Table 25 below. The results showed that the following genes are modulated by Q10 treatment: ABL1, AKT1, Bcl2L1, BclAF1, CASP1, CASP2, CASP6, CIDEA, FADD, LTA, TNF, TNFSF10A and TNFSF10.

TABLE 25 A list of genes from the apoptosis array whose expression is regulated with 100 μM Q10 and their possible functions in a cell. Up-regulated (bold) and down-regulated (regular). Gene Gene Function. CASP1 Pro-Apoptotic, Regulates IL1B, regulated by TNF. CASP6 Pro-Apoptotic, regulates PARP, MCL1, APP TNF cell proliferation, differentiation, apoptosis, lipid metabolism, and coagulation TNFSF10 Pro-Apoptotic, regulates caspases. ABL1 Regulates Bcl2L1, TP53, Pro-apoptotic, actin cytoskeleon organization and biogenesis. AKT1 Prop-apoptotic, apoptotic mitochondrial changes, carbohydrate transport, response to heat, glucose metabolism, IGF signaling pathway. BclAF1 Pro-Apoptotic. Bcl2L1 Anti-Apoptotic, release of cytochrome c from mitochondria, regulates Caspases, binds to BAD, BAX, BCl2L11 CASP2 Anti-Apoptotic. CIDEA Pro-Apoptotic FADD Pro-Apoptotic LTA Pro-Apoptotic TNFSF10A Caspase Activator

Example 12: PCR Diabetes Arrays on Liver Cancer (HepG2) Cells

HepG2 (liver cancer) cells were treated with either the vehicle for 24 hours or 100 μM Q10 for different times. The treatment was initiated on 1×105 cells per well, following the procedure utilized in the PaCa2 cells (above, Examples 9-11). However, the total amount of RNA that was extracted from these samples was lower than expected. Reverse transcription is normally done using 1 μg of total RNA (determined by measurement at 260 nm). The maximum volume that can be used per reverse transcription is 8 μl. Since the RNA concentration was low, the RT-PCR array analysis using the vehicle, and Q10 treated samples from 16 hours and 48 hours was performed using 0.44 μg of RNA. The arrays provided an initial analysis of trends and patterns in HepG2 gene regulation with 100 μM Q10 treatment, as summarized in Table 26 below. The results showed that each of the genes PPARGC1A, PRKAA1 and SNAP25 were downregulated at 16 hours following treatment (by approximately 20 fold, 6 fold and 5 fold, respectively). At 48 hours following treatment, PPARGC1A and PRKAA1 had normalized or were slightly upregulated, while SNAP25 was downregulated by approximately 2 fold.

TABLE 26 List of genes regulated in the Diabetes Arrays when HepG2 cells were treated with 100 μM Q10. Gene Gene name Gene Function. PPARGC1A peroxisome proliferator- Involved in cell death, activated receptor proliferation, cellular respiration gamma, coactivator I and transmembrane potential. alpha PRKAA1 protein kinase, AMP- Regulates TP53 and is involved activated, alpha 1 in apoptosis, regulates catalytic subunit glycolysis, regulates metabolic enzyme activities. SNAP25 synaptosomal-associated Plays in transport, fusion, protein, 25 kDa exocytosis and release of molecules.

Example 13: PCR Angiogenesis Array on Liver Cancer (HEPG2) Cells

HepG2 (liver cancer) cells were treated with either the vehicle for 24 hours or 100 μM Q10 for different times. The treatment was initiated on 1×105 cells per well, following the procedure utilized in the PaCa2 cells (above Examples 9-11). However, the total amount of RNA that was extracted from these samples was lower than expected. Reverse transcription is normally done using 1 μg of total RNA (determined by measurement at 260 nm). The maximum volume that can be used per reverse transcription is 8 μl. Since the RNA concentration was low, the RT-PCR array analysis using the vehicle, and Q10 treated samples from 16 hours and 48 hours was performed using 0.44 μg of RNA. The arrays provided an initial analysis of trends and patterns in HepG2 gene regulation with 100 μM Q10 treatment, as summarized in Table 27 below. The various genes found to be modulated upon Q10 treatment are summarized in Table 27 below. The results showed that each of the genes ANGPTL3, ANGPTL4, CXCL1, CXCL3, CXCL5, ENG, MMP2 and TIMP3 were upregulated at 16 hours following treatment (by approximately 5.5, 3, 3, 3.2, 3, 3, 1 and 6.5 fold, 6 fold and 5 fold, respectively, over that of control). 1D3 was downregulated at 16 hours following Q10 treatment, by approximately 5 fold over control. At 48 hours following treatment, ANGPTL3, CXCL1, CXCL3, ENG and TIMP3 were still upregulated (by approximately 3.5, 1.5, 3.175, 2 and 3 fold, respectively, over control), while ANGPTL4, CXCL5, ID3 and MMP2 were downregulated by approximately 1, 1, 2 and 18 fold, respectively, over control.

TABLE 27 List of genes regulated in the Angiogenesis Arrays when HepG2 cells were treated with 100 μM Q10. Gene Gene Name. Gene Function. ANGPTL3 angiopoietin-like 3 Predominantly expressed in live, role in cell migration and adhesion, regulates fatty acid and glycerol metabolism. ANGPTL4 angiopoietin-like 4 Regulated by PPARG, apoptosis inhibitor for vascular endothelial cells, role lipid and glucose metabolism and insulin sensitivity. CXCL1 chemokine (C—X—C motif) Role in cell proliferation and migration ligand 1 (melanoma growth stimulating activity, alpha) CXCL3 chemokine (C—X—C motif) Chemokine activation, hepatic stellar cell ligand 3 activation, migration, proliferation. CXCL5 chemokine (C—X—C motif) Produced along with IL8 when stimulated with ligand 5 IL1 or TNFA. Role in chemotaxis, migration, proliferation. ENG endoglin Binds to TGFBR and is involved in migration, proliferation, attachment and invasion. ID3 inhibitor of DNA binding 3, Regulates MMP2, Regulated by TGFB1, dominant negative helix- Vitamin D3, Retinoic acid, VEGFA, involved in loop-helix protein apoptosis, proliferation, differentiation, migration. MMP2 matrix metallopeptidase 2 Hepatic stellate cell activation, HIF□ signaling, (gelatinase A, 72 kDa binds to TIMP3, involved in tumorigenesis, gelatinase, 72 kDa type IV apoptosis, proliferation, invasiveness, migration collagenase) and chemotaxis. TIMP3 TIMP metallopeptidase Regulates MMP2, ICAM1. Regulated by inhibitor 3 TGFB, EGF, TNF, FGF and TP53. Involved in apoptosis, cell-cell adhesion and malignancy.

Proteins known to be involved in the process of angiogenesis were components in the RT-PCR array. Angiogenesis is a critical process by which cancer cells become malignant. Some of these proteins are also implicated in diabetes.

ANGPTL3 and ANGPTL4: The literature related to ANGPTL3 connects this protein to the regulation of lipid metabolism. In particular, the literature (Li, C. Curr Opin Lipidol. 2006 April; 17(2):152-6) teaches that both angiopoietins and angiopoietin-like proteins share similar domain structures. ANGPTL3 and 4 are the only two members of this superfamily that inhibit lipoprotein lipase activity. However, ANGPTL3 and 4 are differentially regulated at multiple levels, suggesting non-redundant functions in vivo. ANGPTL3 and 4 are proteolytically processed into two halves and are differentially regulated by nuclear receptors. Transgenic overexpression of ANGPTL4 as well as knockout of ANGPTL3 or 4 demonstrate that these two proteins play essential roles in lipoprotein metabolism: liver-derived ANGPTL3 inhibits lipoprotein lipase activity primarily in the fed state, while ANGPTL4 plays important roles in both fed and fasted states. In addition, ANGPTL4 regulates the tissue-specific delivery of lipoprotein-derived fatty acids. ANGPTL4 is thus an endocrine or autocrine/paracarine inhibitor of lipoprotein lipase depending on its sites of expression.

Lipoprotein lipase is an enzyme that hydrolyzes lipids in lipoproteins, such as those found in chylomicrons and very low-density lipoproteins (VLDL), into three free fatty acids and one glycerol molecule. Lipoprotein lipase activity in a given tissue is the rate limiting step for the uptake of triglyceride-derived fatty acids. Imbalances in the partitioning of fatty acids have major metabolic consequences. High-fat diets have been shown to cause tissue-specific overexpression of LPL, which has been implicated in tissue-specific insulin resistance and consequent development of type 2 diabetes mellitus.

The results in this Example indicate that Q10 is modulating proteins involved in lipid metabolism and thus warrants further investigation of ANGPTL3/ANGPTL4 and their related pathways. For example, ANGPTL3/ANGPTL4 have been implicated to play a role in the following pathways: Akt, cholesterol, fatty acid, HDL-cholesterol, HNF1A, ITGA5, ITGA5, ITGAV, ITG83, L-trilodothynonine, LIPG, LPL, Mapk, Nrth, NR1H3, PPARD, PTK2, RXRA, triacylglerol and 9-cis-retinoic acid.

Example 14: PCR Apoptosis Array on Liver Cancer (HEPG2) Cells

Apoptosis arrays were run for samples treated with 100 uM Q10 for 16 and 48 hours as described above. However, the array for 48 hours was run choosing FAM as the fluorophore instead of SYBR. Both FAM and SYBR fluoresce at the same wavelength.

The various genes found to be modulated upon Q10 treatment are summarized in Table 28 below. The results showed that CASP9 was upregulated at 16 hours following Q10 treatment, by approximately 61 fold over control, while BAG1 and TNFRSF1A were downregulated at 16 hours following treatment by approximately 6 and 4 fold, respectively, over that of control. At 48 hours following treatment, CASP9, BAG1 and TNFRSF1A were upregulated by approximately 55, 1 and 1 fold, respectively, over control.

TABLE 28 List of genes regulated in the Apoptosis Arrays when HepG2 cells were treated with 100 μM Q10. Gene Gene Name Gene Function. BAG1 BCL2-associated athanogene Involved with Apoptosis CASP9 caspase 9, apoptosis-related Apoptosis through release cysteine peptidase of cytochrome c. TNFRSF1A tumor necrosis factor receptor anti-apoptosis, binds many superfamily, member 1A cell death factors, regulates ICAM1

Example 15: Assessing Ability of Epi-Shifter to Treat Metabolic Disorder

In order to determine if a selected Epi-shifter, e.g., CoQ10, is capable of treating a metabolic disorder, e.g., diabetes, cell based assays that monitor an increase in insulin-stimulated glucose uptake in vitro are employed. In particular, differentiated mouse adipocytes are used to identify agents that have the ability to increase glucose uptake upon insulin stimulation, as detected by scintillation counting of radiolabelled glucose (using, for example, the Perkin Elmer 1450 Microbeta JET reader). These assays are conducted as follows.

Materials and Methods: Prees Media

Complete media, also referred to as “Prees” media, is prepared as follows. Dulbecco's Modified Eagle's Medium (DMEM) is supplemented with L-glutamine, penicillin-G and streptomycin (pen/strep), and heat-inactivated fetal bovine serum (FBS) (heat inactivated at 65.degree. C. for 30 minutes). Because serum can affect the growth, adherence, and differentiation of cells, any new lot of serum was first tested prior to use. Media was equilibrated in the incubator (5% CO.sub.2) until the pH was within the proper range (.about.7), as indicated by the red/orange color of the indicator dye. If the media became pink (indicating a high pH), we discarded the media as basic conditions can affect cells and denature the insulin used in the differentiation medium-1 (DM1) and the differentiation medium-2 (DM2).

Differentiation Medias

Differentiation media-1 (DM1) was prepared by supplementing DMEM with 10% FBS, L-glutamine, pen/strep, IBMX (375 .mu.M), insulin (120 nM), and dexamethasone (188 nM). Differentiation media-2 (DM2) was prepared by supplementing DMEM with 10% FBS, L-glutamine, pen/strep, and insulin (120 nM).

Preparation of Gelatinized Plates

Cell culture plates are gelatinized as follows. Gelatin (1% w/v in distilled water) was autoclaved and stored at room temperature. The bottom of each cell culture well was covered uniformly in the gelatin solution, ensuring that no bubbles are formed. This solution was removed leaving behind a thin film of gelatin. These plates are left to dry under the tissue culture hood. Plates are next washed with PBS, after which a 0.5% glutaric dialdehyde solution (glutaraldehyde in distilled water) was added to the cell culture wells. After ten minutes, wells are washed twice with DMEM containing pen-strep. Each washing step should last for approximately five minutes.

Cell Culture

3T3-L1 pre-adipocyte cells are split approximately every 2-3 days or upon reaching a confluence of approximately 60%. Overconfluency may affect the ability of these cells to differentiate into adipocytes.

Other Reagents

D-(+)-glucose (“cold” glucose, not radiolabeled) was added to DPBS mix to a final concentration of 10 mM.

Lysis buffer, a mixture of a base (e.g., sodium hydroxide at a final concentration of 0.5N) and a detergent (e.g., sodium dodecyl sulphate (SDS) diluted to a final concentration of 0.1% w/v) was freshly prepared each time (within one to two hours of use). Prior to use, lysis buffer was warmed up to a temperature exceeding that of room temperature for a period of approximately 30 minutes to avoid precipitation of the buffer.

Determination of Glucose Uptake

Pre-adipocyte 3T3-L1 cells are plated at a density of approximately 5000 cells/well (in black NUNC 96 well plate). These cells are differentiated into adipocytes in two separate steps. Initially, cells are cultured in differentiation medium-1 (DM1) (day 1 of adipocyte differentation) for a period of two to three days. DM1 prevents proliferation and induces the expression of adipocyte-specific genes. Cells are next cultured in differentiation medium-2 (DM2) for 3 to 4 days, after which the culture media is replaced by fresh DM2. The glucose uptake assay is performed at day 9-15 of differentiation.

Two days prior to the experiment (at day 7-13 of differentiation), DM2 is removed and replaced with fresh Prees media. Candidate compounds are added at this time, allowing an incubation period of approximately 48 hours. On the day of the experiment, cells (now at day 9 to 15 of differentiation) are serum starved for three hours in DPBS, magnesium sulfate (0.8 mM), and Hepes (10 mM) at pH .about.7. After this incubation period, fresh DPBS containing insulin (10 nM) is added to the adipocytes. Fresh DPBS without any insulin are placed on cells that served as a negative control. Following an incubation period of 25 minutes at 37.degree. C., radioactive glucose (labeled with .sup.14C, at a final concentration of 0.04 mM, .about.0.26 .mu.Ci .sup.14C-glucose in each well) is added to the media for a period of 15 minutes at room temperature. Media is next removed and cells are washed thoroughly and lysed. Upon lysis, cells form a small, cloudy mass, detached from the well bottom. 10% glacial acetic acid is added to each well to neutralize the lysis reaction. Scintillation fluid is next added to the wells and the incorporation of glucose is determined by measuring the amount of radioactivity in each well using the MicroBeta plate reader.

Using the foregoing experimental protocol, an Epi-shifter is identified as capable of treating a metabolic disorder, e.g., diabetes, when the Epi-shifter enhances, increases or augments insulin-stimulated glucose uptake in the cells in vitro.

Example 16: Identification of a MIM Associated with an Metabolic Disorder

In order to evaluate a candidate molecule (e.g., environmental influencer) as a potential MIM, the selected candidate MIM is exogenously added to a panel of cell lines, including both diseased (cancer) cell lines and normal control cell lines, and the changes induced to the cellular microenvironment profile for each cell line in the panel are assessed. Changes to cell morphology, physiology, and/or to cell composition, including for example, mRNA and protein levels, are evaluated and compared for the diseased cells as compared to normal cells.

Changes to cell morphology/physiology are evaluated by examining the sensitivity and apoptotic response of cells to the candidate MIM. These experiments are carried out as described in detail in Example 3. Briefly, a panel of cell lines consisting of at least one control cell line and at least one cancer cell line are treated with various concentrations of the candidate MIM. The sensitivity of the cell lines to the potential MIM are evaluated by monitoring cell survival at various times, and over the range of applied concentrations. The apoptoic response of the cell lines to the potential MIM are evaluated by using, for example, Nexin reagent in combination with flow cytometry methodologies. Nexin reagent contains a combination of two dyes, 7AAD and Annexin-V-PE, and allows quantification of the population of cells in early and late apoptosis. An additional apoptosis assay that measures single-stranded DNA may be used, using for example Apostrand™ ELISA methodologies. The sensitivity and apoptotic response of the disease and control cell lines are evaluated and compared. A molecule that displays differential cytotoxicity and/or that differentially induces the apoptotic response in the diseased cells as compared to the normal cells is identified as a MIM.

Changes in the composition of cells following treatment with the candidate MIM are evaluated. Changes in gene expression at the mRNA level are analyzed using Real-Time PCR array methodology. These experiments are carried out as described in detail in Examples 6 and 9-13. Briefly, the candidate MIM is exogenously added to one or more cell lines including, for example a diseased cell and a normal control cell line, and mRNA is extracted from the cells at various times following treatment. The level of mRNAs for genes involved in specific pathways are evaluated by using targeted pathway arrays, including, for example, arrays specific for apoptosis, oxidative stress and antioxidate defense, angiogenesis, heat shock or diabetes. The genes that are altered in their mRNA transcription by a two-fold level or greater are identified and evaluated. A molecule that induces changes in mRNA levels in cells and/or that induces differential changes in the level of one or more mRNAs in the diseased cells as compared to the normal cells is identified as a MIM.

In complementary experiments, changes in gene expression at the protein level are analyzed by using antibody microarray methodology, 2-dimensional gel electrophoresis followed by protein identificuation using mass spectrometry characterization, and by western blot analysis. These experiments are carried out as described in detail in Examples 7, 4 and 8, respectively. Briefly, the candidate MIM is exogenously added to one or more cell lines, including, for example a diseased cell and a normal control cell line, and soluble protein is extracted from the cells at various times, e.g., 6 hours or 24 hours, following treatment. Changes induced to protein levels by the candidate MIM are evaluated by using an antibody microarray containing antibodies for over 700 proteins, sampling a broad range of protein types and potential pathway markers. Further complementary proteomic analysis can be carried by employing 2-dimensional (2-D) gel electrophoresis coupled with mass spectrometry methodologies. The candidate MIM is exogenously added to one or more cell lines, including, for example a diseased cell and a normal control cell line, and cell pellets are lysed and subjected to 2-D gel electrophoresis. The gels are analyzed to identify changes in protein levels in treated samples relative to control, untreated samples. The gels are analyzed for the identification of spot changes over the time course of treatment due to increased levels, decreased levels or post-translational modification. Spots exhibiting statistically significant changes are excised and submitted for protein identification by trypsin digestiona do mass spectrometry characterization. The characterized peptides are searched against protein databases with, for example, Mascot and MSRAT software analysis to identify the proteins. In addition to the foregoing 2-D gel analysis and antibody microarray experiments, potential changes to levels of specific proteins induced by the candidate MIM may be evaluated by Western blot analysis. In all of the proteomic experiments, proteins with increased or decreased levels in the various cell lines are identified and evaluated. A molecule that induces changes in protein levels in cells and/or that induces differential changes in the level of one or more proteins in the diseased cells as compared to the normal cells is identified as a MIM.

Genes found to be modulated by treatment with a candidate MIM from the foregoing experiments are subjected to cellular and biochemical pathway analysis and can thereby be categorized into various cellular pathways, including, for example apoptosis, cancer biology and cell growth, glycolysis and metabolism, molecular transport, and cellular signaling.

Experiments are carried out to confirm the entry of a candidate MIM into cells, to determine if the candidate MIM becomes localized within the cell, and to determine the level and form of the candidate MIM present in the cells. These experiments are carried out, for example, as described in detail in Example 5. For example, to determine the level and the form of the candidate MIM present in the mitochondria, mitochondrial enriched preparations from cells treated with the candidate MIM are prepared and analyzed. The level of the candidate MIM present in the mitochondria can thereby be confirmed to increase in a time and dose dependent manner with the addition of exogenous candidate MIM. In addition, changes in levels of proteins from mitochondria enriched samples are analyzed by using 2-D gel electrophoresis and protein identification by mass spectrometry characterization, as described above for total cell protein samples. Candidate MIMs that are found to enter the cell and to be present at increased levels, e.g., in the mitochondria, are identified as a MIM. The levels of the candidate MIM in the cell, or, for example, specifically in the mitochondria, over the time course examined can be correlated with other observed cellular changes, as evidenced by, for example, the modulation of mRNA and protein levels for specific proteins.

Candidate MIMs observed to induce changes in cell composition, e.g., to induce changes in gene expression at the mRNA or protein level, are identified as a MIM. Candidate MIMs observed to induce differential changes in cell morphology, physiology or cell composition (e.g., differential changes in gene expression at the mRNA or protein level), in a disease state (e.g., diabetes or obesity) as compared to a normal state are identified as a MIM and, in particular, as having multidimensional character. Candidate MIMs found to be capable of entering a cell are identified as a MIM and, in particular, as having multidimensional character since the candidate MIM thereby exhibits a carrier effect in addition to a therapeutic effect.

Example 17: Identification of CoQ10 as an Epi-Shifter Associated with a Metabolic Disorder

A panel of skin cell lines consisting of a control cell lines (primary culture of keratinocytes and melanocytes) and several skin cancers cell lines (SK-MEL-28, a non-metastatic skin melanoma; SK-MEL-2, a metastatic skin melanoma; or SCC, a squamous cell carcinoma; PaCa2, a pancreatic cancer cell line; or HEP-G2, a liver cancer cell line) were treated with various levels of Coenzyme Q10. The cancer cell lines exhibited an altered dose dependent response when compared to the control cell lines, with an induction of apoptosis and cell death in the cancer cells only. Detailed exemplary experiments are presented in, e.g., Example 3 herein.

Assays were employed to assess changes in the mRNA and protein levels composition of the above-identified cells following treatment with CoQ10. Changes in mRNA expression were analyzed using real-time PCR microarrays specific for each of apoptosis, oxidative stress and antioxidants, angiogenesis and diabetes. Changes in protein expression were analyzed using antibody microarray analysis and western blot analysis. The results from these assays demonstrated that significant changes in gene expression, both at the mRNA and protein levels, were occurring in the cell lines due to the addition of the Coenzyme Q10. Numerous genes known to be associated with or involved in cellular metabolic processes were observed to be modulated as a result of treatment with CoQ10. For example, expression of the nuclear receptor protein HNF4A was found to be upmodulated in cells following Q10 treatment. Expression of transaldolase 1 (TAL) was also modulated in cells treated with Q10. TAL balances the levels of NADPH and reactive oxygen intermediate, thereby regulating the mitochondrial trans-membrande potentional, which is a critical checkpoint of ATP synthesis and cell survival. Of particular relevance to metabolic disorders, numerous genes known to be associated with, e.g., diabetes, were identified as being regulated by Q10. Detailed exemplary experiments are presented in, e.g., Examples 4, 6, 7, 8 and 9 herein.

Q10 is an essential cofactor for exidative phosphorylation processes in the mitochondria for energy production. The level of Coenzyme Q10, as well as the form of CoQ10, present in the mitochondria was determined by analyzing mitochondrial enriched preparations from cells treated with CoQ10. The level of Coenzyme Q10 present in the mitochondria was confirmed to increase in a time and dose dependent manner with the addition of exogenous Q10. The time course correlated with a wide variety of cellular changes as observed in modulation of mRNA and protein levels for specific proteins related to metabolic and apoptotic pathways. Detailed exemplary experiments are presented in, e.g., Example 5 herein.

The results described herein identified the endogenous molecule CoQ10 as an epi-shifter. In particular, the results identified CoQ10 as inducing a shift in the metabolic state, and partially restoration of mitochondrial function, in cells. These conclusions are based on the following interpretation of the data described herein and the current knowledge in the relevant art.

Q10 is known to be synthesized, actively transported to, enriched in, and utilized in the mitochondrial inner membrane. Q10 is also known to be an essential cofactor for oxidative phosphorylation processes in the mitochondrial for energy production. However, most cancer cells predominantly produce energy by glycolysis followed by lactic acid fermentation in the cytosol, rather than by oxidation of pyruvate in mitochondria like most normal cells. The oxidative phosphorylation involves the electron transport complexes and cytochrome c. Apoptosis involves the disruption of the mitochondria, with permiabilization of the inter mitochondrial membrane by pro-apoptitic factors. By utilizing a different metabolic energy synthesis pathway, cancer cells are able to mitigate the normal apoptosis response to abnormalities in the cell. While not wishing to be bound by theory, Applicants propose that Q10 is functioning by upregulating the oxidative phosphorylation pathway proteins, thus switching the mitochondrial function back to a state that would recognize the oncogenic defects and trigger apoptosis. Thus, Q10 is acting as an Epi-shifter by shifting the metabolic state of a cell.

Example 18: Identification of an Epi-Shifter Associated with a Metabolic Disorder

A panel of skin cell lines consisting of control cell lines (e.g., primary culture of keratinocytes and melanocytes) and cancer cell lines (e.g., SK-MEL-28, a non-metastatic skin melanoma; SK-MEL-2, a metastatic skin melanoma; or SCC, a squamous cell carcinoma; PaCa2, a pancreatic cancer cell line; or HEP-G2, a liver cancer cell line) are treated with various levels of a candidate Epi-shifter. Changes to cell morphology/physiology are evaluated by examining the sensitivity and apoptotic response of cells to the candidate Epi-shifter. These experiments are carried out as described in detail in Example 3. Briefly, the sensitivity of the cell lines to the candidate Epi-shifter are evaluated by monitoring cell survival at various times, and over a range of applied concentrations. The apoptoic response of the cell lines to the candidate Epi-shifter are evaluated by using, for example, Nexin reagent in combination with flow cytometry methodologies. Nexin reagent contains a combination of two dyes, 7AAD and Annexin-V-PE, and allows quantification of the population of cells in early and late apoptosis. An additional apoptosis assay that measures single-stranded DNA may be used, using for example Apostrand™ ELISA methodologies. The sensitivity and apoptotic response of the disease and control cell lines are evaluated and compared. Candidate Epi-shifters are evaluated based on their ability to inhibit cell growth preferentially or selectively in cancer cells as compared to normal or control cells. Candidate Epi-shifters are further evaluated based on their ability to preferentially or selectively induce apoptosis in cancer cells as compared to normal or control cells.

Assays are employed to assess changes in the mRNA and protein level composition of the above-identified cells following treatment with the candidate Epi-shifter. Changes in mRNA levels are analyzed using real-time PCR microarrays. These experiments are carried out as described in detail in Examples 6 and 9-13. Briefly, mRNA is extracted from the cells at various times following treatment. The level of mRNAs for genes involved in specific pathways are evaluated by using targeted pathway arrays, including, arrays specific for apoptosis, oxidative stress and antioxidate defense, angiogenesis, heat shock or diabetes. The genes that are altered in their mRNA transcription by a two-fold level or greater are identified and evaluated.

Changes in protein expression are analyzed using antibody microarray analysis, 2-D gel electrophoresis analysis coupled with mass spectrometry characterization, and western blot analysis. These experiments are carried out as described in detail in Examples 7, 4 and 8, respectively. Briefly, soluble protein is extracted from the cells at various times, e.g., 6 hours or 24 hours, following treatment with the candidate Epi-shifter. Changes induced to protein levels by the candidate Epi-shifter are evaluated by using an antibody microarray containing antibodies for over 700 proteins, sampling a broad range of protein types and potential pathway markers. Further complementary proteomic analysis can be carried out by employing 2-dimensional (2-D) gel electrophoresis coupled with mass spectrometry methodologies. The candidate Epi-shifter is exogenously added to the cell lines and cell pellets are lysed and subjected to 2-D gel electrophoresis. The gels are analyzed to identify changes in protein levels in treated samples relative to control, untreated samples. The gels are analyzed for the identification of spot changes over the time course of treatment due to increased levels, decreased levels or post-translational modification. Spots exhibiting statistically significant changes are excised and submitted for protein identification by trypsin digestion and mass spectrometry characterization. The characterized peptides are searched against protein databases with, for example, Mascot and MSRAT software analysis to identify the proteins. In addition to the foregoing 2-D gel analysis and antibody microarray experiments, potential changes to levels of specific proteins induced by the candidate MIM may be evaluated by Western blot analysis. In all of the proteomic experiments, proteins with increased or decreased levels in the various cell lines are identified and evaluated.

Candidate Epi-shifters are evaluated based on changes induced to gene expression, at the mRNA and/or protein levels, in the cell lines due to the addition of the candidate Epi-shifter. In particular, candidate Epi-shifters are evaluated based on their ability to modulate genes known to be associated with or involved in cellular metabolic processes. Of particular relevance to metabolic disorders, candidate Epi-shifters are evaluated based on their ability to modulate genes known to be associated with, for example, diabetes or obesity.

The level of the candidate Epi-shifter, as well as the form of the candidate Epi-shifter, present in the cell or a particular cell location is determined using routine methods known to the skilled artisan. For example, the level of the candidate Epi-shifter in mitochondria over time and over a range of doses is determined by analyzing mitochondrial enriched preparations from cells treated with the candidate Epi-shifter. The levels of the candidate Epi-shifter in the mitochondria over the time course can be compared and correlated with other cellular changes observed, such as modulation of mRNA and protein levels for specific proteins related to metabolic and apoptotic pathways.

Candidate Epi-shifters observed to induce a shift in the metabolic state of a cell based on the results obtained from the foregoing experiments are identified as Epi-shifters. For example, a candidate Epi-shifter that enhances, increases or augments insulin-stimulated glucose uptake in cells is identified as an Epi-shifter.

Example 19: Identification of Vitamin D3 as an Epi-Shifter

Vitamin D3, or 1α, 25-dihydroxyvitamin D3 (also known as calcitriol), is a vitamin D metabolite that is synthesized from vitamin D by a two-step enzymatic process. Vitamin D3 interacts with its ubiquitous nuclear vitamin D receptor (VDR) to regulate the transcription of a wide spectrum of genes involved in calcium and phosphate homeostasis as well as in cell division and differentiation. Vitamin D3 has been reported to have anticancer effects in numerous model systems, including squamous cell carcinoma, prostate adenocarcinoma, cancers of the ovary, breast and lung (reviewed in Deeb et al. 2007 Nature Reviews Cancer 7:684-700).

The anticancer effects of vitamin D3 are reported to involve multiple mechanisms, including growth arrest at the G1 phase of the cell cycle, apoptosis, tumor cell differentiation, disruption of growth factor-mediated cell survival signals, and inhibition of angiogenesis and cell adhesion (reviewed in Deeb et al. 2007 Nature Reviews Cancer 7:684-700). For example, with particular respect to apoptosis, Vitamin D3 has been reported to induce apoptosis by regulating key mediators of apoptosis, such as repressing the expression of the anti-apoptotic, pro-survival proteins BCL2 and BCL-XL, or inducing the expression of pro-apoptotic proteins (e.g., BAX, BAK and BAD) (Deeb et al. 2007). In a further example, with particular respect to angiogenesis, Vitamin D3 has been reported to inhibit the proliferation of some tumor-derived endothelial cells and to inhibit the expression of vascular endothelial growth factor (VEGF) that induces angiogenesis in tumors (reviewed in Masuda and Jones, 2006 Mol. Cancer Ther. 5(4): 797-8070). In another example, with particular respect to cell cycle arrest, Vitamin D3 has been reported to induce gene transcription of the cyclin-dependent kinase inhibitor p21 WAFI/CIPI and to induce the synthesis and/or stabilization of the cyclin-dependent kinase inhibitor p27KIPI protein, both of which are critical for induction of G1 arrest. (Deeb et al. 2007).

Based on the foregoing observations, Vitamin D3 is identified as an Epi-shifter, i.e., owing to its ability to shift the metabolic state of a cell. Vitamin D3 is an Epi-shifter owing to its ability to induce apoptosis in a cell and, in particular, based on its ability to differentially inhibit cell growth and induce the apoptotic response in diseased (cancer) cells as compared to normal cells (e.g., differentially modulate expression of proteins, such as BCL-2, BCL-XL, and BAX, involved in apoptosis in cancer cells as compared to normal cells).

Example 20: Summary of Key Proteins

In summary, based on the results of experiments described in the foregoing Examples, the key proteins modulated by Q10 are summarized in the Table below.

TABLE 29 Key proteins modulated by Q10. Pathway Examples Transcription factors HNF4alpha Apoptotic response Bcl-xl, Bcl-xS, BNIP-2, Bcl-2, Birc6, Bcl-2-L11 (Bim), XIAP, BRAF, Bax, c-Jun, Bmf, PUMA, cMyc Pentose Phosphate Pathway transaldolase 1 Biosynthetic pathway COQ1, COQ3, COQ6, prenyltransferase, 4- hydroxybenzoate Oxidative stress (pro-oxidant) Neutrophil cytosolic factor 2, nitric oxide synthase 2A, superoxide dismutase 2 (mitochondrial) Membrane Alterations VDAC, Bax channel, ANT, Oxidative phosphorylation Cytochrome c, complex I, complex II, complex III, metabolism complex IV,

Example 21: Western Analysis of Cells Treated with Coenzyme Q10

Over the past five decades enormous volume of information has been generated implicating endogenous/exogenous factors influencing specific processes as the underlying cause of malignant transformations. Clinical and basic literature provides evidence that changes in the DNA structure and function play a significant role in the initiation and progression of cancer, defining cancer as a genetic disease (Wooster, 2010; Haiman, 2010). In the early 1920s, Otto Warburg and other investigators involved in characterizing fundamental changes in etiology of oncogenesis described two major observations (a) the ability of cells to transport and utilize glucose in the generation of ATP for energy production in the presence of oxygen—also known as Warburg Effect and (b) alterations in the mitochondrial structure and function—including changes in the electron transport leading to a decrease in the production of mitochondrial ATP. The past few years has seen a resurgence in the investigating the central role of cellular bioenergetics in the etiology of cancer i.e. viewing cancer as a metabolic disease.

Historically, although mutations in genes has been thought to be responsible for changes in gene expression, there is accumulating literature in support of epigenetic processes playing a critical role in influencing gene expression in supporting carcinogenesis. This is evidenced by the observation that mutation rate for most genes is low and cannot account for the numerous (spectrum of) mutations found in the cancer cells. Epigenetic alteration is regulated by methylation and modification of histone tails, both changes inherently linked to the energy (nutrient) status of the cells since they require the availability of co-factors e.g. acetyl CoA requirement for histone acetylation (ref). The biosynthesis of acetyl CoA depends on glycolysis and Kreb's Cycle, directly linking the intracellular energy status to regulation of gene expression and activity.

In normal cells, mitochondrial oxidative phosphorylation generates sufficient ATP to meet the energy demands for maintaining normal physiological activities and cell survival. A consequence of mitochondrial energy production is the generation of reactive oxygen species (ROS), aberrant production of which leads to damage of mitochondria (refs). It is well established that chronic ROS generation by the mitochondria leads to cumulative accumulation of genetic mutations, a phenomenon that has been implicated in the etiology of carcinogenesis. It has been suggested that cancer cells decrease mitochondrial respiration to minimize ROS generation, and switch to glycolysis to sustain energy production. Thus, a progressive shift of energy generation from oxidative phosphorylation to glycolysis would be essential for a cell to maintain energy production to maintain physiological functions and could be associated with the progression of a normal cell phenotype to that of a cancer cell. The progressive shift in cellular energy (bioenergetic) profile in tandem with accumulated alteration (mutations) in mitochondrial genetic make-up alters the cellular metabolome. Changes in the whole cell metabolomic profile as a consequence of mitochondrial phosphorylation to glycolysis transition corresponds to an abnormal bioenergetic induced metabolomic profile and is the underlying cause supporting carcinogenesis. Targeted intervention using an endogenous molecule to elicit a cellular metabolomic shift towards conditions of a non-cancerous normal mitochondrial oxidative phosphorylation associated cellular bioenergetic state represents a therapeutic endpoint in the treatment of cancer.

Coenzyme Q10 as a MIM Causing an Epi-Metabolomic Shift

The data presented herein demonstrates that treatment of normal and cancer cells with Coenzyme Q10 is associated with changes in the expression of proteins that regulate key biochemical terminals within the glycolysis—mitochondrial oxidative stress continuum. The combination of data describing assessment of protein expression by western blotting and oxygen consumption rates demonstrates that in normal cells, there is no significant alteration in normal glycolytic and mitochondrial respiration rates following exposure to Coenzyme Q10. Thus, the values for expression of the proteins and mitochondrial respiration rates in normal cell lines e.g. HDFa (normal human adult fibroblast), HASMC (normal human aortic smooth muscle cell), nFib (normal fibroblast) and HeKa (normal human keratinocytes) can be considered as representatives of baseline physiological state. Any deviation in expression of proteins and mitochondrial respiration rates in cancer cell lines, e.g. HepG2 (liver cancer), PaCa-2 (pancreatic cancer), MCF7 (breast cancer), SK-MEL (melanoma) and SCC-25 (squamous cell carcinoma), is representative of alteration due to initiation/progression of the disease, in this case cancer. The experimental evidence provides support to the hypothesis that exposure of Coenzyme Q10 to cancer cells is associated with cellular pathophysiological reorganization that is reminiscent of normal cells. Specifically, the data provided herein demonstrates that Coenzyme Q10 exposure in cancer cells is associated with a shift in the glycolytic pathways and mitochondrial oxidative phosphorylation responsible for induction of global reorganization of cellular architecture to that observed in normal cells.

In normal cells, the end-points of glycolytic output are linked to mitochondrial oxidative phosphorylation (OXPHOS), i.e. generation of pyruvate from glucose via the glycolytic pathway for the entry into the Kreb's Cycle (also known as Tricarboxylic acid cycle, TCA, or Citric Acid Cycle) to generate reducing equivalents to support the mitochondrial OXPHOS for ATP production. Thus, in normal cells the expression and functional orientation of gene products involved in glycolysis is primed towards adequate generation of pyruvate and its entry into the Kreb's Cycle. Dysregulated expression and function of key proteins participating in glycolysis and Kreb's Cycle pathways in cancer cells results in enhanced glycolysis with a significant decrease in mitochondrial function. Exposure of cancer cells to Coenzyme Q10, an endogenous molecule that selectively influences the mitochondrial respiratory chain, alters (normalizes) expression of proteins of the glycolyis and Kreb's Cycle pathways to facilitate a bioenergetic shift such that energy production (i.e. ATP generation) is restored to the mitochondria.

EXPERIMENTAL PROCEDURE Western Blot Experiment 1

The cells that were used for the experiment were HDFa, and MCF-7 cells that were treated or not with Coenzyme Q10 at two different concentrations, 50 μM and 100 μM, and harvested after 24 hours of treatment. The whole cell pellets were resuspended one at a time in 1 mL of C7 buffer and transferred to labeled 15 mL tubes. The samples were then sonicated in the cold room on ice using 6 sonic pulses with the setting at #14. The samples were spun for a short time to 2500 g after sonication and the samples transferred to 2 ml tubes. The pH was verified of each sample (pH should be 9.0) using the foam remaining in the 50 mL sample tubes.

Alkylation and reduction of samples was performed for each sample by adding 10 ul of 1M acrylamide, 25 ul of tributylphoshene and incubation for 90 mins with intermittent mixing. After incubation, 10 ul of 1M DTT was added and the tubes were spun at 20,000 g at 20 deg C. for 10 minutes and transferred the supernatant to labeled Amicon Ultra centrifugal filter units with a 10 k cut off (Millipore catalog # UFC 801024). The samples were spun for 15 minutes at 2500 g in 2 intervals. The conductivity was measured for Chaps alone as well as the samples using a conductivity meter. If the conductivity of samples is high, then 1 ml of chaps was added for buffer exchange and spun again at 2500 g until the volume was down to 250 ul. When the conductivity was 200 or less the samples were spun in 5 min intervals at 2500 g until the volume of the supernatant was between 150-100 ul. The sample supernatants were transferred to eppendorf tubes and Bradford assay was performed using BSA as standard.

The samples were processed as per standard protocols as described above and the amount of protein in each of the samples was determined by Bradford assay. Sample volumes equivalent to 10 ug of protein were prepared as shown below with Lamelli Loading dye (LDS) and MilliQ water were run on a 4-12% Bis-Tris Novex NuPAGE gel (Invitrogen, cat # NP0323Box)

The gels were run for 50 minutes using 1×MOPS buffer using a NOVEX Xcell Surelock system at 200 V. The gels were then transferred for 1 hour using a NOVEX Xcell Surelock wet transfer protocol at 30 V. The blots were stained with Simply Blue Safestain from Invitrogen (LC6065).

IDH1 and ATP Citrate Lyase Levels in HDFa and MCF-7 Samples.

After transfer each of the blots was placed in between 2 Whatman Filter papers and dried for 15-20 minutes. After drying the blots were labeled with the date, the type of samples and either blot 1 or blot 2 using a HB pencil. The molecular weight markers were outlined with the pencil and with single lines for the blue and a doublet for the colored markers. The blots were activated with methanol for 5 seconds, washed with water for 5 minutes, and TBST for 15 minutes. The blots were blocked for 1 hour with 5% blocking reagent in TBS-T at room temperature and then washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each). Blot 1 was probed with the primary antibody for IDH1 (Cell Signaling #3997) in TBST with 5% BSA (at 1:1000 dilutions) and blot 2 with the rabbit polyclonal antibody for ATP Citrate Lyase in 5% BSA (Cell Signaling #4332) at 1:1000 dilution by incubation overnight at 4 deg C. with shaking. After the overnight incubation with primary antibodies, the blots were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the secondary antibody (antirabbit; 1:10,000 dilution) for 1 h on the orbital tilting shaker at room temperature. After 1 h of incubation with secondary antibodies, the blots were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and then incubated with ECF reagent for 5 mins and then each blot scanned with 5100 Fuji Laser scanner at 25 uM resolution, 16 bit, green laser, at 400V and at 500 V.

Actin Levels in HDFa and MCF-7 Samples.

The above blots were stripped by incubating for 30 minutes with methanol, followed by two 10 minute washes with TBS-T, then 30 minutes of incubation with Stripping buffer at 50 deg C., and followed by two washes with 100 ml or more of TBS-T for 30′ each. The 2 blots were scanned in laser scanner to check for complete stripping. The blots were then activated with methanol for 5 seconds, washed with water for 5 minutes, and TBST for 15 minutes. The blots were blocked for 1 hour with 5% blocking reagent in TBS-T at room temperature and then washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the antibody for Actin in 5% BSA (Sigma catalog # A5316, clone AC-74) at 1:5000 dilutions for 1 hour at room temperature with shaking. After 1 hour of incubation with primary antibody for Actin, the membranes were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the secondary antibody (antimouse; 1:10,000 dilution) for 1 h on the orbital tilting shaker at room temperature. After 1 h of incubation with secondary antibodies, the blots were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and then incubated with ECF reagent for 5 minutes and then each blot scanned with 5100 Fuji Laser scanner at 25 uM resolution, 16 bit, green laser, at 400V and at 500 V.

Western Blot Experiment 2

The cells used in this experiment were SKMEL28, SCC-25, nFib and Heka that were treated or not with coenzyme Q10 at two different concentrations, 50 μM or 100 μM, and harvested after 3, 6 and/or 24 hours of treatment. The samples were processed and run on a 4-12% Bis-Tris Novex NuPAGE gel as described above. The gels were run, transferred and stained essentially as described above.

Levels of IDH1 for the 4 Cell Lines

After transfer the blot was dried for 15-20 minutes, activated with methanol for 5 seconds, washed with water for 5 minutes, and TBST for 15 minutes. The blot was blocked for 1 hour with 5% blocking reagent in TBS-T at room temperature and then washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each). This was then probed with the primary antibody for IDH1 (Cell Signaling #3997) in TBST with 5% BSA (at 1:1000 dilutions) by incubation overnight at 4 deg C. with shaking. After the overnight incubation with primary antibody for IDH1, the blot was washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the secondary antibody (antirabbit; 1:10,000 dilution) for 1 h at room temperature. After 1 h of incubation with secondary antibodies, the blot was washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and then incubated with ECF reagent for 5 mins and then each blot scanned with 5100 Fuji Laser scanner at 25 uM resolution, 16 bit, green laser, at 400V and at 500 V.

ATP Citrate Lyase Levels in 4 Different Cell Lines.

The Isocitrate dehydrogenase blot was stripped by incubating for 30 minutes with methanol, followed by two 10 minute washes with TBS-T, then 30 minutes of incubation with stripping buffer at 50 deg C., and followed by two washes with 100 ml or more of TBS-T for 30′ each. The blot was scanned in laser scanner to check for complete stripping. The blot was activated with methanol for 5 seconds, washed with water for 5 minutes, and TBST for 15 minutes. The blot was blocked for 1 hour with 5% blocking reagent in TBS-T at room temperature and then washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each). This was then probed with the rabbit polyclonal antibody for ATP Citrate Lyase in 5% BSA (Cell Signaling #4332) at 1:1000 dilution overnight at 4 deg C. with shaking. After the overnight incubation with primary antibody for ATP Citrate Lyase, the membrane was washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the secondary antibody (antirabbit; 1:10,000 dilution) for 1 h on the orbital tilting shaker at room temperature. After 1 h of incubation with secondary antibodies, the blot was washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and then incubated with ECF reagent for 5 minutes and then each blot scanned with 5100 Fuji Laser scanner at 25 uM resolution, 16 bit, green laser, at 400V and at 500 V.

Actin Levels in 4 Different Cell Lines.

The ATP Citrate Lyase blot was stripped by incubating for 30 minutes with methanol, followed by two 10 minute washes with TBS-T, then 30 minutes of incubation with Stripping buffer at 50 deg C., and followed by two washes with 100 ml or more of TBS-T for 30′ each. The blot was scanned in laser scanner to check for complete stripping. The blot was activated with methanol for 5 seconds, washed with water for 5 minutes, and TBST for 15 minutes. The blot was blocked for 1 hour with 5% blocking reagent in TBS-T at room temperature and then washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the antibody for Actin in 5% BSA (Sigma catalog # A5316, clone AC-74) at 1:5000 dilutions for 1 hour at room temperature with shaking. After 1 hour of incubation with primary antibody for Actin, the membranes were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the secondary antibody (antimouse; 1:10,000 dilution) for 1 h on the orbital tilting shaker at room temperature. After 1 h of incubation with secondary antibodies, the blots were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and then incubated with ECF reagent for 5 minutes and then each blot scanned with 5100 Fuji Laser scanner at 25 uM resolution, 16 bit, green laser, at 400V and at 500 V.

Western Blot Experiment 3

The cells used in this experiment were HepG2, HASMC, and PACA2 cells that were treated or not with Coenzyme Q10 at two different concentrations (50 μM and 100 μM) and harvested 48 hours of treatment. In this experiment (western blot experiment 3), and in all of the experiments described below in this Example (i.e., western blot experiments 4 through 9), the cells were additionally treated with either 5 mM glucose (“5G”) or 22 mM glucose (“22G”). The samples derived from the cells were processed and run on a 4-12% Bis-Tris Novex NuPAGE gel as described above. The gels were run, transferred and stained essentially as described above.

IDH1, ATP Citrate Lyase and Actin Levels in HASMC Vs. PACA2 and HepG2.

The levels of IDH1, ATP citrate lyase and actin levels were determined by probing the blots with primary antibodies for IDH1, ATP citrate lyase and actin, essentially as described above.

Western Blot Experiment 4

The cells used in this experiment were HepG2 cells that were treated or not with Coenzyme Q10 at two different concentrations, 50 or 100 μM, and harvested after 24 or 48 hours of treatment. The samples were processed and run on a 4-12% Bis-Tris Novex NuPAGE gel as described above. The gels were run, transferred and stained essentially as described above.

Lactate Dehydrogenase Levels in HepG2 Cells.

After transfer each blot was dried for 15-20 minutes, activated with methanol for 5 seconds, washed with water for 5 minutes, and TBST for 15 minutes. The blots were blocked for 1 hour with 5% blocking reagent in TBS-T at room temperature and then washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the primary antibody for Lactate Dehydrogenase (abcam ab2101; polyclonal) in 5% BSA (at 1:1000 dilutions) by incubation overnight at 4 deg C. with shaking. After the overnight incubation with primary antibody for Lactate Dehydrogenase, the blots were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the secondary antibody (rabbit antigoat; 1:10,000 dilution) for 1 h at room temperature. After 1 h of incubation with secondary antibodies, the blots were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and then incubated with ECF reagent for 5 mins and then each blot scanned with 5100 Fuji Laser scanner at 25 uM resolution, 16 bit, green laser, at 400V and at 500 V.

Pyruvate Kinase Muscle Form (PKM2) Levels in HepG2 Cells.

The lactate dehydrogenase blots were stripped by incubating for 30 minutes with methanol, followed by two 10 minute washes with TBS-T, then 30 minutes of incubation with Stripping buffer at 50 deg C., and followed by two washes with 100 ml or more of TBS-T for 30′ each. The 2 blots were scanned in laser scanner to check for complete stripping. The blots were activated with methanol for 5 seconds, washed with water for 5 minutes, and TBST for 15 minutes. The blots were blocked for 1 hour with 5% blocking reagent in TBS-T at room temperature and then washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the rabbit polyclonal antibody for Pyruvate Kinase M2 in 5% BSA (NOVUS BIOLOGICALS catalog # H00005315-D01P) at 1:500 dilution overnight at 4 deg C. with shaking. After the overnight incubation with primary antibody for Pyruvate Kinase M2, the membranes were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the secondary antibody (antirabbit; 1:10,000 dilution) for 1 h on the orbital tilting shaker at room temperature. After 1 h of incubation with secondary antibodies, the blots were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and then incubated with ECF reagent for 5 minutes and then each blot scanned with 5100 Fuji Laser scanner at 25 uM resolution, 16 bit, green laser, at 400V and at 500 V.

Pyruvate Dehydrogenase Beta Levels in HepG2 Cells.

The pyruvate kinase blots were stripped by incubating for 30 minutes with methanol, followed by two 10 minute washes with TBS-T, then 30 minutes of incubation with Stripping buffer at 50 deg C., and followed by two washes with 100 ml or more of TBS-T for 30′ each. The 2 blots were scanned in laser scanner to check for complete stripping. After making sure stripping of the antibody and the ECF reagent has worked, the blots were activated with methanol for 5 seconds, washed with water for 5 minutes, and TBST for 15 minutes. The blots are blocked for 1 hour with 5% blocking reagent in TBS-T at room temperature and then washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the antibody for Pyruvate Dehydrogenase in 5% BSA (ABNOVA catalog # H00005162-M03) at 1:500 dilutions) overnight at 4 deg C. with shaking. After the overnight incubation with primary antibody for Pyruvate Dehydrogenase, the membranes were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the secondary antibody (antimouse; 1:10,000 dilution) for 1 h on the orbital tilting shaker at room temperature. After 1 h of incubation with secondary antibodies, the blots were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and then incubated with ECF reagent for 5 minutes and then each blot scanned with 5100 Fuji Laser scanner at 25 uM resolution, 16 bit, green laser, at 400V and at 500 V.

Actin Levels in HepG2 Cells.

The Pyruvate Dehydrogenase blots were stripped and then reprobed for actin, essentially as described above.

Western Blot Experiment 5

The cells used in this experiment were MIAPACA2 (PACA2) cells that were treated or not with Coenzyme Q10 at two different concentrations, 50 or 100 μM, and harvested after 24 or 48 hours of treatment. The PACA2 samples were processed and the gels were run, transferred, stained and scanned essentially as described above.

Lactate Dehydrogenase (LDH) and Pyruvate Dehydrogenase (PDH) Levels in PaCa2 Cells

The levels of LDH and PDH were determined by probing the blots successively with primary antibodies for LDH and PDH, essentially as described above.

Caspase 3 Levels in PaCa2

The blots were stripped by incubating for 30 minutes with methanol, followed by two 10 minute washes with TBS-T, then 30 minutes of incubation with Stripping buffer at 50 deg C., and followed by two washes with 100 ml or more of TBS-T for 30′ each. The 2 blots were scanned in laser scanner to check for complete stripping. The blots were activated with methanol for 5 seconds, washed with water for 5 minutes, and TBST for 15 minutes. The blots were blocked for 1 hour with 5% blocking reagent in TBS-T at room temperature and then washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the antibody for Caspase 3 in 5% BSA (Santacruz Biotechnology # sc7272) at 1:200 dilutions) overnight at 4 deg C. with shaking. After the overnight incubation with primary antibody for Caspase 3, the membranes were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the secondary antibody (antimouse; 1:10,000 dilution) for 1 h on the orbital tilting shaker at room temperature. After. 1 h of incubation with secondary antibodies, the blots were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and then incubated with ECF reagent for 5 minutes and then each blot scanned with 5100 Fuji Laser scanner at 25 uM resolution, 16 bit, green laser, at 400V and at 500 V.

Western Blot Experiment 6

The cells that were used for this Western blot experiment were PC-3, HepG2, MCF-7, HDFa and PACA2 that were treated or not with a Coenzyme Q10 IV formulation and harvested after 24 hours of treatment. The samples were processed and the gels were run, transferred, stained and scanned essentially as described above.

Capase 3 and Actin Levels in Different Cell Types.

The levels of Caspase 3 and actin were determined by probing the blots successively with primary antibodies for Caspase 3 and actin, essentially as described above.

Western Blot Experiment 7

The cells used in this experiment were Human Aortic Smooth Muscle (HASMC) cells that were treated or not with Coenzyme Q10 at two different concentrations, 50 μM or 100 μM, and harvested after 24 or 48 hours of treatment. The HASMC samples were processed and the gels were run, transferred, stained and scanned essentially as described above.

Experimental Protocol for Actin:

The levels of actin were determined by probing the blots with a primary antibody for actin, essentially as described above.

Experimental Protocol for Hif 1Alpha, Caspase3 and PDHB:

The Actin blots were stripped by incubating for 30 minutes with methanol, followed by two 10 minute washes with TBS-T, then 30 minutes of incubation with Stripping buffer at 50 deg C., and followed by two washes with 100 ml or more of TBS-T for 30′ each. The blots were scanned in laser scanner to check for complete stripping. The blots were activated with methanol for 5 seconds, washed with water for 5 minutes, and TBST for 15 minutes. The blots were blocked for 1 hour with 5% blocking reagent in TBS-T at room temperature and then washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the primary antibody for Hif 1 alpha, Caspase 3 or PDHB in 5% BSA (at 1:200 by incubation overnight at 4 deg C. with gentle shaking. The primary antibody for Hif 1 alpha (Abcam ab2185; antirabbit) was at 1:500 dilution in 5% BSA. The primary antibody for Caspase 3 (Santacruz sc7272; antirabbit) was at 1:200 dilution in 5% BSA. The primary antibody for Pyruvate Dehydrogenase beta (PDHB) (Novus Biologicals H00005162-M03; antimouse) was at 1:500 dilution in 5% BSA. After incubation with primary antibodies, the membranes were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the secondary antibody (PDHB antimouse; Hif1a and Caspase 3 antirabbit; 1:10,000 dilution) for 1 h at room temperature. After 1 h of incubation with secondary antibodies, the blots were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and then incubated with ECF reagent for 5 minutes and then each blot scanned with 5100 Fuji Laser scanner at 25 uM resolution, 16 bit, green laser, at 400V and at 500 V.

Experimental Protocol for PKM2, SDHB and SDHC:

The above blots were stripped by incubating for 30 minutes with methanol, followed by two 10 minute washes with TBS-T, then 30 minutes of incubation with Stripping buffer at 50 deg C., and followed by two washes with 100 ml or more of TBS-T for 30′ each. The blots were scanned in laser scanner to check for complete stripping. The blots were activated with methanol for 5 seconds, washed with water for 5 minutes, and TBST for 15 minutes. The blots were blocked for 1 hour with 5% blocking reagent in TBS-T at room temperature and then washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the primary antibody for PKM2, SDHB or SDHC in 5% BSA in TBS-T by incubation overnight at 4 deg C. with gentle shaking. The primary antibody for SDHC (ABNOVA H00006391-M02; antimouse) was at 1:500 dilution. The primary antibody for SDHB was from Abcam ab4714-200; antimouse; at 1:1000 dilution. The primary antibody for Pyruvate Kinase M2 (PKM2) was from Novus Biologicals H00005315-D01P; antirabbit; at 1:500 dilution. After incubation with primary antibodies, the membranes were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the secondary antibody (SDHB & C antimouse; and PKM2 antirabbit; 1:10,000 dilution) for 1 h on the orbital tilting shaker at room temperature. After 1 h of incubation, the blots were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and incubated with ECF reagent for 5 minutes and then each blot scanned with 5100 Fuji Laser scanner at 25 uM resolution, 16 bit, green laser, at 400V and at 500 V.

Experimental Protocol for LDH and Bik:

The above blots were stripped by incubating for 30 minutes with methanol, followed by two 10 minute washes with TBS-T, then 30 minutes of incubation with Stripping buffer at 50 deg C., and followed by two washes with 100 ml or more of TBS-T for 30′ each. The blots were scanned in laser scanner to check for complete stripping. The blots were activated with methanol for 5 seconds, washed with water for 5 minutes, and TBST for 15 minutes. The blots were blocked for 1 hour with 5% blocking reagent in TBS-T at room temperature and then washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the primary antibody for LDH or Bik in 5% BSA in TBS-T by incubation overnight at 4 deg C. with gentle shaking. The primary antibody for LDH was from Abcam ab2101; antigoat; at 1:1000 dilution. The primary antibody for Bik was from Cell Signaling #9942; antirabbit; at 1:1000 dilution. After incubation with primary antibodies, the membranes were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the secondary antibody (LDH antigoat; Jackson Laboratories) and Bik antirabbit; 1:10,000 dilution) for 1 h on the orbital tilting shaker at room temperature. After 1 h of incubation, the blots were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and incubated with ECF reagent for 5 minutes and then each blot scanned with 5100 Fuji Laser scanner at 25 uM resolution, 16 bit, green laser, at 400V and at 500 V.

Western Blot Experiment 9

The cells used were HepG2 cells that were treated or not with Coenzyme Q10 at two different concentrations, 50 μM or 100 μM, and harvested after 24 or 48 hours of treatment. The HepG2 samples processed and the gels were run, transferred, stained and scanned essentially as described above.

Experimental Protocol for Actin:

The levels of actin were determined by probing the blots with a primary antibody for actin, essentially as described above.

Experimental Protocol for Caspase3 and MMP-6:

The Actin blots were stripped by incubating for 30 minutes with methanol, followed by two 10 minute washes with TBS-T, then 30 minutes of incubation with Stripping buffer at 50 deg C., and followed by two washes with 100 ml or more of TBS-T for 30′ each. The blots were activated with methanol for 5 seconds, washed with water for 5 minutes, and TBST for 15 minutes. The blots were blocked for 1 hour with 5% blocking reagent in TBS-T at room temperature and then washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the primary antibody for Caspase 3 or MMP-6 in 5% BSA by incubation overnight at 4 deg C. with gentle shaking. The primary antibody for Caspase 3 (Abcam ab44976-100; antirabbit) was at 1:500 dilution in 5% BSA. The primary antibody for MMP-6 (Santacruz scMM0029-ZB5; antimouse) was at 1:100 dilution in 5% BSA. After incubation with primary antibodies, the membranes were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the secondary antibody (MMP-6 antimouse; Caspase 3 antirabbit; 1:10,000 dilution) for 1 h at room temperature. After 1 h of incubation with secondary antibodies, the blots were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and then incubated with ECF reagent for 5 minutes and then each blot scanned with 5100 Fuji Laser scanner at 25 uM resolution, 16 bit, green laser, at 400V and at 500 V.

Experimental Protocol for LDH:

The above blots were stripped by incubating for 30 minutes with methanol, followed by two 10 minute washes with TBS-T, then 30 minutes of incubation with stripping buffer at 50 deg C., and followed by two washes with 100 ml or more of TBS-T for 30′ each. The blots were activated with methanol for 5 seconds, washed with water for 5 minutes, and TBST for 15 minutes. The blots ere blocked for 1 hour with 5% blocking reagent in TBS-T at room temperature and then washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the primary antibody for LDH in 5% BSA or 5% milk by incubation overnight at 4 deg C. with gentle shaking. The primary antibody for LDH 080309b1 (Abeam ab2101; antigoat) was at 1:1000 dilution in 5% BSA. The primary antibody for LDH 080309b2 (Abeam ab2101; antigoat) was at 1:1000 dilution in 5% milk. After incubation with primary antibodies, the membranes were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the secondary antibody (Jackson Immuno Research antigoat; 1:10,000 dilution; 305-055-045) for 1 h. After 1 h of incubation with secondary antibodies, the blots were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and then incubated with ECF reagent for 5 minutes and then each blot scanned with 5100 Fuji Laser scanner at 25 uM resolution, 16 bit, green laser, at 400V and at 500 V.

Experimental Protocol for Transaldolase and Hif1a:

The above blots were stripped by incubating for 30 minutes with methanol, followed by two 10 minute washes with TBS-T, then 30 minutes of incubation with Stripping buffer at 50 deg C., and followed by two washes with 100 ml or more of TBS-T for 30′ each. The blots were activated with methanol for 5 seconds, washed with water for 5 minutes, and TBST for 15 minutes. The blots are blocked for 1 hour with 5% blocking reagent in TBS-T at room temperature and then washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the primary antibody for Transaldolase or Hif1a in 5% BSA by incubation overnight at 4 deg C. with gentle shaking. The primary antibody for Transaldolase (Abcam ab67467; antimouse) was at 1:500 dilution. The primary antibody for Hif1a (Abcam ab2185; antirabbit) was at 1:500 dilution. After incubation with primary antibodies, the membranes were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the secondary antibody (antimouse or antirabbit; 1:10,000 dilution) for 1 h on the orbital tilting shaker at room temperature. After 1 h of incubation with secondary antibodies, the blots were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and then incubated with ECF reagent for 5 minutes and then each blot scanned with 5100 Fuji Laser scanner at 25 uM resolution, 16 bit, green laser, at 400 & 500V.

Experimental Protocol for IGFBP3 and TP53:

The above blots were stripped by incubating for 30 minutes with methanol, followed by two 10 minute washes with TBS-T, then 30 minutes of incubation with Stripping buffer at 50 deg C., and followed by two washes with 100 ml or more of TBS-T for 30′ each. The blots were activated with methanol for 5 seconds, washed with water for 5 minutes, and TBST for 15 minutes. The blots are blocked for 1 hour with 5% blocking reagent in TBS-T at room temperature and then washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the primary antibody for IGFBP3 or TP53 in 5% BSA by incubation overnight at 4 deg C. with gentle shaking. The primary antibody for IGFBP3 (Abcam ab76001; antirabbit) was at 1:100 dilution. The primary antibody for TP53 (Sigma Aldrich AV02055; antirabbit) was at 1:100 dilution. After incubation with primary antibodies, the membranes were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the secondary antibody (antirabbit; 1:10,000 dilution) for 1 h on the orbital tilting shaker at room temperature. After 1 h of incubation with secondary antibodies, the blots were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and then incubated with ECF reagent for 5 minutes and then each blot scanned with 5100 Fuji Laser scanner at 25 uM resolution, 16 bit, green laser, at 400 & 500V.

Experimental Protocol for Transaldolase and PDHB:

The above blots were stripped by incubating for 30 minutes with methanol, followed by two 10 minute washes with TBS-T, then 30 minutes of incubation with Stripping buffer at 50 deg C., and followed by two washes with 100 ml or more of TBS-T for 30′ each. The blots were activated with methanol for 5 seconds, washed with water for 5 minutes, and TBST for 15 minutes. The blots were blocked for 1 hour with 5% blocking reagent in TBS-T at room temperature and then washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the primary antibody for Transaldolase or PDHB in 5% BSA by incubation overnight at 4 deg C. with gentle shaking. The primary antibody for Transaldolase (Santacruz sc51440; antigoat) was at 1:200 dilution. The primary antibody for PDHB (Novus Biologicals H00005162-M03; antimouse) was at 1:500 dilution. After incubation with primary antibodies, the membranes were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and probed with the secondary antibody (antigoat or antimouse; 1:10,000 dilution) for 1 h on the orbital tilting shaker at room temperature. After 1 h of incubation with secondary antibodies, the blots were washed 3 times with TBS-T (1×-15′; 2× 5′ each) and then incubated with ECF reagent for 5 minutes and then each blot scanned with 5100 Fuji Laser scanner at 25 uM resolution, 16 bit, green laser, at 400 & 500V.

Results Isocitrate Dehydrogenase-1 (IDH-1)

Isocitrate dehydrogenase is one of the enzymes that is part of the TCA cycle that usually occurs within the mitochondrial matrix. However, IDH1 is the cytosolic form of the enzyme that catalyzes the oxidative decarboxylation of isocitrate to α-ketoglutarate and generates carbon dioxide in a two step process. IDH1 is the NADP⁺ dependent form that is present in the cytosol and peroxisome. IDH1 is inactivated by Ser113 phosphorylation and is expressed in many species including those without a citric acid cycle. IDH1 appears to function normally as a tumor suppressor which upon inactivation contributes to tumorigenesis partly through activation of the HIF-1 pathway (Bayley 2010; Reitman, 2010). Recent studies have implicated an inactivating mutation in IDH1 in the etiology of glioblasotoma (Bleeker, 2009; Bleeker, 2010).

Treatment with Coenzyme Q10 increased expression of IDH1 in cancer cell lines including MCF-7, SKMEL28, HepG2 and PaCa-2 cells. There was a moderate increase in expression in the SCC25 cell lines. In contrast cultures of primary human derived fibroblasts HDFa, nFIB and the human aortic smooth muscle cells HASMC did not demonstrate significant changes in the expression pattern of the IDH1 in response to Coenzyme Q10. α-ketoglutarate (α-KG) is a key intermediate in the TCA cycle, biochemically synthesized from isocitrate and is eventually converted to succinyl coA and is a druggable MIM and EpiShifter. The generation of α-KG serves as a critical juncture in the TCA cycle as it can be used by the cell to replenish intermediates of the cycle, resulting in generation of reducing equivalents to increase oxidative phosphorylation. Thus, Coenzyme Q10 mediated increase in IDH1 expression would result in formation of intermediates that can be used by the mitochondrial TCA cycle to augment oxidative phosphorylation in cancer cells. The results are summarized in Tables 30-32, below.

TABLE 30 IDH1 in HDFa and MCF-7 Composition Average Normalized Intensity HDF, Media 346 HDF24-50-Coenzyme Q10 519 HDF24-100-Coenzyme Q10 600 MCF, Media 221 MCF24-50-Coenzyme Q10 336 MCF24-100-Coenzyme Q10 649

TABLE 31 IDH1 in HASMC vs. HepG2 after Treatment Amount - Composition Normalized Intensity HAS5g48-media 20 HAS5g48-50-Coenzyme Q10 948 HAS5g48-100-Coenzyme Q10 1864 HAS22G48-Media 1917 HAS22G48-50-Coenzyme Q10 1370 HAS22G48-100-Coenzyme Q10 1023 Hep5g48-Media 14892 Hep5g48-50-Coenzyme Q10 14106 Hep5g48-100-Coenzyme Q10 15774 Hep22G48-Media 16558 Hep22G48-50-Coenzyme Q10 15537 Hep22G48-100-Coenzyme Q10 27878

TABLE 32 IDH1 in HASMC vs. PACA2 after Treatment Amount - Composition Normalized Intensity HAS5g48-media 562 HAS5g48-50-Coenzyme Q10 509 HAS5g48-100-Coenzyme Q10 627 HAS22G48-Media 822 HAS22G48-50-Coenzyme Q10 1028 HAS22G48-100-Coenzyme Q10 1015 PACA5g48-Media 1095 PACA5g48-50-Coenzyme Q10 1095 PACA5g48-100-Coenzyme Q10 860 PACA22G48-Media 1103 PACA22G48-50-Coenzyme Q10 1503 PACA22G48-100-Coenzyme Q10 1630

ATP Citrate Lyase (ACL)

ATP citrate Lyase (ACL) is a homotetramer (˜126 kd) enzyme that catalyzes the formation of acteyl-CoA and oxaloacetate in the cytosol. This reaction is a very important first step for the biosynthesis of fatty acids, cholesterol, and acetylcholine, as well as for glucogenesis (Towle et al., 1997). Nutrients and hormones regulate the expression level and phosphorylation status of this key enzyme. Ser454 phosphorylation of ACL by Akt and PKA has been reported (Berwick., D C M W et al., 2002; Pierce M W et al., 1982).

The data describes the effect of Coenzyme Q10 on ATP citrate Lyase is that in normal and cancer cells. It is consistently observed that in cancer cells there is a dose-dependent decrease in the expression of ACL enzymes. In contrast there appears to be a trend towards increased expression of ACL in normal cells. Cytosolic ACL has been demonstrated to be essential for histone acetylation in cells during growth factor stimulation and during differentiation. The fact that ACL utilizes cytosolic glucose derived citrate to generate Acetyl CoA essential for histone acetylation, a process important in the neoplastic process demonstrates a role of Coenzyme Q10 induced ACL expression in influencing cancer cell function. Acetyl CoA generated from citrate by cytosolic ACL serves as a source for biosynthesis of new lipids and cholesterol during cell division. Thus, Coenzyme Q10 induced changes in ACL expression alters Acetyl CoA availability for synthesis of lipids and cholesterol in normal versus cancer cells. The results are summarized in tables 33-36 below.

TABLE 33 ATPCL in HDFa and MCF-7 Composition Average Normalized Intensity HDF-Media ~15000 HDF-50-Coenzyme Q10 ~17500 HDF-100-Coenzyme Q10 ~25000 MCF-Media ~7500 MCF-50-Coenzyme Q10 ~7500 MCF-100-Coenzyme Q10 ~12500

TABLE 34 ATP Citrate Lysase ~kd band in HASMC vs. HepG2 Amount - Composition Normalized Intensity HAS5g48-media 24557 HAS5g48-50-Coenzyme Q10 23341 HAS5g48-100-Coenzyme Q10 25544 HAS22G48-Media 27014 HAS22G48-50-Coenzyme Q10 21439 HAS22G48-100-Coenzyme Q10 19491 Hep5g48-Media 28377 Hep5g48-50-Coenzyme Q10 24106 Hep5g48-100-Coenzyme Q10 22463 Hep22G48-Media 24262 Hep22G48-50-Coenzyme Q10 31235 Hep22G48-100-Coenzyme Q10 50588

TABLE 35 ATP Citrate Lysase ~kd band in HASMC vs. PACA2 Amount - Composition Normalized Intensity HAS5g48-media 11036 HAS5g48-50-Coenzyme Q10 12056 HAS5g48-100-Coenzyme Q10 15265 HAS22G48-Media 18270 HAS22G48-50-Coenzyme Q10 15857 HAS22G48-100-Coenzyme Q10 13892 PACA5g48-Media 11727 PACA5g48-50-Coenzyme Q10 8027 PACA5g48-100-Coenzyme Q10 4942 PACA22G48-Media 8541 PACA22G48-50-Coenzyme Q10 9537 PACA22G48-100-Coenzyme Q10 14901

TABLE 36 ATP Citrate Lysase in HepG2 and PACA2 as % of CTRL Amount - Composition Normalized Intensity PACA5g48-Media 1.00 PACA5g48-50-Coenzyme Q10 0.68 PACA5g48-100-Coenzyme Q10 0.42 PACA22G48-Media 1.00 PACA22G48-50-Coenzyme Q10 1.12 PACA22G48-100-Coenzyme Q10 1.74 Hep5g48-Media 1.00 Hep5g48-50-Coenzyme Q10 0.85 Hep5g48-100-Coenzyme Q10 0.79 Hep22G48-Media 1.00 Hep22G48-50-Coenzyme Q10 1.29 Hep22G48-100-Coenzyme Q10 2.09

Pyruvate Kinase M2 (PKM2)

Pyruvate Kinase is an enzyme involved in the glycolytic pathway. It is responsible for the transfer of phosphate from phosphoenolpyruvate (PEP) to adenosine diphosphophate (ADP) to generate ATP and pyruvate. PKM2 is an isoenzyme of the glycolytic pyruvate kinase, expression of which is characterized by the metabolic function of the tissue i.e. M2 isoenzyme is expressed in normal rapidly proliferating cells with high energy needs such as embryonic cells and also expressed in few normal differentiated tissues such as lung and pancreatic islet cells that require high rate of nucleic acid synthesis. PKM2 is highly expressed in tumor cells due to their dependence on glycolytic pathway for meeting cellular energetic requirements. The PKM2 isoform normally thought to be embryonically restricted is re-expressed in cancerous cells. Cells expressing PKM2 favor a stronger aerobic glycolytic phenotype (show a shift in metabolic phenotype) with increased lactate production and decreased oxidative phosphorylation. Thus, decrease in expression of PKM2 in cancer cells would shift or down-regulate energy generation via the glycolytic pathway, a strategy that is useful in the treatment of cancer. Data demonstrates variable expression pattern of PKM2 in normal and cancer cells, with cancer cells demonstrating higher levels of expression compared to normal. Treatment of cells with Coenzyme Q10 altered expression pattern of the PKM2 upper and lower band levels in normal and cancer cells. In cancer cells tested, there was a dose-dependent decrease in the PKM2 expression, and no major changes in normal cells were observed. The results are summarized in tables 37-39, below.

TABLE 37 Pyruvate Kinase Muscle form 2 Upper Band in HepG2 Normalized Volume Normalized Amount - Composition (24 h) Intensity (48 h) 5g-Media 28386 413 5g-50-Coenzyme Q10 29269 303 5g-100-Coenzyme Q10 18307 354 22G-Media 25903 659 22G-50-Coenzyme Q10 22294 562 22G-100-Coenzyme Q10 19560 601

TABLE 38 Pyruvate Kinase Muscle form 2 Lower Band (58 KD) in HepG2 Normalized Normalized Amount - Composition Volume (24 h) Volume (48 h) 5g-Media 10483 310 5g-50-Coenzyme Q10 11197 185 5g-100-Coenzyme Q10 7642 122 22G-Media 9150 306 22G-50-Coenzyme Q10 6302 344 22G-100-Coenzyme Q10 6904 465

TABLE 39 Pyruvate Kinase Muscle form 2 Upper Band in HASMC Cells after Treatment Amount - Composition Normalized Intensity 5g48-Media 608 5g48-50-Coenzyme Q10 811 5g48-100-Coenzyme Q10 611 22G48-Media 516 22G48-50-Coenzyme Q10 595 22G48-100-Coenzyme Q10 496 22G24-Media 301 22G24-50-Coenzyme Q10 477 22G24-100-Coenzyme Q10 701

Lactate Dehydrogenase (LDH)

LDH is an enzyme that catalyzes the interconversion of pyruvate and lactate with the simultaneous interconversion of NADH and NAD⁺. It has the ability to convert pyruvate to lactate (lactic acid) under low cell oxygen tension for generation of reducing equivalents and ATP generation at the expense of mitochondrial oxidative phosphorylation. Cancer cells typically demonstrate increased expression of LDH to maintain the glycolytic flux to generate ATP and reducing equivalents and reducing mitochondrial OXPHOS. Thus, reducing the expression of the LDH in cancer cells would shift metabolism from generation of lactate to facilitate entry of pyruvate into the TCA cycle. Treatment with Coenzyme Q10 reduced Lactate Dehydrogenase (LDH) expression in cancer with minimal effect on normal cells, supporting a role for Coenzyme Q10 in eliciting a shift in cancer cell bioenergtics for the generation of ATP from glycolytic to mitochondrial OXPHOS sources by minimizing the conversion of cytoplasmic pyruvate to lactic acid. The results are summarized in tables 40-42, below.

TABLE 40 Lactate Dehydrogenase in HepG2 Normalized Normalized Amount - Composition Volume (24 h) Volume (48 h) 5g-Media 7981 5997 5g-50-Coenzyme Q10 7900 5188 5g-100-Coenzyme Q10 6616 7319 22G-Media 9171 7527 22G-50-Coenzyme Q10 7550 6173 22G-100-Coenzyme Q10 7124 9141

TABLE 41 Lactate Dehydrogenase in HepG2 as % Control from 2 Experiments Average Volume as a Amount - Composition % of Control 5g24-Media 1.00 5g24-50-Coenzyme Q10 0.64 5g24-100-Coenzyme Q10 1.06 5g48-Media 1.00 5g48-50-Coenzyme Q10 1.12 5g48-100-Coenzyme Q10 1.21 22G24-Media 1.00 22G24-50-Coenzyme Q10 1.21 22G24-100-Coenzyme Q10 1.44 22G48-Media 1.00 22G48-50-Coenzyme Q10 0.95 22G48-100-Coenzyme Q10 0.67

TABLE 42 Lactate Dehydrogenase in PACA2 Normalized Volume Normalized Amount - Composition (24 h) Volume (48 h) 5g-Media 2122 2360 5g-50-Coenzyme Q10 5068 2978 5g-100-Coenzyme Q10 3675 2396 22G-Media 4499 2332 22G-50-Coenzyme Q10 10218 2575 22G-100-Coenzyme Q10 7158 3557

Pyruvate Dehydrogenase-B (PDH-E1)

Pyruvate Dehydrogenase beta (PDH-E1) is the first enzyme component that is part of the pyruvate dehydrogenase complex (PDC) that converts pyruvate to acetyl CoA. PDH-E1 requires thiamine as cofactor for its activity, performs the first two biochemical reactions in the PDC complex essential for the conversion of pyruvate to acetyl CoA to enter the TCA cycle in the mitochondria. Thus, concomitant decreases in PKM2 and LDH expression along with increase in expression of PDH-E1 in cancer cells would enhance the rate of entry of pyruvate towards augmenting the mitochondrial OXPHOS for generation of ATP. The data shows that for expression of PDH-E1 in normal and cancer cell lines, the baseline expressions of this enzyme is decreased in cancer compared to normal cells. Treatment with Coenzyme Q10 is associated with progressive increase in the expression of the PDH-E1 proteins in cancer cells with minimal changes in the normal cells. The results are summarized in tables 43-45, below.

TABLE 43 Pyruvate Dehydrogenase Beta in HepG2 Normalized Normalized Amount - Composition Volume (24 h) Volume (48 h) 5g-Media 517 100 5g-50-Coenzyme Q10 921 123 5g-100-Coenzyme Q10 433 205 22G-Media 484 181 22G-50-Coenzyme Q10 426 232 22G-100-Coenzyme Q10 340 456

TABLE 44 Pyruvate Dehydrogenase Beta in PACA2 Normalized Normalized Amount - Composition Volume (24 h) Volume (48 h) 5g-Media 323 375 5g-50-Coenzyme Q10 492 339 5g-100-Coenzyme Q10 467 252 22G-Media 572 276 22G-50-Coenzyme Q10 924 279 22G-100-Coenzyme Q10 1201 385

TABLE 45 Pyruvate Dehydrogenase Beta in HASMC after Treatment Amount - Composition Normalized Volume 5g48-Media 140 5g48-50-Coenzyme Q10 147 5g48-100-Coenzyme Q10 147 22G48-Media 174 22G48-50-Coenzyme Q10 149 22G48-100-Coenzyme Q10 123 22G24-Media 140 22G24-50-Coenzyme Q10 145 22G24-100-Coenzyme Q10 150

Caspase 3

Control of the onset of apoptosis is often exerted at the level of the initiator caspases, caspase-2, -9 and -8/10. In the extrinsic pathway of apoptosis, caspase-8, once active, directly cleaves and activates executioner caspases (such as caspase-3). The active caspase-3 cleaves and activates other caspases (6, 7, and 9) as well as relevant targets in the cells (e.g. PARP and DFF). In these studies, the levels of effectors caspase-3 protein were measured in the cancer cell lines and in normal cell lines in response to Coenzyme Q10. It should be noted although control of apoptosis is through initiator caspases, a number of signaling pathways interrupt instead the transmission of the apoptotic signal through direct inhibition of effectors caspases. For e.g. P38 MAPK phosphorylates caspase-3 and suppresses its activity (Alvarado-Kristensson et al., 2004). Interestingly, activation of protein phosphates (PP2A) in the same study or protein kinase C delta (PKC delta) (Voss et al., 2005) can counteract the effect of p38 MAPK to amplify the caspase-3 activation and bolster the transmission of the apoptotic signal. Therefore, events at the level of caspase-3 activation or after Caspase 3 activation may determine the ultimate fate of the cell in some cases.

Caspase-3 is a cysteine-aspartic acid protease that plays a central role in the execution phase of cell apoptosis. The levels of caspase 3 in the cancer cells were increased with Coenzyme Q10 treatment. In contrast the expression of Caspase-3 in normal cells was moderately decreased in normal cells. The results are summarized in tables 46-48, below.

TABLE 46 Caspase 3 in PACA2 Normalized Normalized Amount - Composition Volume (24 h) Volume (48 h) 5g-Media 324 300 5g-50-Coenzyme Q10 325 701 5g-100-Coenzyme Q10 374 291 22G-Media 344 135 22G-50-Coenzyme Q10 675 497 22G-100-Coenzyme Q10 842 559

TABLE 47 Caspase 3 in HepG2 cells as % Control from 2 Experiments NormalizedVolume as Amount - Composition a % of Control 5g24-Media 1..00 5g24-50-Coenzyme Q10 1.08 5g24-100-Coenzyme Q10 1.76 5g48-Media 1.00 5g48-50-Coenzyme Q10 1.44 5g48-100-Coenzyme Q10 0.95 22G24-Media 1.00 22G24-50-Coenzyme Q10 1.39 22G24-100-Coenzyme Q10 1.78 22G48-Media 1.00 22G48-50-Coenzyme Q10 1.50 22G48-100-Coenzyme Q10 1.45

TABLE 48 Caspase 3 in HASMC after Treatment Amount - Composition Normalized Volume 5g48-Media 658 5g48-50-Coenzyme Q10 766 5g48-100-Coenzyme Q10 669 22G48-Media 846 22G48-50-Coenzyme Q10 639 22G48-100-Coenzyme Q10 624 22G24-Media 982 22G24-50-Coenzyme Q10 835 22G24-100-Coenzyme Q10 865

Succinate Dehydrogenase (SDH)

Succinate dehydrogenase, also known as succinate-coenzyme Q reductase is a complex of the inner mitochondrial membrane that is involved in both TCA and electron transport chain. In the TCA, this complex catalyzes the oxidation of succinate to fumarate with the concomitant reduction of ubiquinone to ubiquinol. (Baysal et al., Science 2000; and Tomlinson et al., Nature Genetics 2002). Germline mutations in SDH B, C and D subunits were found to be initiating events of familial paraganglioma or leiomyoma (Baysal et al., Science 2000).

Western blotting analysis was used to characterize expression of SDH Subunit B in mitochondrial preparations of cancer cells treated with Coenzyme Q10. The results suggest that Coenzyme Q10 treatment is associated with increase SDH protein levels in the mitochondrion of the cells. These results suggest one of the mechanisms of action of Coenzyme Q10 is to shift the metabolism of the cell towards the TCA cycle and the mitochondrion by increasing the levels of mitochondrial enzymes such as SDHB. The results are summarized in table 49, below.

TABLE 49 Succinate Dehydrogenase B in NCIE0808 Mitopreps Composition - Time Average Normalized Volume Media 531  50 uM Coezyme Q10, 3 h 634 100 uM Coenzyme Q10, 3 h 964  50 uM Coenzyme Q10, 6 h 1077 100 uM Coenzyme Q10, 6 h 934

Hypoxia Induced Factor-1

Hypoxia inducible factor (Hif) is a transcription factor composed of alpha and beta subunits. Under normoxia, the protein levels of Hif1 alpha are very low owing to its continuous degradation via a sequence of post translational events. The shift between glycolytic and oxidative phosphorylation is generally considered to be controlled by the relative activities of two enzymes PDH and LDH that determine the catabolic fate of pyruvate. Hif controls this crucial bifurgation point by inducing LDH levels and inhibiting PDH activity by stimulating PDK. Due to this ability to divert pyruvate metabolism from mitochondrion to cytosol, Hif is considered a crucial mediator of the bioenergetic switch in cancer cells.

Treatment with Coenzyme Q10 decreased Hif1 alpha protein levels after in mitochondrial preparations of cancer cells. In whole cell lysates of normal cells, the lower band of Hif1a was observed and showed a decrease as well. The results are summarized in tables 50-51, below.

TABLE 50 Hif1 alpha Lower Band in HASMC Cells after Treatment Amount - Composition Normalized Volume 5g48-Media 22244 5g48-50-Coenzyme Q10 21664 5g48-100-Coenzyme Q10 19540 22G48-Media 14752 22G48-50-Coenzyme Q10 17496 22G48-100-Coenzyme Q10 23111 22G24-Media 21073 22G24-50-Coenzyme Q10 18486 22G24-100-Coenzyme Q10 17919

TABLE 51 Hif1 alpha Upper Band in HepG2 after Treatment Amount - Composition Normalized Volume 5g24-Media 12186 5g24-50-Coenzyme Q10 8998 5g24-100-Coenzyme Q10 9315 5g48-Media 8868 5g48-50-Coenzyme Q10 8601 5g48-100-Coenzyme Q10 10192 22G24-Media 11748 22G24-50-Coenzyme Q10 14089 22G24-100-Coenzyme Q10 8530 22G48-Media 8695 22G48-50-Coenzyme Q10 9416 22G48-100-Coenzyme Q10 5608

Example 22 Analysis of Oxygen Consumption Rates (OCR) and Extracellular Acidification (ECAR) in Normal and Cancer cCells Treated with CoQ10

This example demonstrates that exposure of cells to treatment by a representative MIM/epi-shifter of the invention—CoQ10—in the absence and/or presence of stressors (e.g., hyperglycemia, hypoxia, lactic acid), is associated with a shift towards glycolysis/lactate biosynthesis and mitochondrial oxidative phosphorylation (as measured by ECAR and OCR values) representative of values observed in a normal cells under normal physiological conditions.

Applicants have demonstrated in the previous section that treatment with CoQ10 in cancer cells is associated with changes in expression of specific proteins that enhance mitochondrial oxidative phosphorylation, with a concomitant decrease in glycolysis and lactate biosynthesis. This example shows that a direct measure of mitochondrial oxidative phosphorylation can be obtained by measuring the oxygen consumption rates (OCR) in cell lines using the SeaHorse XF analyzer, an instrument that measures dissolved oxygen and extracellular pH levels in an in vitro experimental model. (SeaHorse Biosciences Inc, North Billerica, Mass.).

The pH of the extracellular microenvironment is relatively acidic in tumors compared to the intracellular (cytoplasmic) pH and surrounding normal tissues. This characteristic of tumors serves multiple purposes, including the ability to invade the extracellular matrix (ECM), a hallmark attribute of tumor metastasis that subsequently initiates signaling cascades that further modulate:

-   -   tumor angiogenesis     -   increased activation of arrest mechanisms that control cell         cycle turn-over     -   immuno-modulatory mechanisms that facilitate a cellular evasion         system against immunosurveillance     -   metabolic control elements that increase dependency on         glycolytic flux and lactate utilization     -   dysregulation of key apopototic gene families such as Bcl-2,         IAP, EndoG, AIF that serve to increase oncogenicity

While not wishing to be bound by any particular theory, the acidic pH of the external microenvironment in the tumor is a consequence of increase in hydrogen ion concentrations extruded from the tumor cells due to the increased lactate production from an altered glycolytic phenotype.

In this experiment, the OCR and extracellular acidification rate (ECAR) in normal cells lines were obtained in the presence and absence of CoQ10 to determine baseline values. It was observed that in its native nutrient environment, the basal OCR rates in normal cells lines are different, and are usually a function of the physiological roles of the cells in the body.

For example, one set of experiments were conducted using the non-cancerous cell line HDFa, which is a human adult dermal fibroblast cell line. Fibroblasts are cells that primarily synthesize and secrete extracellular matrix (ECM) components and collagen that form the structural framework (stroma) for tissues. In addition, fibroblasts are known to serve as tissue ambassadors of numerous functions such as wound healing and localized immnomodulation. Under normal physiological conditions, energy requirements in normal fibroblasts are met using a combination of glycolysis and oxidative phosphorylation—the glycolysis providing the necessary nutrients for synthesis of ECM.

In contrast to HDFa, the HASMC (human aortic smooth muscle cell) is found in arteries, veins, lymphatic vessels, gastrointestinal tracts, respiratory tract, urinary bladder and other tissues with the ability to undergo regulated excitation-contraction coupling. The ability of smooth muscles such as HASMC cells to undergo contraction requires energy provided by ATP. These tissues transition from low energy modes wherein ATP may be supplied from mitochondria to high energy modes (during exercise/stress) where energy is provided by switching to glycolysis for rapid generation of ATP. Thus, normal smooth muscle cells can use a combination of mitochondrial OXPHOS and glycolysis to meet their energy requirements under normal physiological environment.

The differences in their respective physiological roles (i.e., HDFa and HASMC) were observed in the resting OCR values measured in these cells lines using the SeaHorse XF analyzer. FIGS. 29 and 30 describe the OCR in HDFa and HASMC cells grown in physiologically normal glucose (about 4.6 mM) and high glucose (hyperglycemic) conditions.

The baseline OCR values for HDFa in the absence of any treatments under normal oxygen availability is approximately 40 pmoles/min (FIG. 29) in the presence of 5.5 mM glucose. This value was slightly elevated when the cells were maintained at 22 mM glucose. In contrast, in HASMC cells, the OCR values at 5.5 mM glucose is approximately 90 pmoles/min, and the OCR value declined to approximately 40 pmoles/min while at 22 mM glucose. Thus, under hyperglycemic conditions, there is a differential response between HDFa and HASMC, further demonstrating inherent differences in their respective physiological make-up and function.

Treatment with CoQ10 in cells is associated with changes in OCR that is representative of conditions observed at normal (5 mM) glucose conditions. The complexity of physiological response is compounded in the presence of low oxygen tension. Thus, CoQ10 exposure is associated with changes in OCR rates in normal cells towards a physiological state that is native to a particular cell.

Table 52, below, describes the ECAR values (mpH/m in) in HDFa cells in the presence or absence of CoQ under normoxic and hypoxic conditions at 5.5 mM and 22 mM glucose. It can be observed that in normal cells, treatment with CoQ10 had minimal influence on ECAR values, even though it influenced OCR in these cells. In high glucose hypoxic conditions, treatment with CoQ10 was associated with lowering of elevated ECAR to a value that was observed in untreated normoxic conditions.

TABLE 52 ECAR values in HDFa cells in the absence and presence of CoQ10 under normoxic and hypoxic conditions at 5.5 mM and 22 mM glucose Normoxia Hypoxia Normoxia Hypoxia (5.5 mM) (5.5 mM) (22 mM) (22 mM) Treatment ECAR SEM ECAR SEM ECAR SEM ECAR SEM Untreated 5 1.32 5 0.62 5 0.62 9 0.81  50 μM 6 1.11 5 0.78 5 0.78 6 0.70 31510 100 μM 6 0.76 5 1.19 5 1.19 8 1.07 31510

In Table 53 the measured baseline ECAR values (mpH/min) in HASMC were higher compared to that of HDFa. Induction of hypoxic conditions caused an increase in ECAR most likely associated with intracellular hypoxia induced acidosis secondary to increased glycolysis.

TABLE 53 ECAR values in HASMC cells in the absence and presence of CoQ10 under normoxic and hypoxic conditions at 5.5 mM and 22 mM glucose Normoxic Hypoxic Normoxic Hypoxic (5.5 mM) (5.5 mM) (22 mM) (22 mM) Treatment ECAR SEM ECAR SEM ECAR SEM ECAR SEM Untreated 9 2.22 11 2.18 22 2.08 19 1.45  50 μM 9 2.13 11 2.54 21 1.72 17 1.60 31510 100 μM 9 1.72 13 2.30 22 1.64 17 1.47 31510

Treatment with CoQ10 was observed to be associated with a downward trend of ECAR rates in hyperglycemic HASMC cells in hypoxic conditions towards a value that would be observed in normoxic normal glucose conditions. These data demonstrate the presence of physiological variables that is inherent to the physiological role of a specific type of cell, alterations observed in abnormal conditions (e.g. hyperglycemia) is shifted towards normal when treated with CoQ10.

In contrast, cancer cells (e.g., MCF-7, PaCa-2) are inherently primed to culture at higher levels of glucose compared to normal cells due to their glycolytic phenotype for maintenance in culture. Treatment with CoQ10 caused a consistent reduction in OCR values (FIG. 31 and FIG. 32).

The effects of CoQ10 on OCR values in MCF-7 and PaCa-2 cells was similar to that of the normal HDFa and HASMC cells, wherein the variable response was suggestive of a therapeutic response based on individual metabolic profile of the cancer cell line.

TABLE 54 ECAR values in PaCa-2 cells in the absence and presence of CoQ10 under normoxic and hypoxic conditions at 5.5 mM and 22 mM glucose Normoxia Hypoxia Normoxia Hypoxia (17 mM) (17 mM) (22 mM) (22 mM) Treatment ECAR SEM ECAR SEM ECAR SEM ECAR SEM Untreated 21 5.97 16 3.41 24 4.35 36 5.65  50 μM 13 3.08 12 1.66 20 5.15 25 4.58 31510 100 μM 14 2.14 17 2.59 19 3.38 30 5.62 31510

Table 54 describes the ECAR values in PaCa-2 cells. In contrast to normal cells, cancer cells are phenotypically primed to use high glucose for ATP generation (enhanced glycolysis) resulting in higher ECAR (Table 54, ECAR for untreated normoxia 17 mM) at 21 mpH/min. Treatment with CoQ10 produces a significant decrease in ECAR rates under these conditions, most likely associated with a decrease in the glycolysis generated lactic acid. The associated decrease in OCR in these cells was likely associated with increased efficiency of the mitochondrial OXPHOS.

A similar comparison of OCR and ECAR values (data not shown) were determined in numerous other normal and cancer cells lines, including: HAEC (normal human aortic endothelial cells), MCF-7 (breast cancer), HepG2 (liver cancer) and highly metastatic PC-3 (prostate cancer) cell lines. In all of the cell lines tested, exposure to CoQ10 in the absence and/or presence of stressors (e.g., hyperglycemia, hypoxia, lactic acid) was associated with a shift in OCR and ECAR values representative of values observed in a normal cells under normal physiological conditions. Thus, the overall effect of CoQ10 in the treatment of cancer, including cell death, is an downstream effect of its collective influence on proteomic, genomic, metabolomic outcomes in concert with shifting of the cellular bioenergetics from glycolysis to mitochondrial OXPHOS.

Example 23 Building Block Molecules for the Biosynthesis of CoQ10

This example demonstrates that certain precursors of CoQ10 biosynthesis, such as those for the biosynthesis of the benzoquinone ring, and those for the biosynthesis of the isoprenoid repeats and their attachment to the benzoquinone ring (“building block components”), can be individually administered or administered in combination to target cells, and effect down-regulation of the apoptosis inhibitor Bcl-2, and/or up-regulation of the apoptosis promoter Caspase-3. Certain precursors or combinations thereof may also inhibit cell proliferation. The data suggests that such CoQ10 precursors may be used in place of CoQ10 to achieve substantially the same results as CoQ10 administration.

Certain exemplary experimental conditions used in the experiments are listed below.

Skmel-28 melanoma cells were cultured in DMEM/F12 supplemented with 5% Fetal Bovine Serum (FBS) and 1× final concentration of Antibiotics. The cells were grown to 85% confluency and treated with building block components for 3, 6, 12 and 24 hours. The cells were then pelleted and a Western blot analysis was performed.

The test building block components included L-Phenlylalanine, DL-Phenlyalanine, D-Phenlylalanine, L-Tyrosine, DL-Tyrosine, D-Tyrosine, 4-Hydroxy-phenylpyruvate, phenylacetate, 3-methoxy-4-hydroxymandelate (vanillylmandelate or VMA), vanillic acid, 4-hydroxy-benzoate, pyridoxine, panthenol, mevalonic acid, Acetylglycine, Acetyl-CoA, Farnesyl, and 2,3-Dimethoxy-5-methyl-p-benzoquinone.

In the Western Blot Analysis, the cells were pelleted in cold PBS, lysed, and the protein levels were quantified using a BCA protein assay. The whole cell lysate was loaded in a 4% loading 12% running Tris-HCl gel. The proteins were then transferred to a nitrocellulose paper then blocked with a 5% milk Tris-buffered solution for 1 hour. The proteins were then exposed to primary antibodies (Bcl-2 and Caspase-3) overnight. The nitrocellulose paper was then exposed to Pico Chemilluminescent for 5 min and the protein expression was recorded. After exposure, actin was quantified using the same method. Using ImageJ the levels of protein expression were quantified. A t-Test was used to analyze for statistical significance.

Illustrative results of the experiments are summarized below.

Western Blot Analysis of Building Block Component L-Phenylalanine:

Before proceeding to the synthesis pathway for the quinone ring structure, L-Phenylalanine is converted to tyrosine. A western blot analysis was performed to quantify any changes in the expression of the apoptotic proteins in the melanoma cells. The concentrations tested were 5 μM, 25 μM, and 100 μM. Initial studies added L-Phenylalanine to DMEM/F12 medium which contained a concentration of 0.4 M phenylalanine. For the 5 μM, 25 μM, and 100 μM the final concentration of the L-Phenylalanine in the medium was 0.405 M, 0.425 M, and 0.500 M, respectively. These final concentrations were tested on the Skmel-28 cells for incubation periods of 3,6, 12 and 24 hours. The cells were grown to 80% confluency before adding the treatment medium and harvested using the western blot analysis procedure as described above. A statistically significant decrease in Bcl-2 was observed for the 100 μM L-Phenylalanine after 3 hours and 12 hours incubation. Fr the 5 μM L-phenylalanine, a statistically significant decrease in Bcl-2 was observed after 6 hours of incubation. For the 25 μM L-phenylalanine, a statistically significant decrease in Bcl-2 and a statistically significant increase in Caspase-3 were observed after 12 hours of incubation. A statistically significant decrease in Bcl-2 indicates a change in the apoptotic potential and a statistically significant increase in Caspase-3 confirms the cells are undergoing apoptosis. There was a constant trend for the decrease in Bcl-2 compared to the control even though, due to sample size and standard deviation, these time points were not statistically significant in this experiment.

Western Blot Analysis of Building Block Component D-Phenylalanine:

D-Phenylalanine, a chemically synthetic form of the bioactive L-Phenylalanine, was tested for comparison to L-phenylalanine. For all three concentrations (5 μM, 25 μM, and 100 μM of D-Phenylalanine, there was a significant reduction in Bcl-2 expression after 6 hours of incubation. In addition, for the 5 μM and 25 μM, there was a significant reduction after 3 hours of incubation. For the 5 μM and 100 μM concentrations, a significant increase in Caspase-3 expression was observed after 6 hours of incubation.

Western Blot Analysis of Building Block Component DL-Phenylalanine:

DL-Phenylalanine was also tested for comparison to L-Phenylalanine. Again, concentrations of 5 μM, 25 μM, and 100 μM were tested on Skmel-28 cells. The incubation periods were 3, 6, 12 and 24 hours. A statistically significant increase in Caspase-3 was observed after 3 hours of incubation. A statistically significant decrease in Bcl-2 was observed after 24 hours of incubation. Although a decreasing Bcl-2 and increasing Caspase-3 trend at all other concentrations and incubation time points, they were not statistically significant in this experiment.

Western Blot Analysis of Building Block Component L-Tyrosine:

L-Tyrosine is a building block component for the synthesis of quinone ring structure of CoQ10. Initial testing of L-Tyrosine did not result in a high enough protein concentration for western blot analysis. From this study concentrations under 25 μM were tested for Western Blot Analysis. The DMEM/F12 medium used contained L-Tyrosine disodium salt concentration of 0.398467 M. The initial concentration was increased by 500 nM, 5 μM, and 15 μM. A statistically significant increase in Caspase-3 was observed for the 500 nM concentration after 12 hours of incubation. A statistically significant increase in Caspase-3 was also observed for the 5A statistically significant decrease in Bcl-2 was observed for the 5 μM concentration after 24 hours of incubation. A statistically significant decrease in Bcl-2 was observed for the 500 μM and 5 μM concentrations after 24 hours of incubation.

Western Blot Analysis of Building Block Component D-Tyrosine:

D-Tyrosine, a synthetic form of L-Tyrosine, was tested for comparison against the L-Tyrosine apoptotic effect on the melanonal cells. Based on initial studies with L-Tyrosine, concentrations below 25 μM were chosen for the western blot analysis. The concentrations tested were 1 μm, 5 μM, and 15 μM. D-Tyrosine showed a reduction in Bcl-2 expression for the 5 μM and 15 μM concentrations for 12 and 24 hour time periods. Caspase-3 was significantly increased for the concentration of 5 μM for 3, 12 and 24 time periods. Also there was an increase in Caspase-3 expression for the 1 μM for 12 and 24 hour time period. In addition there is an increase in Caspase-3 expression for 5 μM for the 12 hour time period.

Western Blot Analysis of Building Block Component DL-Tyrosine:

DL-Tyrosine, a synthetic form of L-Tyrosine, was also tested for comparison against L-Tyrosine's apoptotic effect on the cells. There is a statistical decrease in Bcl-2 expression seen in the 1 μM and 15 μM concentrations after 12 hours incubation and for the 5 μM after 24 hour of incubation. An increase in Caspase-3 expression was also observed for the 5 μM and 15 μM after 12 hours of incubation.

Western Blot Analysis of Building Block Component 4-Hydroxy-Phenylpyruvate:

4-Hydroxy-phenylpyruvate is derived from Tyrosine and Phenylalanine amino acids and may play a role in the synthesis of the ring structure. The concentration of 1 μM, 5 μM, and 15 μM were tested for Bcl-2 and Caspase-3 expression. For the 5 μM and 15 μM concentrations there is a significant reduction in Bcl-2 expression after 24 hours of incubation and a significant increase in Caspase-3 expression after 12 hours of incubation.

Western Blot Analysis of Building Block Component Phenylacetate:

Phenylacetate has the potential to be converted to 4-Hydroxy-benzoate, which plays a role in the attachment of the side chain to the ring structure. The concentration tested were 1 μM, 5 μM, and 15 μM. For phenylacetate there was a decrease in Bcl-2 expression for the concentration of 5 μM and 15 μM after 12 hours and 24 hours of incubation. An increase in Caspase-3 expression was observed for the concentration of 5 μM and 15 μM after 12 hours and 24 hours of incubation.

Western Blot Analysis of Building Block Component 3-Methoxy-4-hydroxymandelate (Vanillylmandelate or VMA):

VMA is an additional component for the synthesis of the CoQ10 quinone ring structure. The concentrations tested were 100 nM, 250 nM, 500 nM, 1 μM, 25 μM, 50 μM, and 100 μM. Though no statistically significant apoptotic effect was observed in this experiment, the data indicated a downward trend of Bcl-2 expression.

Western Blot Analysis of Building Block Component Vanillic Acid:

Vanillic is a precursor for the synthesis of the quinone ring and was tested at a concentration of 500 nm, 5 μM, and 15 μM. A western blot analysis measured Bcl-2 and Caspase-3 expression. Vanillic Acid was shown to significantly reduce Bcl-2 expression for the concentrations of 500 nM and 5 μM at the 24 hour incubation time point. For the 15 μM concentration there is a reduction in Bcl-2 expression after 3 hours of incubation. For the cells incubated with 15 μM for 24 hours there was a significant increase in Caspase-3 expression.

Western Blot Analysis of Building Block Component 4-Hydroxybenzoate:

4-Hydroxybenzoate acid plays a role in the attachment of the isoprenoid side chain to the ring structure. The concentrations tested were 500 nM, 1 μM, and 50 μM. There was a significant reduction in Bcl-2 expression for the 15 μM concentration after 24 hours of incubation.

Western Blot Analysis of Building Block Component 4-Pyridoxine:

Pyridoxine is another precursor building block for the synthesis of the quinone ring structure of CoQ10. The concentrations tested for this compound are 5 μM, 25 μM, and 100 μM. The cells were assayed for their levels of Bcl-2 and Caspase-3. Pyridoxine showed a significant reduction in Bcl-2 after 24 hours of incubation in melanoma cells.

Western Blot Analysis of Building Block Component Panthenol:

Panthenol plays a role in the synthesis of the quinone ring structure of CoQ10. The concentrations tested on melanoma cells were 5 μM, 25 μM, and 100 μM. This compound showed a significant reduction in Bcl-2 expression for the 25 μM concentration.

Western Blot Analysis of Building Block Component Mevalonic:

Mevalonic Acid is one of the main components for the synthesis of CoQ10. This compound was tested at the concentrations of 500 nM, 1 μM, 25 μm, and 50 μM. There was no significant reduction in Bcl-2 expression or an increase in Caspase-3 expression in this experiment.

Western Blot Analysis of Building Block Component Acetylglycine:

Another route for the synthesis of CoQ10 is the isoprenoid (side chain) synthesis. The addition of Acetylglycine converts Coenzyme A to Acetyl-CoA which enters the mevalonic pathway for the synthesis of the isoprenoid synthesis. The concentrations tested were 5 μM, 25 μM, and 100 μM. The testing of Acetylglycine showed significant decrease in Bcl-2 expression after 12 hours of incubation for the concentration of 5 μM and 25 μM. A significant decrease in Bcl-2 was recorded for the 100 μM concentration at the 24 hour incubation time point.

Western Blot Analysis of Building Block Component Acetyl-CoA:

Acetyl-CoA is a precursor for the mevalonic pathway for the synthesis of CoQ10. The concentrations tested were 500 nm, 1 μM, 25 μM, and 50 μM. There was no significant observed reduction in Bcl-2 or increase in Caspase-3 expression for the time points and concentrations tested.

Western Blot Analysis of Building Block Component L-Tyrosine in Combination with Farnesyl:

L-Tyrosine is one of the precursors for the synthesis of the quinone ring structure for CoQ10. Previous experiment tested the reaction of L-Tyrosine in medium with L-Phenylalanine and L-Tyrosine. In this study L-Tyrosine was examined in medium without the addition of L-Phenylalanine and L-Tyrosine. In this study the final concentrations of L-Tyrosine tested were 500 nM, 5 μM, and 15 μM. Farnesyl was tested at a concentration of 50 μM. There was no observed significant response for the 3 and 6 hour time points.

Western Blot Analysis of Building Block Component L-Phenylalanine in Combination with Farnesyl:

L-Phenylalanine, a precursor for the synthesis of the quinone ring structure, was examine in combination with farnesyl in medium free of L-Tyrosine and L-Phenylalanine. A western blot analysis was performed to assay the expression of Bcl-2 and Caspase-3. The final concentrations of L-Phenylalanine were: 5 μM, 25 μM, and 100 μM. Farnesyl was added at a concentration of 50 μM. This study showed a decrease in Bcl-2 expression for most of the concentrations and combinations tested as depicted in table 55, below.

TABLE 55 L- 3 hr 6 hr 12 hr 24 hr Phenylalanine Bcl-2 Cas-3 Bcl-2 Cas-3 Bcl-2 Cas-3 Bcl-2 Cas-3  5 μM X 5 μM w/ X X Farnesyl  25 μM X X 25 μM w/ X X Farnesyl 100 μM X X X 100 μM w/ X Farnesyl

Cell Proliferation Assay of the Combination of 4-Hydroxy-Benzoate with Benzoquinone:

This set of experiments used a cell proliferation assay to assess the effect of combining different building block molecules on cell proliferation.

The first study examined the effect of combining 4-Hydroxy-Benzoate with Benzoquinone. Cells were incubated for 48 hours, after which a cell count was performed for the live cells. Each test group was compared to the control, and each combination groups were compared to Benzoquinone control. The compounds were statistically analyzed for the addition of Benzoquinone. The following table summarizes the cell count results wherein the X mark indicates a statistical decrease in cell number.

TABLE 56 Compared to 4- Hydroxy to Compared to compound w/o Benzoquinone 4-Hydroxy Compared to Ctrl Benzoquinone Control 500 nm X 500 nm w/ Benzo X X (35 μM) 500 nm w/ Benzo X X (70 μM) 1 μm X 1 μm w/ Benzo X X (35 μM) 1 μm w/ Benzo X X (70 μM) 50 μm X 50 μm w/ Benzo X (35 μM) 50 μm w/ Benzo X X X (70 μM)

There is a significant decrease in cell number for the cells incubated with 4-Hydroxybenzoic and benzoquinone and in combination. For the combination of 50 μM 4-Hydroxybenzoate in combination with 70 μM Benzoquinone there is significant reduction in cell number compared to the Benzoquinone control. This suggests a synergistic effect for this molar ratio.

Additional studies were performed testing additional molar ratios. For the first test 4-Hydroxybenzoic were tested at concentrations of 500 nM, 1 μM, and 50 μM. These concentrations were tested in combination with 2,3-Dimethoxy-5-methyl-p-benzoquinone (Benzo). The concentration of Benzo tested were 25 μM, 50 μM, and 100 μM. Melanoma cells were grown to 80% confluency and seeded in 6 well plates at a concentration of 40K cells per well. The cells were treated with CoQ10, 4-Hydroxybenzoate, Benzo, and a combination of 4-Hydroxybenzoate/Benzo.

A T-test was performed with p<0.05 as statistically significant. An X signifies a statistical decrease in cell number.

TABLE 57 Ctrl vs Benzo 25 μM X Ctrl vs Benzo (B) 50 μM Ctrl vs Benzo (B) 100 uM X Ctrl vs 4-Hydroxybenzoate (HB) 500 nm X Ctrl vs HB 1 μM X Ctrl vs HB 50 μM X 500 nM HB vs 500 nM HB w/ 25 B X 500 nM HB vs 500 nM HB w/ 50 B X 500 nM HB vs 500 nM HB w/ 100 B X 1 uM HB vs 1 μM HB w/ 25 B X 1 uM HB vs 1 μM HB w/ 50 B X 1 uM HB vs 1 μM HB w/ 100 B 50 uM HB vs 50 μM HB w/ 25 B X 50 uM HB vs 50 μM HB w/ 50 B X 50 uM HB vs 50 μM HB w/ 100 B 500 nM HB w/ 25 B vs 25 B X 500 nM HB w/ 50 B vs 50 B X 500 nM HB w/ 100 B vs 100 B X 1 μM HB w/ 25 B vs 25 B X 1 μM HB w/ 50 B vs 50 B X 1 μM HB w/ 100 B vs 100 B 50 μM HB w/ 25 B vs 25 B X 50 μM HB w/ 50 B vs 50 B X 50 μM HB w/ 100 B vs 100 B

There is a significant decrease in cell proliferation for the treatment medium containing HB. Moreover the combination of the HB with benzoquinone showed a significant reduction in cell number compare to the cells incubated with the corresponding benzoquinone concentrations.

A cell proliferation assay was also performed on neonatal fibroblast cells. The concentrations of HB tested were 500 nM, 5 μM, and 25 μM. HB was also tested in combination with benzoquinone at a concentrations of 25 μM, 50 and 100 μM. Melanoma cells were seeded at 40 k cells per well and were treated for 24 hours. The cells were trypsinized and quantified using a coulter counter.

Statistical analysis did not show a significant reduction in fibroblast cells. This indicates minimal to no toxicity in normal cells.

Cell Proliferation Assay of the Combination of Phenylacetate and Benzoquinone:

Phenyl acetate is a precursor for the synthesis of 4-Hydroxybenzoic acid (facilitates the attachment of the ring structure. A cell proliferation assay was performed to assay the effect of incubating phenylacetate in combination with CoQ10 and Benzoquinone.

TABLE 58 Ctrl and 25/25 μM Ben X Ctrl and 25/50 μM Ben X Ctrl and 25/100 μM Ben X Ctrl and 25/25 μM Q-10 X Ctrl and 25/25 μM Q-10 X Ctrl and 25/50 μM Q-10 X Ctrl and 25/100 μM Q-10 X Ctrl and Ben 25 X Ctrl and Ben 50 X Ctrl and Ben 100 X Ctrl and Q-10 25 Ctrl and Q-10 50 Ctrl and Q-10 100 X Ben 25 μM and 500 nM/25 μM Ben X Ben 25 μM and 5 nM/25 μM Ben X Ben 25 μM and 25 nM/25 μM Ben X Ben 50 μM and 500 nM/50 μM Ben X Ben 50 μM and 5 nM/50 μM Ben X Ben 50 μM and 25 nM/50 μM Ben X Ben 100 μM and 500 nM/100 μM Ben Ben 100 μM and 5 nM/100 μM Ben Ben 100 μM and 25 nM/100 μM Ben Q-10 25 μM and 500 nM/25 μM Q-10 X Q-10 25 μM and 5 nM/25 μM Q-10 X Q-10 25 μM and 25 nM/25 μM Q-10 X Q-10 50 μM and 500 nM/50 μM Q-10 X Q-10 50 μM and 5 nM/50 μM Q-10 X Q-10 50 μM and 25 nM/50 μM Q-10 X Q-10 100 μM and 500 nM/100 μM Q-10 X Q-10 100 μM and 5 nM/100 μM Q-10 X Q-10 100 μM and 25 nM/100 μM Q-10 X

The data indicates the addition of phenylacetate in combination with benzoquinone significantly decreases the cellular proliferation. The combination with CoQ10 and phenylacetate significantly decrease the cell number compared to incubation with CoQ10 and benzoquinone alone.

Cell Proliferation Assay of the Combination of 4-Hydroxy-Benzoate with Farnesyl:

4-Hydroxy-Benzoate was incubated in combination with Farnesyl. The summary of the results are listed below. 4-Hydroxybenzoate groups were compared to the control and Farnesyl control groups. The X signifies a statistical decrease in cell number.

TABLE 59 Compared to 4- Hydroxy to Compared to 4-Hydroxy- compound w/o Farnesyl Benzoate Compared to Ctrl Farnesyl Control 500 nm X 500 nm w/ Farnesyl X (35 μM) 500 nm w/ Farnesyl X (70 μM) 1 μm Error 1 μm w/ Farnesyl Error (35 μM) 1 μm w/ Farnesyl Error (70 μM) 50 μm X 50 μm w/ Farnesyl X (35 μM) 50 μm w/ Farnesyl X (70 μM)

Cell Proliferation Assay of the Combination of L-Phenylalanine with Benzoquinone:

A cell proliferation assay was performed to test the combination of L-Phenylalanine combined with Benzoquinone. Below is a summary of the results of L-Phenylalanine compared to the control and Benzoquinone control. The X signifies a statistical decrease.

TABLE 60 Compared to L- Phenylalanine to Compared to compound w/o Benzoquinone L-Phenylalanine Compared to Ctrl Benzoquinone Control 5 μM 5 μm w/ Benzo X (50 μM) 5 μm w/ Benzo X (100 μM) 25 μm 25 μm w/ Benzo X (50 μM) 25 μm w/ Benzo X (100 μM) 100 μm 100 μm w/ Benzo X X X (50 μM) 100 μm w/ Benzo X X X (100 μM)

A similar synergistic role is seen for the L-Phenylalanine combined with Benzoquinone.

Cell Proliferation Assay of the Combination of L-Phenylalanine with Farnesyl:

Preliminary results for combination cell proliferation study of L-Phenylalanine incubated in combination with Farnesyl. The L-Phenylalanine were compared to the control and Farnesyl control group. An X signifies a statistical decrease in cell number.

TABLE 61 Compared to L- Phenylalanine to Compared to compound w/o Farnesyl L-Phenylalanine Compared to Ctrl Farnesyl Control 5 μM 5 μm w/ Farnesyl (50 μM) 5 μm w/ Farnesyl (100 μM) 25 μm X 25 μm w/ Farnesyl X X X (50 μM) 25 μm w/ Farnesyl X X X (100 μM) 100 μm X 100 μm w/ Farnesyl X X (50 μM) 100 μm w/ Farnesyl X (100 μM)

Cell Proliferation Assay of the Combination of L-Tyrosine with Benzoquinone:

L-Tyrosine was incubated in combination with Benzoquinone after which a cell count was performed. The groups were compared the control groups and Benzoquinone control group.

TABLE 62 Compared to L- Tyrosine to Compared to Compared compound w/o Benzoquinone L-Tyrosine to Ctrl Benzoquinone Control 500 nm 500 nm w/ Benzo (50 μM) 500 nm w/ Benzo (100 μM) 5 μm X 5 μm w/ Benzo (50 μM) X 5 μm w/ Benzo X (100 μM) 15 μm X 15 μm w/ Benzo X (50 μM) 15 μm w/ Benzo x (100 μM)

The addition of Benzoquinone did not amplify the effect of L-Tyrosine on the cell number.

Cell Proliferation Assay of the Combination of L-Tyrosine with Benzoquinone:

This study examined the combination of L-Tyrosine with Farnesyl. The groups were compared to control and Farnesyl control groups.

TABLE 63 Compared to L- Tyrosine to Compared to compound w/o Farnesyl L-Tyrosine Compared to Ctrl Farnesyl Control 500 nm 500 nm w/ Farnesyl (50 μM) 500 nm w/ Farnesyl (50 μM) 5 μm X 5 μm w/ Farnesyl X (50 μM) 5 μm w/ Farnesyl X (100 μM) 15 μm X 15 μm w/ Farnesyl X (50 μM) 15 μm w/ Farnesyl X (100 μM)

Combining L-Tyrosine and Farnesyl does not appear to have a synergistic effect on reducing the cell number in this experiment.

The synthesis of the CoQ10 is divided into two main parts, which consist of the synthesis of the ring structure and synthesis of the side chain structure. Here, oncogenic cells were supplemented with compounds which are precursors for the synthesis of the side chain and the ring structure components. Our results have focused the study to 3 main components involved in the synthesis of the ring structure and two compounds that play a role in the attachment of the ring structure to the side chain structure. The three compounds that have shown a significant reduction in Bcl-2 and increase in Caspase-3 expression are: 1) L-Phenylalanine, 2) L-Tyrosine and 3) 4-Hydroxyphenylpyruvate. The two compounds involved with the attachment of the side chain to the ring structure are: 1) 4-hydroxy benzoate and 2) Phenylacetate.

Our results also showed that exogenous delivery of these compounds in combination with 2,3 Dimethoxy-5-methyl-p-benzoquinone (benzoquinone) significantly inhibits cell proliferation. This indicates a supplementation of the ring structure with compounds for the attachment of the side chain to the benzoquinone ring may supplement an impaired CoQ10 synthesis mechanism. This may also assist in the stabilization of the molecule to maintain the functional properties required by cellular processes. Phenylacetate is a precursor for the synthesis of 4-Hydroxybenzoate, which exogenous delivery in combination with benzoquinone has a similar effect in oncogenic cells.

Example 24: Modulation of Gene Expression by Coenzyme Q10 in Cell Model for Diabetes

Coenzyme Q10 is an endogenous molecule with an established role in the maintenance of normal mitochondrial function by directly influencing oxidative phosphorylation. Experimental evidence is presented that demonstrates the ability of Coenzyme Q10 in modulating intracellular targets that serve as key indices of metabolic disorders, such as diabetes, in a manner representative of therapeutic endpoints.

In order to understand how Coenzyme Q10 regulates expression of genes associated with the cause or treatment of diabetes, immortalized primary kidney proximal tubular cell line derived from human kidney (HK-2) and primary cultures of the human aortic smooth muscle cells (HASMC) were used as experimental models. The HK-2 and HASMC cells are normally maintained in culture at 5.5 mM glucose, which is a concentration that corresponds to a range considered normal in human blood. However, in order to simulate a diabetic environment, both cell lines were subsequently maintained at 22 mM glucose, which corresponds to the range observed in human blood associated with chronic hyperglycemia. The cells were subsequently allowed to propagate over 3 passages so that the intracellular regulation processes were functionally adapted to mimic a diabetic state. The choice of cell line was based on the physiologic influence of diabetes on renal dysfunction and progression to end-stage renal disease (ESRD) in addition to the progressive pathophysiology of a compromised cardiovascular function.

Effect of Coenzyme Q10 on Gene Expression in HK-2 Cells Using the Diabetes PCR Array

The Diabetes PCR array (SABiosciences) offers a screen for 84 genes simultaneously. The 4 treatments tested in this study were:

-   -   HK-2;     -   HK-2 H maintained 22 mM glucose;     -   HK2(H)+50 μM Coenzyme Q10; and     -   HK2(H)+100 μM Coenzyme Q10.

A stringent analysis of the Real time PCR data of the HK-2 samples on the Diabetes Arrays (Cat # PAHS-023E, SABiosciences Frederick Md.) was made to exclude all results where gene regulation was not at least a two-fold regulation over HK-2 normal untreated cells with a p value of less than 0.05. Genes that were observed to be regulated either by chronic hyperglycemia or by Coenzyme Q10 are listed in Table 64 and their functions and subcellular locations (derived from Ingenuity Pathway Analysis) are listed in Table 65.

TABLE 64 HK-2(H)-50 μM HK-2(H)-100 μM HK-2(H) p Coenzyme Q10 p Coenzyme Q10 p Genes Fold regulation value Fold regulation value Fold regulation value CEACAM1 1.26 0.409 3.47 0.067 5.36 0.032 PIK3C2B 1.48 0.131 2.32 0.115 3.31 0.003 INSR −1.09 0.568 2.51 0.103 2.88 0.024 TNF 2.00 0.005 2.57 0.042 2.81 0.020 ENPP1 −1.50 0.002 1.42 0.238 2.67 0.038 PRKCB −1.75 0.005 1.82 0.280 2.49 0.042 DUSP4 1.27 0.318 1.24 0.455 2.26 0.060 SELL −1.58 0.219 1.77 0.042 2.06 0.021 SNAP25 −1.00 0.934 1.46 0.377 1.97 0.059

TABLE 65 Symbol Entrez Gene Name Location Type(s) CEACAM1 carcinoembryonic antigen-related cell Plasma transmembrane adhesion molecule 1 (biliary Membrane receptor glycoprotein) PIK3C2B phosphoinositide-3-kinase, class 2, Cytoplasm kinase beta polypeptide INSR insulin receptor Plasma kinase Membrane TNF tumor necrosis factor (TNF Extracellular cytokine superfamily, member 2) Space ENPP1 ectonucleotide Plasma enzyme pyrophosphatase/phosphodiesterase 1 Membrane PRKCB protein kinase C, beta Cytoplasm kinase DUSP4 dual specificity phosphatase 4 Nucleus phosphatase SELL selectin L Plasma other Membrane SNAP25 synaptosomal-associated protein, Plasma transporter 25 kDa Membrane

Among the detected RNA transcripts with modulated levels, the Carcino Embryonic Antigen Cell Adhesion Molecule 1 (CEACAM1) was identified as being highly upregulated in HK2(H) cells, particularly with 100 μM Coenzyme Q10 treatment. CEACAM-1, also known as CD66a and BGP-I, is a 115-200 KD type 1 transmembrane glycoprotein that belongs to the membrane-bound CEA subfamily of the CEA superfamily. On the surface of cells, it forms noncovalent homo- and heterodimers. The extracellular region contains three C2-type Ig-like domains and one N-terminal V-type Ig-like domain. Multiple splice variants involving regions C-terminal to the second C2-type domain (aa 320 and beyond) exist. The lack of intact CEACAM1 expression in mice has been proposed to promote the metabolic syndrome associated with diabetes, while an increase in expression of CEACAM1 is associated with increased insulin internalization, which suggests an increase in insulin sensitivity and glucose utilization (e.g., movement of glucose from blood into the cells), thus mitigating insulin resistance, a hallmark characteristic of type 2 diabetes mellitus.

As shown in Table 55, insulin receptor (INSR) expression was also altered in diabetic HK-2 cells treated with Coenzyme Q10. Without being bound by theory, the increase in expression of INSR with Coenzyme Q10 treatment should enhance insulin sensitivity (either alone or in addition to expression of CEACAM1) with the potential to reverse a major physiologic/metabolic complication associated with diabetes.

Effect of Coenzyme Q10 on Gene Expression in HK-2 Cells Using Mitochondrial Arrays

Differential expression of mitochondrial genes in diabetes was assayed using the mitochondria arrays (Cat# PAHS 087E, SABisociences Frederick Md.). Genes that were regulated by chronic hyperglycemia and/or Coenzyme Q10 treatment are listed in Table 66 while their functions and location are included in Table 67.

TABLE 66 HK2 (H) p HK-2(H) 50 μM p HK-2(H) 100 μM p Genes untreated value Coenzyme Q10 value Coenzyme Q10 value GRPEL1 −1.5837 0.151255 −2.6512 0.04704 −1.933 0.139161 SLC25A3 −8.6338 0.071951 −8.2059 0.0425 −1.6984 0.995194 TOMM40 −2.3134 0.140033 −1.1567 0.115407 −1.9509 0.038762 TSPO −3.6385 0.111056 −6.7583 0.073769 −2.1104 0.167084

TABLE 67 Symbol Entrez Gene Name Location Type(s) GRPEL1 GrpE-like 1, mitochondrial (E. coli) Mitochondria other SLC25A3 solute carrier family 25 Mitochondrial transporter (mitochondrial carrier; phosphate membrane. carrier), member 3 TOMM40 translocase of outer mitochondrial Outer membrane of ion channel membrane 40 homolog (yeast) mitochondria. TSPO translocator protein (18 kDa) Outer membrane of transmembrane mitochondria. receptor

To date, the role of the four mitochondrial genes identified (Table 3) in diabetic HK-2 cells treated with Coenzyme Q10 in diabetes is uncharacterized.

Study 2: Effect of Coenzyme Q10 on Gene Expression in HASMC Cells Using the Diabetes PCR Array

The Diabetes PCR array (SABiosciences) offers a screen for 84 genes simultaneously. The 4 treatments tested in this study were:

-   -   HASMC;     -   HASMC H maintained at 22 mM glucose;     -   HASMC (H)+50 μM Coenzyme Q10; and     -   HASMC (H)+100 μM Coenzyme Q10.

A stringent analysis of the Real time PCR data of the HASMC cell samples on the Diabetes Arrays (Cat # PAHS-023E, SABiosciences Frederick Md.) was made to exclude all results where gene regulation was not at least a two-fold regulation over HASMC normal untreated cells with a p value of less than 0.05. Genes that were observed to be regulated either by chronic hyperglycemia or by Coenzyme Q10 are listed in Table 68.

TABLE 68 p HASMC-(H)-50 μM p HASMC-(H)-100 μM p Genes HASMC-(H) value Coenzyme Q10 value Coenzyme Q10 value AGT 1.3051 0.547507 −1.0169 0.781622 2.3027 0.030195 CCL5 −17.4179 0.013798 −5.3796 0.022489 −4.6913 0.022696 CEACAM1 −5.5629 0.012985 −5.3424 0.014436 −5.8025 0.012948 IL6 2.7085 0.049263 3.8172 0.012685 6.0349 0.000775 INSR 1.4649 0.207788 1.9622 0.081204 2.0801 0.016316 NFKB1 1.482 0.072924 1.3779 0.191191 2.0898 0.027694 PIK3C2B 2.0479 0.218276 1.4331 0.254894 2.6329 0.069422 SELL −1.9308 0.087513 1.2476 0.393904 4.0371 0.000177 TNF −1.814 0.108322 −3.2434 0.043526 −1.8489 0.133757

In HASMC cells, treatment of hyperglycemic cells with Coenzyme Q10 resulted in the altered expression of genes involved in regulating vascular function (AGT), insulin sensitivity (CEACAM1, INSR, SELL) and inflammation/immune function (IL-6, TNF, CCL5). Without being bound by theory, an increase in expression of INSR may be associated with increased insulin sensitivity in HASMC cells, which is a physiological property that would be beneficial in the treatment of diabetes, while IL-6, in addition to its immunoregulatory properties, has been proposed to affect glucose homeostasis and metabolism, both directly and indirectly, by action on skeletal muscle cells, adipocytes, hepatocytes, pancreatic β-cells and neuroendocrine cells. Upon activation, normal T-cell express and secrete RANTES and chemokine (C-Cmotif) ligand (CCL5). CCL5 is expressed by adipocytes, and serum levels of RANTES are increased in obesity and type 2 diabetes. However, as shown in Table 68, treatment of HASMC cells with Coenzyme Q10 causes a significant decrease in the expression of CCL5. Based on the foregoing data, it is expected that administration of Coenzyme Q10 will have a therapeutic benefit in the management of diabetes.

Effect of Coenzyme Q10 on Gene Expression in HASMC Cells Using Mitochondrial Arrays

Differential expression of mitochondrial genes in diabetes was assayed using the mitochondria arrays (Cat# PAHS 087E, SABisociences Frederick Md.). Genes that were regulated by chronic hyperglycemia and/or Coenzyme Q10 treatment are shown in Table 69.

TABLE 69 p HASMC-(H) 50 uM p HASMC-(H)-100 μM p Genes HASMC-(H) value Coenzyme Q10 value Coenzyme Q10 value BCL2L1 −1.6558 0.244494 −2.7863 0.008744 −2.3001 0.014537 MFN1 −1.4992 0.317009 −1.2585 0.021185 −2.2632 0.005961 PMAIP1 −4.7816 0.206848 −6.8132 0.000158 −4.352 0.000286 SLC25A1 −2.2051 0.020868 −1.834 0.00581 −3.0001 0.03285 SLC25A13 −2.0527 0.035987 −1.5 0.029019 −1.5245 0.043712 SLC25A19 −1.0699 0.417217 −1.4257 0.104814 −2.1214 0.007737 SLC25A22 −2.1747 0.007344 −1.9839 0.0013 −10.3747 0.003437 TIMM44 −1.3605 0.414909 −2.3214 0.004118 −1.9931 0.010206 TOMM40 −1.1982 0.428061 −2.0922 0.002195 −2.2684 0.003272 TSPO −1.402 0.304875 −2.0586 0.061365 −2.3647 0.044656

Treatment of hyperglycemic HASMC cells with Coenzyme Q10 resulted in altered expression of genes that regulate programmed cell death or apoptosis (BCL2L1, PMIAP1 also known as NOXA), transporter proteins (SLC25A1 [citrate transporter], SLC25A13 [aspartate-glutamate exchanger], SLC25A19 [thiamine pyrophosphate transporter] and SLC25A22 [glutamate-hydrogen cotransporter]) and mitochondrial matrix transport proteins (MFN1, TIMM44 and TOMM40). The activities of these transporters play important role in the regulation of precursors essential for the Kreb's cycle and maintenance of mitochondrial oxidative phosphorylation. These results indicate that exposure of diabetic HASMC cells to Coenzyme Q10 is associated with changes in expression of cytoplasmic and mitochondrial genes, which in turn is consistent with Coenzyme Q10 providing a therapeutic benefit in the treatment of diabetes.

A comparison of the data obtained by treating HASMC cells and HK-2 cells with Coenzyme Q10 or in a hyperglycemic environment reveals that 4 genes were commonly regulated by Coenzyme Q10 in both cell lines (e.g., PIK3C2B and SELL in the gene expression assay and TOMM40 and TSPO in the mitochondrial array assay). These results demonstrate that treatment of cells with Coenzyme Q10 in a diabetic environment is associated with altered expression of genes that are known to be involved in the cause or treatment of diabetes.

EQUIVALENTS

Those skilled in the art will recognize, or be able to ascertain using no more than routine experimentation, many equivalents to the specific embodiments and methods described herein. Such equivalents are intended to be encompassed by the scope of the following claims. 

1. A method of identifying a subject afflicted with a metabolic disorder in a Coenzyme Q10 responsive state, the method comprising: (1) detecting the level of expression of at least one marker present in a biological sample obtained from a subject having a metabolic disorder, wherein the at least one marker comprises one or more marker proteins listed in Tables 2-4, 6-29 and 64-69, wherein the subject has been administered Coenzyme Q10; and (2) comparing the level of expression of the at least one marker in the biological sample to the level of expression of the at least one marker present in a control sample, wherein the control sample is a biological sample obtained from the subject prior to administration of Coenzyme Q10, wherein the subject is determined to be afflicted with a metabolic disorder in a Coenzyme Q10 responsive state when the level of expression of the at least one marker in the biological sample is modulated relative to the level of expression of the at least one marker in the control sample. 2-10. (canceled)
 11. The method of claim 1, wherein the metabolic disorder is a disorder selected from the group consisting of diabetes, obesity, pre-diabetes, hypertension, cardiovascular disease, metabolic syndrome, and any key elements of a metabolic disorder.
 12. (canceled)
 13. The method of claim 1, wherein the sample comprises a fluid obtained from the subject.
 14. The method of claim 13, wherein the fluid is selected from the group consisting of blood fluids, vomit, saliva, lymph, and urine.
 15. The method of claim 14, wherein the sample is a blood sample or a component thereof. 16-17. (canceled)
 18. The method of claim 1, wherein the subject is a human.
 19. The method of claim 1, wherein the level of expression of the at least one marker in the biological sample is determined by assaying a transcribed polynucleotide or a portion thereof in the sample.
 20. The method of claim 19, wherein assaying the transcribed polynucleotide comprises amplifying the transcribed polynucleotide.
 21. The method of claim 1, wherein the level of expression of the at least one marker in the subject sample is determined by assaying a protein or a portion thereof in the sample.
 22. The method of claim 1, wherein the at least one marker is assayed using a detection reagent which specifically binds the marker.
 23. (canceled)
 24. The method of claim 22, wherein the detection reagent is selected from the group consisting of an antibody and an antigen-binding antibody fragment.
 25. The method of claim 1, wherein the level of expression of the at least one marker in the sample is determined using a technique selected from the group consisting of polymerase chain reaction (PCR) amplification reaction, reverse-transcriptase PCR analysis, single-strand conformation polymorphism analysis (SSCP), mismatch cleavage detection, heteroduplex analysis, Southern blot analysis, Northern blot analysis, in situ hybridization, array analysis, deoxyribonucleic acid sequencing, restriction fragment length polymorphism analysis, and combinations or sub-combinations thereof, of said sample.
 26. The method of claim 1, wherein the level of expression of the at least one marker in the sample is determined using a technique selected from the group consisting of immunohistochemistry, immunocytochemistry, flow cytometry, Western blot analysis, ELISA and mass spectrometry. 27-34. (canceled)
 35. The method of claim 1, wherein the at least one marker comprises two, three, four, five, ten, twenty, thirty, forty or fifty of the marker proteins listed in Tables 2-4, 6-29 and 64-69. 36-55. (canceled)
 56. The method of claim 1, further comprising continuing administration of Coenzyme Q10 to a subject determined to be afflicted with a metabolic disorder in a Coenzyme Q10 responsive state. 